Mr. Sharp Commo Book
18E Course Book #2 As of 8 February 2017
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 1
Contents BASIC COMMUNICATION RULES ...... 5 BASIC RADIO THEORY ...... 7 ANTENNA THEORY ...... 20 RADIO TELEPHONE OPERATOR (RTO) PROCEDURES ...... 38
RADIO PROCEDURES ...... 40 COMSEC ...... 51
SECURE SYSTEMS ...... 53 SKL ...... 53 KYK-13 ...... 63 RASKL (REALLY SIMPLE KEY LOADER) (KIK-30) ...... 65 VHF RADIO ...... 82
AN/PRC-119F (RT-1523F) ...... 82 SINGLE CHANNEL ...... 83 Scan Operation ...... 84 OTAR (Over the Air Rekey) ...... 85 Frequency Hop ...... 88 Retransmission operations ...... 90 URBAN VERSION AN/PRC-148(V) 4(C) OR (V) 6(C) JEM ...... 92 Loading a key into the radio...... 99 Loading a Load set into the radio ...... 99 BASIC Channel ...... 105 SINCGARS SC Channel ...... 107 SINCGARS FH Channel ...... 108 ANDVT (Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal ...... 110 (BASIC) WIDEBAND SATCOM Channel ...... 112 SATCOM NB Channel ...... 112 SATCOM WB Channel ...... 112 GROUP ...... 114 SCAN ...... 114 Cloning ...... 116 A-320 AMPLIFIER & A-320DPA ...... 119 DATA ...... 122 PDA 184 ...... 123 PDA-184 CHEAT SHEET ...... 123 Retransmission ...... 125 (MA6943) 20W VEHICLE ADAPTER ...... 126 FREQUENCY CODE ...... 128 SELECTED ANTENNA ...... 135
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 2
GROUND WAVE ANTENNAS ...... 141 Whip Antenna or ¼ λ (image) Antenna ...... 141 Antenna Group OE-254: ...... 141 ¼ λ Vertical Whip/"Jungle" Antenna ...... 141 100' Vertical half-Rhombic Antenna ...... 143 ¼ Wave Slant Wire Antennas ...... 143 VHF "J"- Pole Antenna ...... 144 Reverse Scissors Antenna ...... 144 SKY WAVE ANTENNAS ...... 145 Half-wave Dipole Antenna ...... 145 Mulit-band Dipole Two Frequency's ...... 146 Sloping Dipole ...... 146 ½ λ Inverted Vee Antenna ...... 146 ¼ Wave Slant Wire ...... 147 14 % off - center-fed ...... 148 Full wave closed loop ...... 150 Long wire ...... 151 100' Vertical half-Rhombic Antenna (HF / VHF) ...... 153 Sloping Vee Antenna ...... 154 Sloping wire ...... 155 Kailua Offset Antenna ...... 155 AS-2259/GR...... 156 Types of Transmission Line ...... 156 Antenna Troubleshooting ...... 161 CLANDESTINE ANTENNA CONSIDERATIONS ...... 163 HF RADIO ...... 167
AN/PRC-137F SMRS ...... 167 Startup procedure for HF ALE ...... 170 Startup procedure for HF/ FM Voice ...... 171 UHF Initialization Procedures ...... 172 AN/PRC-137H SMRS ...... 179 Install and Operate the RT-2018 (P)(C)/U (outstation) ...... 182 Perform Net-Entry ...... 183 SETUP HF CLEAR VOICE ...... 186 SETUP FM CLEAR/SECURE VOICE ...... 187 UHF (SATCOM) ALE Procedures ...... 188 AN/PRC-150 ...... 190 SOF SYSTEM SATCOM/EQUIPMENT/WAVEFORMS ...... 207
AN/PRC-117G(V)1(C) RT-1949(P)(C) & AN/PRC-152A(V)1(C) RT-19166(P)(C) ...... 216 COMSEC FILL (TEK or KEK for VULOS) ...... 235 VULOS Line of Site (LOS) Comsec Fill Cheat Sheet ...... 236 VULOS Satcom Wide Band (WB) Comsec Fill Cheat Sheet ...... 237
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 3
VULOS Satcom Narrow Band (Comsec Fill) Cheat Sheet ...... 238 SINCGARS Frequency Hopping Cheat Sheet ...... 241 HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW) ...... 242 HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW) Cheat Sheet ...... 243 HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (Computer/Software (Win 7)) ...... 245 PDA-184 CHEAT SHEET ...... 247 DEMAND ASSIGNED/MENT MULTIPLE ACCESS (DAMA) ...... 249 AC Mode Report Codes ...... 254 DAMA Cheat Sheet...... 256 ANW2C (PRC-117G) ...... 259 ANW2C CHEATSHEET ...... 264 IW Setup (PRC-117G) ...... 265 CPA ...... 266 AN/PSC-5C RT-1672C, AN/PSC-5D RT-1672D (MBMMR) ...... 268 VEHICLE COMMUNICATION ...... 306
AN VIC-3 ...... 309 ROVER IV 4 REMOTE OPERATIONS VIDEO ENHANCED RECEIVER ...... 311 FREQUENCY LENGTH CHART ...... 314 FREQUENCY SPECTRUM CHART ...... 316 MORSE CODE ALPHABET/NUMBERS...... 317 MEDEVAC ...... 318 MEDEVAC SAV SER SUP 6 ...... 318
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 4
Basic Communication Rules
Narrowband (NB) Wideband (WB)
Modulation: FM (PSK)/AM FM (FSK)/AM Encryption: ANDVT (D)/Melp (V)/KY-99 Vinson /KY-57/Basic Baud Rate: Voice/Data@ 2400 bps Voice/Data @16000 bps CH. Spacing: 5 kHz channel 25 kHz channel Signal: Digital Audio Analog Audio Satcom Channel 129-191,194-239 9-128,192,193,240-247
All Line Of Sight (LOS) Communication is Wideband.
Typically FM is considered 30 MHz - 90 MHz (VHF - Low)
LOS communications 30 – 90 MHz: FM and Tone Squelch
LOS communication 90 and above: FM /AM and Noise Squelch
Ground to air communications: AM VHF High: 90 – 224.9999 MHz UHF: 225 – 511.9500 MHz
In DAMA configuration code 60 dictates: 2400 BPS/ANDVT (D) or Melp (V)
Satcom / DAMA: FM [FSK (WB)/PSK (NB)]
HPW = Always uses KG-84 Encryption.
Emergency Aircraft Communication: VHF High Guard: 121.5 MHz UHF Guard: 243.000 MHz New Guard: (2009) 406.000 MHz Penalties for unauthorized use
*All rules apply unless dictated otherwise*
The ABC’S of trouble shooting.
A = Antenna – Check the Antenna (Proper length / height) B = Battery – (Proper voltage to radio and PC) C = Connection – Check all connection to and from radio. S = Setting – Check all setting (Radio and PC).
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 5
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 6
Basic Radio Theory 6 February 2017
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
• Electro Magnetic Radiation (EMR) is a form of radiant energy which travels outward (propagates) through space by electromagnetic waves.
• Electromagnetic waves propagate through space at the speed of light. This is a constant velocity.
• 186,000 miles a second • 300,000,000 meters per second.
• Electromagnetic waves have electric and magnetic fields which oscillate perpendicular to each other.
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION:
• Electromagnetic waves have electric and magnetic fields which oscillate perpendicular to each other.
• Vertical or Horizontal polarization (circular at SATCOM)
• Electromagnetic radiation is the number of oscillations of the perpendicular electric and magnetic fields measured per second. This number of oscillations is called a frequency (per second).
• Frequency is expressed in Hertz (formally cycles-per-second)
SINE WAVE
• These oscillations can be represented graphically by a sine wave.
• A sine wave is a mathematical curve (a trigonometric function of an angle) that describes a smooth repetitive oscillation.
• Parts of a sine wave
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 7
WAVES
• There are two related properties of all waves that are important to radio waves: frequency and wavelength.
FREQUENCY
• Frequency is the number of complete cycles that occur within one second.
• Example: One (1) cycle-per-second.
HERTZ
• Cycles-per-Second are known today as “Hertz”.
HERTZ:
• The “Hertz” is named for Heinrich Hertz, a German physicist, who was the first to conclusively prove the existence of electromagnetic waves in 1887.
• The scientific unit of frequency; cycles-per-second, was named “Hertz” in 1968.
WAVELENGTH
• The wavelength is the distance traveled during one complete cycle of the sine wave.
• The distance is typically measured from zero crossing to zero crossing, but may be measured crest to crest (visual aid).
• Wavelength of a radio wave is represented by the Greek letter Lambda.
• The length of a radio wave is represented by the Greek lowercase letter Lambda: λ
• RADIOWAVE VELOCITY: Radio waves travel at the speed of light; 186,000 miles per second or 300,000,000 Meters per second.
• Wavelengths are measured in meters.
• Since the velocity (speed) of a radio wave is constant, the length of a radio wave is calculated as: Wavelength; divide the Velocity (constant) by the Frequency
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 8
WAVELENGTH & FREQUENCY
Since electromagnetic radiation travels at the speed of light, the wavelength of one (1) Hertz is 300,000,000 meters.
A frequency of two (2) cycles-per-second or 2 Hz:
The wavelength for a frequency of 2 Hz:
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
• Electromagnetic radiation includes radio waves, infrared radiation, visible light, ultraviolet waves, X-rays, and gamma rays. Together they make up the electromagnetic spectrum.
• The electromagnetic spectrum is used the designate the entire range of electromagnetic waves arranged in order of their frequencies.
• The difference between them is their wavelength and frequency.
• As frequency increases, the wavelength decreases.
• The upper frequencies have wavelengths a fraction of an inch* long.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 9
RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM
• The wavelengths of Radio Freq waves (formula: λ = V / F)
• 3 MHz (3,000,000 Hz) has a wavelength of 100 METERS: (V/F - 300,000,000 divided by 3,000,000)
• 3 GHz (3,000 MHz) has a wavelength of 0.1 meters: (10cm) (V/F - 300,000,000 divided by 3,000,000,000)
Within the electromagnetic spectrum is the radio frequency spectrum. The RF spectrum is further broken down into “bands” based on the frequency (measured in Hertz) of the wavelengths.
RADIO FREQUENCY BANDS
Description Abbreviation Frequency Range (Radio Application)
Very Low Frequency VLF 3 to 30 KHz Low Frequency LF 30 to 300 KHz Medium Frequency MF 300 to 3000 KHz
High Frequency HF 3 to 30 MHz (PRC-137, PRC-150)
Very High Frequency VHF 30 to 300 MHz (PRC-119, PRC-148, PRC-152A, PSC-5, PRC-137, PRC-117G)
Ultra-High Frequency UHF 300 to 3000 MHz (PRC-148, PRC-152A, PSC-5, PRC-117G)
Super High Frequency SHF 3 to 30 GHz Extremely High Frequency EHF 30 to 300 GHz
*Above the EHF frequency range begins the infrared, visible, and ultraviolet light waves
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 10
HF: In Army radio communications, the HF radio band (3-30 MHz) is used almost exclusively by SOF for long range communications. HF is also used by Naval and Marine forces for short range ship-to-shore communications.
VHF: is typically used by the Regular Army for short and medium range ground communications. It is also the beginning of the satellite frequency band.
UHF: is used for ground to air communications and satellite communications.
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION:
• Electromagnetic waves have electric and magnetic fields which oscillate perpendicular to each other. (*Think two sine-waves at right angles to each other.)
• Polarization refers to the orientation of the electric field.
• Vertical or Horizontal polarization (circular at SATCOM)
• Electromagnetic radiation is the number of oscillations of the perpendicular electric and magnetic fields measured per second. This number of oscillations is called a frequency (per second).
• Frequency is expressed in Hertz (formally cycles-per-second)
Hertz: The completion of one full radio wave cycle.
Electromagnetic spectrum: The varying degrees of radio frequency energy that is used for different purposes.
Velocity: The speed that each radio wave travels.
Medium: The path that EM energy has to travel through to arrive at the distant station.
Radio: Knowing the basic components of a radio set and their functions maximizes the effectiveness of the Special Forces Communicator. Most radio sets consist basically of a transmitter and a receiver. Other items necessary for operation include a source of electrical power, a keying device, and an antenna for radiation and reception of radio waves.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 11
THE RADIO SYSTEM
The basic component of a radio consists of a transmitter and a receiver. Other items necessary for operation include a source of electrical power and an antenna for the radiation and reception of radio waves.
Transmitter is the part of a radio that emits electromagnetic energy; electromagnetic energy carrying intelligence that is transmitted by a radio is called radio waves. A radio wave, as it is transmitted, is the shape of a sine wave, however it does not normally maintain a perfect sine wave shape. It will usually be distorted somewhat by atmospheric conditions, terrain or other interfering objects. The radio wave is transmitted at a certain frequency.
Radiotelephone Transmitter
A basic (simple) transmitter is composed of the following components: Power source Oscillator Keying device Antenna
. Power Source: The power source can be in the form of a power supply which converts AC commercial power or in the form of batteries. The power supply may be physically encased in the transmitter (batteries) or externally connected by cables to the transmitter.
. Oscillator: The oscillator is the part of the transmitter, which produces the frequency the transmitter uses. − The oscillator produces a CARRIER frequency. This frequency is used to transmit between two radio stations. The carrier frequency “carries” the voice, data, etc. − The oscillator contains a crystal which, when current (from the power supply) is applied, oscillates or vibrates at a particular frequency. − In modern radios, the oscillator contains circuitry, which replaces a crystal, but produces the same result. − The carrier frequency, as it is produced by the oscillator, has a constant frequency and constant AMPLITUDE (the amplitude is the power level or magnitude of the signal as seen from zero or neutral). This signal is called CONTINUOUS WAVE (CW) as it is continuous and non-changing. − CONTINUOUS WAVE (CW): Once power is applied to the oscillator and a carrier frequency is being generated, it is transmitted to the listening party. This is a solid tone that does not change pitch and no information is transferred.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 12
• Keying Device: Once power is applied to the oscillator, the carrier frequency is being generated and transmitted to the listening party, this is a solid tone that does not change pitch, and no information is transferred.
− The keying device provides the ability to turn the tone on and off at will. When this is done in a predetermined way, information can be sent. This is the concept behind International Morse Code (IMC).
− In voice transmissions, the keying device is a push-to-talk button on a handset.
• Antenna: Although not considered a part of the transmitter or receiver, an antenna is required for radio communications.
− The antenna is used for the radiation and reception of radio waves.
− Antennas can be of various sizes, depending on the frequency and the type of used.
OTHER COMPONENTS: To increase the basic performance of the transmitter, the following additional components can be added:
• Buffer – Is added to increase the stability of the oscillator.
• RF Amplifier – Is added to increase the output power; to add transmitting distance to the signal.
• A linear amplifier: will increase power, but not change the output signal.
• A non-linear amplifier not only increases the output power, but it will also modify the output signal in some manner.
Keying RF Oscillator Buffer Device Amplifier
Power Supply
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 13
MODULATION
• The basic transmitter only produces a constant “tone” which is turned on and off by a keying device in order to send intelligence (information). • In order to transmit the human voice, a modulator must be added.
• Modulator – is typically associated with voice operations.
− Modulating a signal is simply the mixing of one signal onto another. In voice operation, the Audio Frequency (AF) of human speech (16-20,000 Hz) is mixed onto the carrier frequency, producing a modulated signal.
− Modulation can be accomplished in two ways:
. Amplitude Modulation (AM) . Frequency Modulation (FM)
AMPLITUDE MODULATION (AM) – is the mixing of signals by changing the amplitude (or magnitude) of the signal.
Advantages of AM: • Easier to produce • AM requires less power to produce • Longer range communication • Can be broken down into single side bands
Disadvantages of AM: • Greatly easily affected by electromagnetic interference (EMI). • Relatively small bandwidth 6 KHz. Less information is able to be imposed on signal. • Distortion and fluctuation probable unless SSB is used
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 14
FREQUENCY MODULATION (FM) - Is the mixing of the signals by changing the frequency of the signal. FM is normally voice operation in the VHF and higher frequencies (most conventional Army communications).
Advantages of FM: • Less affected by EMI. • Clearer signal from use of a discriminator. • Wider bandwidth, enabling more information to be imposed on carrier frequency.
Disadvantages of FM: • FM requires more power to produce, but is less effected by atmospheric disturbances. • Due to higher frequency, less distance than AM signals. • Wider bandwidth requires more use of the radio spectrum to operate.
AM, FM Modulation
CARRIER WAVE SIDE BANDS: To further divide the frequency spectrum into smaller and more useful portions, the Upper and Lower Sidebands of the carrier frequency are used to accomplish this, they are:
Upper Sideband (USB) Lower Sideband (LSB)
• Advantages of single side band (SSB):
− Does not take up entire bandwidth of operating frequency. − Clearer more intelligible signal, less fading/distortion. − Allows more power to be added to the SSB through filters and buffers.
Typical Radiotelephone Receiver
A receiver is used to collect and interpret incoming signals, whether they are CW, voice, or data.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 15
A receiver is comprised of the following components:
• A Power Source: The power source can be in the form of a power supply which converts AC commercial power or in the form of batteries. The power supply may be physically encased in the transmitter (batteries) or externally connected by cables to the transmitter. • An antenna: although strictly not part of the receiver, is used to collect electromagnetic energy from the atmosphere and propagate it through the transmission line to the receiver. • In an AM receiver, a DETECTOR detects intelligence on the carrier wave, separates it, and channels the information to the point of consumption. • In an FM receiver, a DISCRIMINATOR basically performs the same functions as the detector in the am receiver. • For CW and voice operation, the point of consumption is a headset, which converts the electric AF signal to an audio signal. • For data, the point of consumption is a radio teletype terminal or visual display. • To increase the signal level from the antenna, an RF AMPLIFIER is added between the antenna and detector. • To increase the level (power) of the information after detection, an AF amplifier is added between the detector and the point of consumption.
AM Receiver
Audio Radio Listening Detector Frequency Frequency Device Amplifier Amplifier
Power Supply
FM Receiver
Audio Radio Listening Frequency Discriminato Frequency Device r Amplifier Amplifier
Power Supply
ANTENNA:
• Although not considered a part of the transmitter or receiver (?), an antenna is required for radio communications. • The antenna is used for the radiation and reception of radio waves. • Antennas can be of various sizes, depending on the freq. and the type of antenna used. • The antenna is the part of the communications link that the communicator has the most influence on.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 16
• The antenna is comprised of the following components: − Radiating element – The part of the antenna connected to the antenna connector on the radio (+). This is a wire or tubular portion element and is normally considered “live”. − Ground element –The part of the antenna connected to the ground (-) post of the radio. This ground post can then be connected to a chassis ground of a vehicle, a grounding stake or a wire element (counterpoise). − Transmission line – The part of an antenna which carries the electrical signals to or from the radio to the antenna (TX & RX) with minimal loss. − The physical length of the antenna is dependent on the electrical length of the frequency. Each frequency has its own physical wavelength.
• Radio signals • Once the signal is produced in the transmitter, it is propagated (to spread, recreate, to travel) through the transmission line to the antenna, where it is radiated into space. The propagation continues through a medium (something the signal must travel through) to the receiving antenna, which collects the signals and prepares them through the receiving antenna’s transmission line to the radio.
SIMPLEX COMMUNICATION: Using one radio set at each station, one frequency, and one way at a time (push to talk) PTT conversation.
DUPLEX COMMUNICATION: Using two radio set, or a separate transmitter and receiver (at each station), two frequencies and two way simultaneous conversations. A common example is a telephone.
HALF-DUPLEX COMMUNICATION: Using one radio set (at each station), two frequencies, and one way PTT conversation, A common example is Satcom (uplink - downlink) or a ReTrans site.
COMMON TERMINOLOGY RELATED TO RADIO THEORY
• ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY: is radiant energy such as radio waves, heat waves, light, x-rays, gamma rays, and cosmic rays
• ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT (EME): the sum of electromagnetic energy (electromagnetic radiating) encountered by a military force, system, or platform in an area during the performance of its mission
• ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS (E3): Impact of the EME upon the operational capability of military forces, equipment, systems, and platforms.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 17
• ELEMENTS OF E3 • Atmospheric disturbances, such as lightning and precipitation (P-Static). • Solar and cosmic interference, such as solar flares. • Electrostatic discharge (ESD). • Electromagnetic interference (EMI) from manmade sources. • Radiation hazards to personnel, ordinance, and fuel.
• DISCIPLINES OF E3 • Electrostatic discharge (ESD) – The transfer of electrostatic charge between bodies at different electrostatic potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. • A common example is the shock received when touching a door knob after walking across a nylon carpet. • Voltages range from 3,500 to 12,000 volts.
• ELECTROMAGNETIC PULSE (EMP) - A high intensity, short duration electromagnetic wave generated when a nuclear device is detonated
INTELLEGENCE AND ELECTRONIC WARFARE (IEW)
• INTELLIGENCE - is the product resulting from the collection, evaluation, analysis, integration, and interpretation of available information concerning the enemy?
• ELECTRONIC WARFARE - consists of military actions taken to exploit, reduce, or prevent effective enemy use of electromagnetic energy, and measures taken to ensure effective friendly use of electromagnetic energy.
• ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI): interference which adversely affects the operational capability of personnel, equipment, and ordinance.
• ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATABILITY (EMC): the condition which prevails when equipment and systems operate within design tolerances in their intended EME without generating EMI or without being degraded by EMI.
• OPERATIONAL TECHNIQUES TO ATTAIN EMC
• Site selection, Frequency management, Time-sharing scheduling
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 18
• PROTECTIVE MEASURES TO ATTAIN EMC • Shielding • Grounding • Bonding (metal to metal junctions) • Filtering • Corrosion control • Preventive maintenance
• RADIO ENEMIES • Heat • Dirt • Direct sun light (DMD’s, LCD’s etc.) • Operating system while still in carrying case
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 19
Antenna Theory 8 February 2017
Terminology RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION
There are two major types of radio wave propagation:
SKYWAVE and GROUND WAVE
GROUND WAVE/LINE-OF-SIGHT PROPAGATION: Describe and depict the characteristics of ground wave communications and ground conductivity of the earth’s surface.
There are three components of ground wave/line-of-sight (LOS) propagation
1. Direct wave – The portion of EM energy that reaches the distant station on a direct path (LOS). This is the portion we are mainly concerned with.
2. Ground/surface wave – The portion of EM energy that travels along the surface of the earth to the distant station.
3. Ground reflected wave – The portion of EM energy that is reflected off the ground that reaches the distant station. (Bounces off the ground)
Optical horizon: Line of sight distance to horizon: D = 1.2247 √h
Radio horizon: Conductivity of the earth allows EM energy to travel 15% further over the horizon than the eye can see: D = √2h.
Where D = distance to horizon in statute miles. H = antenna elevation (AGL) in feet.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 20
GROUND WAVE TERMINOLOGY
Fading – The effect of slightly out of phase signals arriving at the distant station at the same time.
Cancellation – the effect of out of phase EM energy arriving at the distant station at the same time.
Diffraction – the slight bending of EM energy around or over an obstacle.
Shadow zone – the area within LOS communication that blocks EM energy from the distant station.
Dielectric constant: is a measurement of the insulating capability of a substance. This number is applied to terrain to show ground efficiency. • Deserts with little water have low conductivity. (Low dielectric const #) • Marshlands with high water tables have high conductivity. (high dielectric const #)
EFFECT OF GROUND CONDUCTIVITY: • The earth ‘grounds’ the radio wave as it travels • High conductivity, less tilt, longer range (less friction) • Low conductivity, more tilt, shorter range (more friction) • Dielectric constant: is a measurement of the insulating capability of a substance. • Dielectric constant is a measurement of the insulating capability of a substance.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 21
GROUND WAVE/LOS RULES OF THUMB
Increase antenna height – Increase transmission distance. Increase transmitter power – Increase transmission distance. Lower transmitter frequency – Increase transmission distance.
Reposition the antenna if received – Use like-polarized antennas: signal is faded or cancelled. Vertical-to-Vertical
Polarization
• The polarization of an antenna refers to the orientation of the electric field (E-plane) of the radio wave with respect to the Earth’s surface.
• The magnetic field of a radio wave is at right angles to the electric field.
COMPONENTS OF AN ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE
HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION VERTICAL POLARIZATION
HF SKYWAVE PROPAGATION
Graphically depict the characteristics of sky wave communications, to include the earth’s atmosphere and its effects on radio waves.
The Ionosphere is a portion of the earth’s atmosphere that allows propagation of high frequency radio waves to be transmitted from one station to another over great distances.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 22
EARTHS ATMOSPHERE
Troposphere – is the portion of the Earth’s atmosphere which extends from the surface to a height of about 3 – 11 miles (generally 7.5 miles). Virtually all weather phenomena take place in the troposphere. The variations in temperature, density and pressure have an effect on radio waves.
Stratosphere – is located between the troposphere and the ionosphere. The temperature throughout this region is generally constant there is little water vapor present. The Stratosphere has little effect on radio waves..
Ionosphere – first useful and predictable layer of earth’s atmosphere used for HF sky wave communications. It contains four layers of electrically charged ions which enable radio waves to be propagated great distances due to refraction.
IONOSPHERE IONIZATION
Ionization - The process of bombardment of the suns ultra-violet radiation into the ionosphere which strips a negative electron away from a gas atom which makes it imbalanced and positively charged.
Recombination – The process of the stripped electrons searching for and recombining with the original atoms.
IONIZATION
The process of ionization excites the gas atoms by stripping away the negative electrons. After the electrons are stripped away, they are in search of the positive gas atoms (recombination). This makes the ionosphere or medium denser so to speak, and enables the electromagnetic energy to be refracted (due to a change in medium) away from the ionized layers and back to earth.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 23
IONOSPHERE LAYERS
• The composition of the atmosphere changes with altitude. Because of this, the ion production rate also changes and this leads to the formation of several distinct ionization peaks.
• These are called the “D” “E” “F1” and “F2” layers.
D layer – The first layer of the ionosphere. The D-layer exists only in daytime (peaking around noon). It is typically not useful for HF skywave communications as it mostly absorbs EM energy (D-Layer absorption). Frequencies between 2.0 – 6.0 MHz are refracted at short range while higher frequencies pass thru to higher layers before refraction. (Frequency’s go up during the day) The D layer dissipates at night. (D-layer absorption) (30 -55 Miles).
E layer – The first useful layer for HF short and medium range communications. The E Layer is not useful for communications at night as it also dissipates. (55 -85 Miles).
F1 layer – The first useful layer in short to medium sky wave communications. (85 - 155 Miles).
F2 layer – The second and most useful layer in long range sky wave communications. (155-250 Miles).
F layer – At night, the F1 and F2 layer combine into one layer at night..
Refraction: The bending of radio waves from a transmit point, to the ionosphere, back to Earth at a receive point. Refraction is caused by an abrupt change in the velocity of a radio wave as it strikes the new “medium” of ionized particles. Higher frequencies (above HF or 30 MHz) have a difficult time refracting in the ionosphere. (VHF / UHF freqs thru to SATCOM satellites)
ANGLE OF INCIDENCE
The angle at which sky waves enter the ionosphere and refract back to Earth.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 24
TERMINOLOGY
Skip Distance - the distance the radio frequency energy travels from one point to another in one hop.
Skip Zone – the zone between where the ground wave ends and the sky wave returns back to earth. (The “ZUG zone”)
Refraction – the bending of EM energy, where the angle of refraction does not equal the angle of incidence (reflection)
IONOSPHERE VARIATIONS
The level of ionization depends on the variations of the ionosphere. They are:
1. Regular variations: These variations are predictable and can be planned for:
− Diurnal/Daily – Ionosphere changes as earth rotates around its axis (i.e. day-night-day; sunrise-sunset). − 27 Day Sunspot Cycle – Every 27 days the earth comes around to the same spot on the sun where sunspots are active. − 11 Year Sunspot Cycle – Every 11 years sunspot cycles seem to peak and affect ionization levels. − Seasonal – The Earth’s proximity to the sun’s direct rays during different seasons (closer in winter, further in summer) has an effect of UV exposure..
10.7 cm Solar Flux
• The sunspot activity is measured by 10.7cm Solar Flux. It represents the intensity of solar radio emissions at a frequency of 2800 MHz made using a radio telescope. Known also as the 10.7 cm flux, (the wavelength of the radio signals at 2800 MHz) this solar radio emission has been shown to be proportional to sunspot activity.
• The level of the sun’s ultraviolet and X-ray emissions is primarily responsible for causing ionization in the Earth’s upper atmosphere. We now have data from GOES spacecraft that measures the background X-ray flux from the sun, a parameter more closely related to ionization levels in the ionosphere.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 25
WWV or (WWVA HAWAII)
WWV broadcasts universal coordinated time 365/24/7 every minute on the minute on 05.000 MHz, 10.000 MHz, 15.000 MHz, AND 20.000 MHz
10.7 cm solar flux is broadcast 18 minutes past the hour on WWV
The 10.7cm solar flux indicates the level of activity in the earth’s ionosphere for that given period.
WWV is a very important aid to communicators!
2. Irregular Variations These variations are unpredictable and their effect must be compensated for. Unpredictable variations can have a degrading effect on long range HF communications. The cause is typically abnormally large solar eruptions (also known as flares)
• Sporadic “E” – when the “E” layer is excessively ionized, the “E” layer can blank out refractions of signals back to earth. It can also cause unexpected propagation of hundreds of miles beyond the normal range, or possibly shorten the path.
• Sudden Ionosphere Disturbance (SID): A SID often coincides after a strong solar eruption and produces strong ionization down to the “D” layer. This effect can cause absorption. It can occur at daylight hours and can last several minutes to several hours (Troposphere ducting).
• Ionosphere Storms – Occur between 12-18 hours after a solar eruption. These storms can cause unpredictable propagation effects that can influence signal strength during transmission such as “fading” or “blasting”.
• Geomagnetic Disturbance – Associated with sudden ionosphere disturbances (SIDS) and ionosphere storms. Ionized particles are attracted to the magnetic poles of the earth, resulting in increased ization in the Polar Regions (northern lights).
• Bow shock – Ionized particles carried by solar winds sweep past the earth. The earth’s magnetic field acts as a barrier, but charged particles can enter through the earth’s geomagnetic tail.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 26
SOLAR FLARES & ERUPTIONS
This image cannot currently be displayed.
FREQUENCY CHARACTERISTICS IN THE IONOSPHERE The range of long range communications is determined primarily by the ionization density of each layer of the ionosphere. The higher the frequency, (greater speed) the greater the ionization density required to refract a signal back to earth.
CRITICAL FREQUENCY: Each region of the ionosphere (E, F1 & F2) will have a separate critical frequency. For a vertical angle, signals above the critical frequency will pass thru the ionosphere to space. Frequencies below the critical frequencies will be bent back to Earth by that region; however, if the frequency’s is too low, the signal will be absorbed by the D region. • In order to have HF skywave communications, a radio signal must be a high enough frequency to pass through the D region but not too high a frequency so that it does not pass through the refracting region.
MAXIMUM USABLE FREQUENCY (MUF): The highest usable frequency over a specific path which will refract back to earth. Usable 50% of the normal days of a month.
LOWEST USABLE FREQUENCY (LUF): The lowest frequency at which the received signal is sufficient to provide an intelligible signal 90% of the normal days of a month. Equipment dependent.
FREQUENCY OF OPTIMUM TRAFFIC (FOT): From the French; frequency optimum de travail. Will propagate 85% of the normal days of a month.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 27
CRITICAL ANGLE: The highest angle at which a given frequency will refract back to earth.
• EM energy used in communications generally is directed towards the ionosphere at some oblique angle, called the angle of incidence.
• The highest take-off angle which allows the wave to return to earth is called the critical angle.
Multi-Hop Propagation
The majority of HF sky wave communications are propagated for one hop
Multi-hop propagation is possible; however more factors will affect the signal
• Where will the reflected energy return to earth?
• How much more energy will be absorbed or attenuated?
ANTENNA: A device that converts radio frequency energy into electro-magnetic energy and radiates it into space.
It is part of a balanced electrical circuit.
The operating characteristics of an antenna can be altered by the design. (Operator influence)
The fundamental form of antenna is a single wire whose length is approximately equal to half the transmitting frequency wavelength. The basic design is variously know as a half-wave dipole or half-wave doublet. It is the basic unit from which many more complex forms of antennas are constructed.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 28
THE DOUBLET ANTENNA
Under average conditions the formula is sufficiently accurate for wire antennas at frequencies up to 30 MHz
VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC FIELD • An antenna acts much the same as a capacitor. • Electrical charges flow to the negative, leaving the upper plate positively charged. • When fully charged, voltage equals the source and polarity is opposite. • Energy is stored as an electric field.
THE ANTENNA • Voltage, current, and resistance are set-up on the antenna when radio frequency energy is applied. • This energy creates an electromagnetic field that surrounds the antenna. • The relationship of these fields creates several characteristics of the antenna.
This electromagnetic field influences: • Antenna radiation pattern • Feed point impedance • Antenna gain
GARDEN HOSE ANALOGY • Voltage= Water Pressure • Current = Water Volume • Resistance = Opposition to the flow • Higher resistance = less current flow • Wattage = Amount of water coming out of the hose at a given time. • 20W bulb = filling a glass • 1000W appliance = filling a 50 gal tank
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 29
OHMS LAW
• When the voltage is constant, a decrease in resistance will cause a proportional increase in current. • The inverse is true. • When the resistance is constant, an increase in voltage will cause a proportional increase in current. • The inverse is true.
V = I x R I = V / R R = V / I V stands for Volts R stands for Resistance in ohms Ω I (“i”) stand for current which was originally measured by inductance
E = I x R (Volts = Ω x amps) I = V / R R = V / I Volts, Ohms & Amps Current (volts) maximum at center and a minimum at the ends. The inverse
RESONANCE: A resonant antenna must allow the radio frequency energy to have a complete positive and negative alteration in its cycle in order to be considered resonant.
Resonance: the antenna’s physical length equals the operating frequency’s electrical length.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 30
STANDING WAVES:
• An antenna is a finite conductor. • As the current flowing through the antenna wire reaches the end of the wire it is abruptly stopped. (Picture the sine wave) • A voltage is induced at the end of the wire which causes the current to flow back toward the feed point. (reflected wave) • An antenna is a finite conductor. • As the current flowing through the antenna wire reaches the end of the wire it is abruptly stopped.).
RESONANCE
• Resonance – The antennas physical length equals the operating frequency’s electrical length
• If the antenna is proper length (Resonant) the wave is in phase with the next wave at the feed point.
• A resonant antenna is the desired antenna. A resonant antenna is the most efficient antenna; minimal loss.
• If the antenna is constructed too long or too short, the antenna will have a reduced efficiency.
CAPACITIVE REACTANCE
• If the antenna is too short, capacitive reactance occurs. The current is being forced out of phase, increasing impedance. .
INDUCTIVE REACTANCE
• Characteristics of an electric conductor that opposes a charge of current. • Is not the same as resistance (result of friction in a conductor). • When an antenna is too long, the current lags behind voltage because the path it has to travel is greater than 180 deg. • When the current arrives back at the feed point it is not in phase with the next wave and the impedance is increased also at the feed point.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 31
RESONANCE
• Resonance is when inductive and capacitive reactance are equal and opposite each other • When an antenna is resonant, the total reactance is zero and impedance is minimum (purely relative) • An antenna that is adjusted to the operating frequency is known to be resonant.
IMPEDANCE
In an antenna, current must contend with three types of resistance: • Radiation resistance – Power expended in the form of radiation. • Ohmic resistance – Energy dissipated in the form of heat. • Leakage resistance – Energy dissipated through insulators, etc…
Impedance is the sum of resistance and reactance. • An antenna that is too short has a capacitive reactance. • An antenna that is too long has an inductive reactance.
ANTENNA FEED POINT • Feed Point: Is the point on an antenna where the transmission line is attached in order to apply radio frequency energy. • The antenna design and characteristics determine the antennas feed point and characteristic feed point impedance (1/2 wave, multi-wave, etc. . .)
STANDING WAVE RATIO • A standing wave is the distribution of current and voltage on a transmission line formed by two waves traveling in opposite directions. • Standing wave ratio is the ratio of the amplitude of standing waves at a point of maximum voltage to a point of minimum voltage. An ideal ratio is 1.5:1 or better, 1:1 is perfect. • Standing waves also occur in resonant antennas. In transmission lines it indicates power reflected back from the antenna. • A transmission line that does not reflect power (matched to the antenna) is known as a non-resonant line. • A transmission line in which standing waves are greater than 1 is known as a resonant line.
END EFFECT • End effect is when the antenna is electrically longer than it’s physical (calculated: 234 / 468) length. • Voltage will build up at the end of the antenna wire until it can overcome being abruptly reflected back to the source (feed point). • To compensate, the antenna is shortened approx 5% off each end from the base calculation (234).
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 32
SKIN EFFECT • Radio frequency energy travels along the outside “skin” or surface of the wire. • The larger the wire diameter, the greater the wire circumference, the type of wire; copper or al or steel, the more current flow (also more broad-band effect) • Because of skin effect and end effect, this results in adjustments being made to compensate (lengthening/shortening the antenna) or, electrically adjusting the antenna.
TRANSMISSION LINES • A transmission line is a device that transfers radio frequency energy to the antenna with minimal loss.
• The more efficient the transfer of power, the more energy transmitted from the antenna. • It is imperative that the transmission line impedance match the antenna feed point impedance to minimize the impedance mis-match at the feed point, which will result in a loss of energy. • This loss of energy will degrade the radiated signal and possibly damage equipment.
TYPES OF XMISSION LINES
BALANCED (ladder Line) AND UNBALANCED XMISSION LINES
Balanced lines: • Current flows through both sides of line. • The flow is equal and opposite. • Most efficient transfer of energy. • A balanced transmission line is a line made up of two parallel conductors and is symmetrical. A ladder line is a good example of a balanced line.
Unbalanced lines (coaxial cable): • Outer shield is often connected to ground potential. • Inner core will often induce a current in outer shield. Causes loss by radiation and distortion. • Better noise rejection. • Very durable transmission line.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 33
Most transmission lines in use today are unbalanced lines. (Coaxial cable). They consist of an inner core, a concentric outer conductor, and a dielectric. • Coaxial cable is typically connected to an RT by a BNC-type connector. This type of connector has both the pos & neg antenna connections at a single point. • If the pos & neg connectors are separated the inner core is connected to the pos and the outer braided shielding is connected to the ground (neg) connector.
A balun prevents unwanted RF current flow, which causes a radio to be hot and shock the operator. Install the balun at the dipole feed point (center) to prevent unwanted RF current flow on the coaxial cable. If a balun is unavailable, use the coaxial cable that feeds the antenna as a choke. Connect the cable’s center wire to one leg of the dipole and the cable braid to the other antenna leg. Form the coaxial cable into a 6-inch coil (consisting of ten turns), and tape it to the antenna under the insulator for support.
ANTENNA MATCHING DEVICES
If a transmission line has an impedance of 50 ohms and is being used to feed an antenna with a feed point impedance of 73 ohms, an impedance mismatch will occur.
It is necessary to match the characteristic impedance of the transmission line with that of the antenna for the most efficient transfer of energy.
• When using coaxial cable, the transmission line is connected to the radiating element through a balun. • The impedance matching is accomplished with a BALUN. • BALUN: Balanced / Unbalance • Balun – matching an unbalanced transmission line to a balanced antenna • Coaxial cable; Balun. • Field expedient method using coaxial cable Radio frequency choke (RF choke) • Single wire tx line, 14% off-center fed antenna design. • Twisted pair; two single wire tx lines. • Ladder line; Delta match.
BASIC PROPERTIES OF TRANSMISSION LINES
Line loss (receives and transmits lines • The longer the line, the greater the loss • The shorter (higher) the frequency, the greater the loss.
Power handling capability (transmit lines). • If you overload the line, you will damage the equipment.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 34
Impedance (transmits and receives lines). • If impedance matches, there is a smooth transfer of energy. If not, then some energy will be returned to the RT in the form of heat • The ratio of transmit energy to returned energy is known as the Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). • Noise rejection capability (receive lines). • The greater the noise, higher signal is needed for successful communications.
STANDING WAVE RATIO
• A standing wave is the distribution of current and voltage on a transmission line formed by two waves traveling in opposite directions. • Standing wave ratio is the ratio of the amplitude of standing waves at a point of maximum voltage to a point of minimum voltage. An ideal ratio is 1.5:1 or better, 1:1 is perfect. • SWR is the ratio of the transmitted power of the antenna wire compared to the power reflected back through the transmission line to the radio. • The government standard is 1.5:1 or better, 1:1 is perfect. • Standing waves also occur in resonant antennas. In transmission lines it indicates power reflected back from the antenna. • A transmission line that does not reflect power (matched to the antenna) is known as a non-resonant line. • A transmission line in which standing waves are greater than 1 is known as a resonant line.
Reflection Factor: • The height above ground affects the antennas radiation pattern. • The radiation pattern will change depending on whether the reflected energy arrives in-phase or out-of-phase with the antenna. • 246/frequency MHz = height above ground in feet.
TAKE OFF ANGLE • An antenna’s height above the ground determines the angle relative to the ground which the major lobe of radiation transmits the signal. • That angle is known as the take-off angle.
ANTENNA GAIN • Antenna gain is the method used to determine the efficiency of a type of antenna. • It can cause an apparent increase in radiated signal strength without the increase of transmitter power (positive gain) or a loss of radiated signal strength (negative gain).
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 35
BASE / REFERENCE ANTENNAS
• Isotropic antenna: A theoretical antenna that radiates energy equally in all directions and has a gain of zero (0), expressed as db.(I) • Doublet antenna: The base ½ wave antennas that is used to measure the increase in gain of other antennas, expressed as db. (d). the doublet has a 2.14 db. (I) gain over an isotropic.
ANTENNA GAIN
• Antenna gain is the method used to determine the efficiency of a type of antenna. • It can cause an apparent increase in radiated signal strength without the increase of transmitter power (positive gain) or a loss of radiated signal strength (negative gain). • Isotropic antenna: a theoretical antenna that radiates energy equally in all directions and has a gain of zero (0), expressed as db(i) • Doublet antenna: the base ½ wave antenna that is used to measure the increase in gain of other antennas, expressed as db(d). The doublet has a 2.14 db(i) gain over an isotropic.
Antenna (or aerial):
• Is an electrical device which converts electric power into radio waves and vice versa. It is usually used with a radio transmitter or radio receiver. In transmission, a radio transmitter supplies an electric current oscillation at a radio frequency. • Typically an antenna consists of an arrangement of metallic conductors (elements), electrically connected through a transmission line to the receiver or transmitter. An oscillating current of electrons forced through the antenna by a transmitter will create an oscillation magnetic field around the antenna elements, while the charge of the electrons also creates an oscillation electric field along the elements. • Polarization of an antenna refers to the orientation of the electrical field (E-plane) of the radio wave with respect to the Earth’s surface and is determined by the physical structure of the antenna an by its orientation. • Horizontally polarized radio waves work better for skywave propagation due to the greater absorption of vertically polarized waves.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 36
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 37
Radio Telephone Operator (RTO) Procedures FM 24-18, Chapter 5 Handbook 03-15, RTO Handbook
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 38
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 39
Radio Procedures Radio Net Operation (FM 24-19)
Free Net: A net in which any station may communicate with any other station in the same net without first obtaining permission from the NET CONTROL STATION (NCS) to do so. (ACP 124(D)
Directed Net: When the Net Control Station considers it necessary to regulate the flow of, or maintain stricter control over the flow of radio traffic over the net. Meaning "IT IS NECESSARY TO OBTAIN THE PERMISSION OF THE CONTROLLING AUTHORITY (NCS) BEFORE TRANSMITTING MESSAGES". (ACP 124(D)
Radio Net Operation (FM 24-19)
NOTE: The last letter of the call sign determines the answering order. The stations in a net respond alphabetically, for example, A3D will answer before A2E will answer before B1F. If two stations in a net have the same last letter, for instance, A1D and A2D, the answering order will be determined by numerical sequence, with the lower number A1D answering first.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 40
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 41
PROWORDS:
Use this proword list when making radio transmissions.
ALL AFTER: The portion of the message, which I have referenced, is all that which follows.
ALL BEFORE: The portion of the message, which I have referenced, is all that which proceeds.
BREAK: I hereby indicate the separation of the text from other portions of the message.
CORRECTION: An error has been made in this transmission. Transmission will continue with the last word correctly transmitted.
GRID: The portion following is a grid reference.
I SAY AGAIN: I am repeating transmission of portion indicated.
I SPELL: I shall spell the next word phonetically.
OUT: This is the end of my transmission to you and no answer is required or expected.
OVER: This is the end of my transmission to you and a response is necessary. Go ahead, transmit.
ROGER: I have received your last transmission satisfactorily.
SAY AGAIN: Repeat all of your last transmission.
WAIT: I must pause for a few seconds.
WAIT – OUT: I must pause longer than a few seconds.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 42
Message Precedence Communication Instructions General ACP121 (I) Flash Override: The National Command Authority (usually the President of the United States) has access to a FLASH OVERRIDE capability (this is a point of confusion; flash override is not a precedence, but the capability to override all other traffic, including flash).
FLASH: This precedence is reserved for initial enemy contact messages or operational combat messages of extreme urgency. Brevity is mandatory. FLASH messages are to be handled as fast as humanly possible, ahead of all other messages, with in-station Handled as fast as humanly possible with a time objective of less than 1Ø minutes. Messages of lower precedence are interrupted on all circuits involved until the handlings of FLASH messages are completed.
EXAMPLES: 1. Initial enemy contact reports. 2. Messages recalling or diverting friendly aircraft about to bomb targets unexpectedly occupied by friendly forces; or messages taking emergency action to prevent conflict between friendly forces. 3. Warning of imminent large scale attacks. 4. Extremely urgent intelligence messages. 5. Messages containing major strategic decisions of great urgency.
IMMEDIATE: This precedence is reserved for messages relating to situations gravely affecting the security of the nation. It requires immediate delivery. IMMEDIATE messages are processed, transmitted, and delivered in the order received and ahead of all messages of lower precedence. They are to be handled as quickly as possible, with in-station handling time 3Ø Minutes to 1 Hour. Messages of lower precedence should be interrupted on all circuits involved until the handling of the IMMEDIATE message is completed. The use of the letter "O" comes from the original name for this level, "operational immediate".
EXAMPLES: 1. Amplifying reports of initial enemy contact. 2. Reports of unusual major movements of military forces of foreign powers in times of peace or strained relations. 3. Messages, which report enemy, counterattack which request or cancel additional support. 4. Attack orders to commit a force in reserve without delay. 5. Messages concerning logistical support of special weapons when essential to sustain operations. 6. Reports of widespread civil disturbance. 7. Reports of warning of grave natural disaster (earthquake, flood storm, etc.) 8. Request for, or directions concerning, distress assistance. 9. Urgent intelligence messages.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 43
10. Aircraft movement reports (e.g., messages relating to requests for news of aircraft in flight, flight plans, cancellation messages to prevent unnecessary search/rescue actions).
PRIORITY: This precedence is reserved for traffic requiring expeditious action by the addressee or for conducting operations in progress when ROUTINE precedence will not suffice. PRIORITY precedence messages are processed, transmitted, and delivered in the order received and ahead of all messages of ROUTINE precedence. They are to be handled as quickly as possible, with in-station handing time 1 to 6 Hours.
EXAMPLES: 1. Situation reports on position of front where attack is impending or where fire or air support will soon be placed. 2. Orders to aircraft formations or units to coincide with ground or naval operations. 3. Messages concerning immediate movement of naval, air, and ground forces.
ROUTINE: This precedence is used for all types of message traffic justifying transmission by rapid means, but not of sufficient urgency to require higher precedence. ROUTINE precedence messages are delivered in the order received and after all messages of higher precedence. Examples include any message that requires the documentation of its transmission and/or delivery; messages concerning normal operations, programs, or projects; and periodic or consolidated reports. They should be handled as soon as traffic flow allows, 3 Hours to the start of business on the next working day
EXAMPLES: 1. Messages concerning normal peace time military operations, programs and projects. 2. Messages concerning stabilized tactical operations. 3. Operational plans concerning projected operations. 4. Periodic or consolidated intelligence reports. 5. Troop movement messages, except when time factors dictate use of a higher precedence. 6. Supply and equipment requisition and movement messages, except when time factors dictate use of a higher precedence. 7. Administrative, logistics and personnel matters.
Responsibility – The assignment of precedence to a message is the responsibility of the releasing officer.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 44
Jamming
Spark jamming. Simplest and most easily produced of all jamming signals. To the operator, it sounds like a loud burst of noise of short duration and high intensity, usually repeated at a rapid rate. Because of the rapid repetition and time required for the receiver, earphones, and human ear to recover from the loud burst of noise, the spark jamming signal is very efficient.
Random noise jamming. Most effective and dangerous type of communications jamming, because the operator may mistake it for receiver or atmospheric noise and fail to report it. These jamming sounds like normal interference that is heard when the gain of the receiver is turned up high and the receiver is not tuned to a signal.
Sweep-through jamming. A signal that is swept back and forth across a frequency band at a relatively rapid rate. At low speeds, sweep-through jamming sounds like an outboard motor, and at high speeds it sounds like a piston aircraft engine.
Stepped tones jamming. Produced by three to five audio tones transmitted in a repeated increasing and a decreasing pitch. These tones sound like a Scottish bagpipe.
Random-keyed CW jamming. An unmodulated carrier used against radio facsimile and C W circuits. Automated equipment cannot distinguish the random dots and dashes from the desired message, and CW operators may even find it difficult or impossible to read.
Keyed CW jamming. Actual Morse code characters used primarily against radiotelegraph receiver which cannot distinguish between the jammed and the desired signal.
Beat tones jamming. Notes with continuous or varying pitch producing a howling sound. A loud, continuous, high-pitched CW tone is very disruptive on voice circuits and can also be very irritating to a radio operator.
Babbled-voice jamming. One form, called cocktail party, sounds like a crowd of people all talking at the same time. If the jamming signal’s strength is greater than the desired message, it makes reception very difficult.
Recorded music jamming. May also be used to jam voice signals. This type of jamming may appear to be an ordinary broadcast being received on a harmonic to conceal the fact that it is deliberate.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 45
TRI-GRAPH
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 46
AIR BAY CUD ELK ERE EVA FOG HAS HOE MAN OUR PEG SOT SUN TAG WAD YON
AFU AZA CAX ENI GIL GUZ HIK IDO IJI JEM JOC JUW KAP KOB KUV MIF MOZ OLA OXO PIC QUP SED SIZ TUM UBE ULU WEZ WIV YEX YIT YUH
BBX BVD CCV DDT ETC FFP GGN HHL JJH KKF LLD MMB NNZ PHD POW PPV PSS QQT QRS RFD RPT RRR TNT VVJ WWH XXF ZZB
BCW BFT BGS BHR BIQ BJP BLN CFS CGR BHQ CKN CYZ DGQ DJN DKM DXZ DDY FHN FJL FVZ GHM GJK GWX GYV HTZ HVX IUX JAQ JRZ JTX JYS KQZ KRY KSX KWT LCM LYQ MQX MRW MSV NQW NRV PLZ PXN PYM QEF SLW VLT VOQ WYF XLR
Expedient Trigraph 28 /54 Rule Method to use in the event that a Trigraph is not available Write out the alphabet and assign each letter a number
RULES: If the combined number is less than 28….. Subtract from 28 If the combined number is 28 or more…….subtract from 54
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 47
Trigraph (VIGENERE)
Add numbers from 1st column Add numbers from 1st sum, If below 26 find column sum, if above find in 2nd column 26 subtract 26,find in 2nd column
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 48
World Time Chart (Time Conversion Table)
GMT Zone Cities or Areas
GMT Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), Dakar, Dublin, London, Reykjavik
GMT-1 Cape Verde GMT+1 Algiers, Berlin, Danderyd, Madrid, Milano, Paris, Rome, Vienna GMT-2 Mid-Atlantic GMT+2 Cairo, Damascus, Holargos, Israel GMT-3 Brasilia, Buenos Aires GMT+3 Kuwait, Moscow, Qatar, Riyadh GMT-4 Antigua, Atlantic, Grenada GMT+4 Abu Dhabi, Muscat GMT-5 Eastern United States (EST), GMT+5 Islamabad, Karachi Lima, Montreal GMT-6 Belize, Houston, Mexico City GMT+6 Almaty, Dhaka Central United States (CST), GMT-7 Mountain United States (MST) GMT+7 Bangkok, Jakarta GMT-8 Pacific United States (PST), GMT+8 Beijing, Hong Kong, Vancouver Singapore, Manila GMT-9 Alaska GMT+9 Osaka, Tokyo GMT-10 Hawaii GMT+1 Brisbane, Guam, Melbourne, Sydney GMT-11 Samoa GMT+11 Magadan, Solomon Islands GMT-12 Eniwetok GMT+12 Auckland, Fiji, Wellington
Calibration to the World Clock can be accomplished in many ways: WWV Broadcast – Frequencies 5, 10, 15, 20 MHz GPS (Global Positioning System) Cell Phone – it updates through the cell network On-Line – www.worldclock.com and more
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 49
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 50
COMSEC Comsec Designator
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 51
Definitions & Abbreviations
Audit Trail: (TB-380-41) Audit trail documentation supports debit and credit entries on accounting records from the time property is brought into the inventory with a source document until the property is dropped from accountability. DTD Audit Trails are no longer considered 100% reliable (i.e., due to accidental overwriting of data or zeroization), and, therefore, cannot be used as the sole measure for keying material accountability.
COMSEC – (Communications Security): (TB-380-41) Measures and controls taken to deny unauthorized persons information derived from telecommunications and ensure the authenticity of such telecommunications. Communications security includes crypto security, transmission security, emission security, and physical security of COMSEC equipment.
KEY – A series of random binary digits that change the operations performed in radio equipment encrypting and decrypting the signal traffic.
OTAR – Over-The-Air Re-key. Transferring keys by radio signal rather than physically loading the information.
TEK - Traffic Encryption Key: (TB-380-41) A key used to encrypt plain text or to super encrypt previously encrypted text and/or decrypts cipher text. - Keys have different classifications (Training thru Top Secret) - Secures operational traffic (Voice & Data). - Net Unique (operational exceptions) - Changes: - Every 7 days for Operational Uses. - Every 30 days for Training Uses.
KEK - Key Encryption Key (TB-380-41): A key that encrypts and/or decrypts other keys for transmission (re-keying) or storage. - Classified (FOUO to TS) - Secures TEK for OTAR. - Never to be used for operational traffic! - Changes every 90 days or as directed.
TSK - Transmission Security Key (TB-380-41): A key that is used to control transmission security processes (e.g., frequency hopping and spread spectrum).
CIK - Cryptographic Ignition Key* Physical key device that ‘unlocks’ the secure capabilities of the device.
CFD - Common Fill Device CCI - Controlled Cryptographic Item AK - Automatic Keying MK - Manual Key RV - Receive Variable VG - Variable Generate VU - Variable Update
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 52
Secure Systems SKL
Nomenclature: SKL, AN/PYQ-10(C) / Computer Set Digital
Type Designator: AN/PYQ-10(C) NSN: 7010-01-517-3587
Part #: 200-00004-01 Line Item Number (LIN): Z00384
DO NOT press the Power Button while the battery is removed. Doing so will erase your database.
Technical Manual: TM 11-5810-410-13&P Operator’s and Maintenance Manual, Computer Set, General, AN/PYQ-10(C)
SKL Characteristics
Weight: 2.25 pounds w/extended battery
Battery High capacity battery (Fat) Operational Hours - > 60 hours, Operating Standard battery (Thin) Operational Hours - > 33 hours, Time AA battery pack Operational Hours - > 15 hours High capacity Data Holding Time- > 60 days, Standard battery Data Holding Time- > 45 days
Remove Battery: Will hold crypto for 2 min.
Processor: 32-bit Intel X-Scale CPU (400MHz)
Display: QVGA 65K Color Transflective HR-TFT Color LCD Display, 3.5” (1/4 VGA) Diagonal
Storage: 64MB Active, 64 MB Battery Backed Ram / 64MB of flash memory
Interface: An external 6 pin RS-232 &male audio fill port connector provides a direct connection via shielded wires to the KOV-21 Fill Port Interface & 2 Mini USB
Key Storage: TEK, KEK 500,000 (128 bit) (Plus/minus10%) FFK (Modern Key) 5,000-8000 (256 bit)
User Input: High Resolution Inductive Sensor/Stylus Input. 4 user’s buttons, 4- directional/1”enter” button, 2 Screen Brightness buttons, Power On/Off Button and “Zeroize” Button
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 53
Panic Zeroize Button: Pressing the Zeroize button activates the Zeroize function. Zeroization is immediate!
Button 1: Open start menu Button 2: Menu selection Button 3: Night vision Button 4: Enable directions (Mouse Mode)
If user enter wrong password 10 times, the User Account ID is deleted... If SSO enter wrong password 10 times, everything is deleted and zeroized. If Lock Out: Login in as SSO, Password is DEFAULTPIN
Parts List Item Description Part Number NSN Computer System, Digital AN/PYQ-10(C) 7010-01-517-3587 Simple Key Loader (no battery) 200-00004-01 7010-01-517-3587 Fill Port Dust Cover* 230-00038-01 5340-01-524-9480 Dust Cover* 5340-01-524-9816 Stylus, Inductive* 450-00009-01 7520-01-524-9762 Stylus, Lanyard* 610-00001-01 8595-01-525-0352 Stylus, Lanyard Split Ring* 280-00001-01 5310-01-524-9456 Zeroize Button Cover* 230-00040-01 5340-01-524-9816 Zeroize Button Cover Retaining E-Ring* 270-00040-01 5365-01-524-9820 Zeroize Button Cover Retaining washer* 270-00041-01 5310-01-524-9457 Battery Pack (Li-lon) High Capacity* 200-00006-01 6130-01-525-2788 Battery Pack (Li-lon) Standard* 200-00005-01 6130-01-525-1635 AA Battery Pack 200-000012-01 6130-01-525-1617 O-Ring 5331-01-525-2035 O-Ring 5331-01-525-2064 O-Ring 5331-01-545-0210 Battery Changer 200-00005-01 6130-01-525-1640 Battery Eliminator 200-00010-01 6130-01-525-2021 Carrying Case for PDA Nylon 710-00001-01 7045-01-525-2029 CIK 450-000012-01 5810-01-529-8767 USB Adapter 290-00008-01 5995-01-545-0167 Gasket 5330-01-525-2011 Hardware kit 5340-01-539-3970
BII (BASIC ISSUE ITEMS) 7010-01-517-3587 Simple Key Loader Completed Assembly (no battery) Cage: 3CN36, P/N 200-00004-01 1ea 7520-01-524-9762 Inductive Stylus Cage 3CN36, PN 200-00020 2ea TBD CIK Cage: 3CN37, P/N 450-00012-01 1ea 6130-01-525-2788 Battery Pack (High Capacity) Cage: 3CN36, P/N 200-00006-01 1ea 6130-01-525-1635 Battery Pack (Standard Capacity) Cage: 3CN36, P/N 200-00005-01 1ea 6130-01-525-1640 Battery Charger Cage: 3CN36, P/N 200-00007-01 1ea
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 54
Additional Authorization list 5810-01-348-4675 Cable, RS-232, ON433836-1 6130-01-525-2021 Battery Eliminator, 3CN36, 200-00010-01 6130-01-525-1617 AA Battery Pack, 3CN36, 200-00012-01 7045-01-525-2029 Carrying Case for PDA Nylon, 3CN36, 650-00003 TBD Cable, USB, 032T7, GXQU-06
KEY MANAGEMENT
SKL designed to provide: Managed key and key tag information. Information records containing: Short Title Edition Segment Number Effective Date Expiration Date
Step-by-step procedures.
Turn on SKL (Press the power button till it turn on then release)
Logon with user ID: (XXX) and Password (XXXXXXX). OK
Bottom right corner tap (desk top)
Double tap on calibrate: (calibrate styles):
Double tap on Settings: Power: Turn SKL off if user has not used it for______Min. Backlight: Turn Backlight off if SKL is not used for: ______Min. OK
Double tap on the CoreLib icon Tap on Launch to launch. Tap launch UAS Tap SKL Tap OK
Tape on bottom Right corner: Tape on CoreLib Tap on Session Tap protocol; Protocol Selection: DS-101 OK
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 55
Tap on Tools:
Set Card Date/Time Tools > SSO > Set Card Time/Date > OK > OK
Create User
Tools > SSO > User Management > Create User > New user ID ********, New User Password:*******, Confirm User Delete User
Tools > SSO > User Management > Delete User > User ID (OK) > User Removed (OK) > Confirm Delete User (YES)
Change User Password
Tools > SSO > User Management > Change User Password: > New user ID ******** > New User Password: ******** > Confirm User
Functions (VIEW AUDIT)
Tools > SSO > Audit Functions > View Audit: > OK
Functions (CLEAR AUDIT)
Tools > SSO > Audit Functions > Clear Audit: > Yes: > OK > OK
Launch > Launch UAS > SKL > OK
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 56
Filling the DTDTRKEK into the SKL
Transmit SKL Receive SKL
Highlight the DTDTRKEK key Select File Select File Select Receive Select Transmit Select Key Select Load Equipment DTD/SKL [NEXT] Protocol: DS-101 Profile [Finish] Activate mode: DS-101 SKL [OK] Mode: Fill Press: OK Timeout: Slow Fill in required fields (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (DONE) Operation successful (OK) Operation successful (DONE)
Issue the DTDTRKEK key into the SKL
Transmit SKL Receive SKL
Highlight the DTDTRKEK key Select File Select File Select Receive Select Transmit Select Key Select Load Equipment DTD/SKL [NEXT] Protocol: DS-101 Profile [Finish] Activate mode: DS-101 SKL [OK] Mode: Issue Press: OK Timeout: Slow Fill in required fields (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (DONE) Operation successful (OK) Operation successful (DONE)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 57
Filling the PRC137 key into the SKL
Transmit SKL Receive SKL
Highlight the PRC137 key Select File Select File Select Receive Select Transmit Select Key Select Load Equipment DTD/SKL [NEXT] Protocol: DS-101 Profile [Finish] Activate mode: DS-101 SKL [OK] Mode: Fill Press: OK Timeout: Slow Fill in required fields (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (DONE) Operation successful (OK) Operation successful (DONE)
Issue the PRC137 key into the SKL
Transmit SKL Receive SKL
Highlight the PRC137 key Select File Select File Select Receive Select Transmit Select Key Select Load Equipment DTD/SKL [NEXT] Protocol: DS-101 Profile [Finish] Activate mode: DS-101 SKL [OK] Mode: Issue Press: OK Timeout: Slow Fill in required fields (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (OK) Press: OK Operation successful (DONE) Operation successful (OK) Operation successful (DONE)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 58
Database transfer from SKL to SKL
Transmit SKL Receive SKL Go to File Select Transmit Go to File Select Database Select Receive Database Options (Select All) Select Database Press Next Source: SKL Transfer Mode: Pick SKL Press: Receive Press Next Processing Key Press Transmit Operation Successful. (OK) Building Platform: DONE Processing message XX of XXX CLOSE Operation Successful. (OK) DONE Re-retransmit or New Transmit (Cancel)
Key Transfer from SKL to SKL
Transmit SKL Receive SKL Highlight Key you want to transfer Select File Select File Select Transmit Select Receive Select Load Select Key Protocol: DS-101 Equipment DTD/SKL [NEXT] Activate mode: DS-101 Profile [Finish] Mode: Issue SKL [OK] Timeout: Slow Receive edition (OK) Press: OK Key Tag Information 2 [NEXT>>] Operation successful (OK) Operation successful (OK) Operation successful (DONE) Operation successful (DONE)
Delete Database from SKL Delete key from SKL
Select File Highlight Key or Segment to delete Select Delete Database Select File Select All [NEXT>>] Select Delete Key Tag Finish [Delete] Delete selected segments? [YES] Are you sure… (OK) Select Short Title(s) deleted (OK) Operation successful (OK) Selected database deleted (OK)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 59
Build Equipment
AN/PRC-137 (example) Select Eqs tab Select file: Add Equipment Equipment Name: (AN/PRC-137) Equipment Type: (UNKNOWN) OK Highlight the equipment you want to assign keys Select file: Assign Key Tags… Select a key XXXXXXXXXX (Next>>) Select a location: UNKOWN 1 (Finish) Highlight the equipment you want to assign keys Select file: Assign Key Tags… Select a key XXXXXXXXXX (Next>>) Select a location: UNKOWN 2 (Finish) Highlight the equipment you want to assign keys Select file: Assign Key Tags… Select a key XXXXXXXXXX (Next>>) Select a location: UNKOWN 3 (Finish) Highlight the equipment you want to assign keys Select file: Assign Key Tags… Select a key XXXXXXXXXX (Next>>) Select a location: UNKOWN 4 (Finish)
Build Platform
Select Plats Tab Select file: Add Platform Platform Name: XXXXXXX (OK) Highlight Platform name you want to add equipment to. Select file: Assign Equipment: Select equipment that you want in platform (OK) Highlight Platform name you want to add equipment to. Select file: Assign Equipment: Select equipment that you want in platform (OK)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 60
Loading a TEK into Radio (SKL)
Select Key Tab Highlight the key you want (XXXXXXX) Select File Select transmit Select Load Select Protocol (DS-102) Activate Mode (KYK-13) Press (OK) Connect to Receive equipment (OK) Press INITIATE Button on receiving equipment.
Loading Multiple TEK into Radio (SKL)
Select Key Tab > Select File Select transmit Select Load Selected Keys Select Keys (Putting check marks by keys) Press OK Select Protocol (DS-102) Activate Mode (KYK-13) Press (OK) Connect to Receive equipment (OK) Verify the Key and Press (OK ) Press INITIATE Button Verify the Key and Press (OK ) Press INITIATE Button
Loading a load set into the Radio
Select Equipment Tab > Select the Load set Select File Select transmit Select Load Select ICON Transfer and Check Include Time (Equipment Type: RT-1523B) (Equipment Name: SINCGARS) Press Next Connect cable to the AUD/Fill port Set FUNCT switch to LD Set COMSEC switch to CT Set MODE switch to FH Set CHAN switch to MAN Depress twice handset key-switch to clear Alarm tone Press Send Press LOAD Button.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 61
Loading the a TEK into the AN/PRC-137
Select Equipment Tab Select the AN/PRC-137 Equipment Select File Select transmit Select Load Protocol (DS-102) Activate Mode (KOI-18 ) Press (OK) Press (OK) Press (OK) Press (Done)
Loading the AN/PRC-137 for ALE
Select Equipment Tab Select the AN/PRC-137 Equipment Select File Select transmit Select Load Protocol (DS-101) Activate Mode (DS-101 ) Mode: Issue Press (OK) Press Next > > Set UNKNOWN for fill location Press Send
File >> Transmit >> Load PRC-137… Select TrKEK (173) >> Next Select Key File (137) >> Next Load Second Key File (INIT) >> Transmit… Next >>
Turning off the SKL
Select File: Save Database Select File: Select Exit Select Session: Select Logout Turn off SKL
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 62
KYK-13
The KYK-13 is a battery operated electronic transfer device, hand or pocket carried, transfer and storage device, which can hold up to six key variables. It is used to load and transfer key variables to a Radio, CYZ-10, KYK-13, SKL or to compatible COMSEC equipment. The KYK-13 receives variables from the CYZ-10, SKL and another KYK-13.
Holds six Comsec keys. 1-5 TEK & 6 KEK Only holds 128-bit keys (TEKs / KEKs) Does not hold 256-bit keys Does not hold FH load sets or PRC-137 keys? Classified to the highest level of security of the COMSEC key loaded in device. Classified as CCI when unkeyed. (Accountable item)
Transmit KYK-13 Receive KYK-13
Insure KYK-13 is off. Insure KYK-13 is off. Select fill position Select fill position
Connect to Receiving KYK-13 Connect to Transmitting KYK-13 Turn on KYK-13 Turn on KYK-13 Wait for receiving KYK-13 Press Initiate button on KYK-13 Turn off KYK-13 Observe Red Flash Repeat as necessary Turn off KYK-13
Repeat as necessary
DELETE COMSEC KEY DELETE ALL KEYS
Choose desired fill position 1 - 6.. Turn mode switch to Z and hold. Turn KYK-13 mode switch to Z Turn position switch to Z-All. position and hold. Press “initiate” button. Press “initiate” button. Verify that COMSEC key was deleted. Turn KYK-13 off. Verify COMSEC key was deleted.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 63
Key Transfer from SKL to KYK-13
Transmit SKL Receive KYK-13
Highlight Key you want to transfer Insure KYK-13 is off Select File Select fill position Select Transmit Connect to SKL Select Load Turn ON Protocol: DS-102 Press initiate button Observe RED Activate mode: KYK-13 Flash Press: OK Turn Off Press: OK Repeat as necessary Press INITIATE Button. Operation Successful OK DONE
Key Transfer from KYK-13 to SKL
Transmit KYK-13 Receive SKL
Insure KYK-13 is off Select File Select fill position Select Receive Connect to SKL Select key…. Turn ON Select Key Source: KYK-13 Turn Off DS102 Repeat as Necessary Press: Next>> Fill out key tag Information Press: NEXT>> Fill out key tag Information 2 Press: NEXT>> Press: Finish Check to see if you have key.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 64
RASKL (Really Simple Key Loader) (KIK-30)
• Case Material: – Die cast aluminum • Color: – Black • Connectivity: – 6-pin audio/fill connector (male and female) – Lanyard attachment point • Navigation – 5-Button keypad for menu navigation – 2-button zeroize functionality • Display – LCD Digital Monochrome Transflective Screen. – Display alphanumeric characters up to 8 lines x 20 character per line. – Backlight / contrast function button with User defined timeout. • Size and Weight – Weight: Less than 1 pound (including batteries) – Size: 6.14” (L) x 3.03” (W) x 1.46” (D)
DEFINITION
Human Machine Interface (HMI): User interface that measures human psychology and physiology of the User. Controls, monitors, diagnoses and manages a device by way of LCD menu display.
CIK: Device or electronic key used to enable secure operations of crypto equipment.
A CIK is an electronic token that when inserted, is electronically linked to the RASKL. The CIK employs “instant on” power up, unlocking the RASKL functionality that allows up to nine (9) account configurations with at least one being the Site Security Officer (SSO) account. Only a valid CIK will allow a User access to the RASKL, therefore, it is important to identify each CIK with a User and a specific RASKL device either by using the white space on the CIK token itself or attaching a tag with the identifying information to the CIK lanyard.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 65
Features and Functions
• Supports 40 slots for receiving and filling of NSA Type-1 certified cryptographic keys • Supports receipt and transmission of key material using DS-101, DS-102 and RS-232 protocols • DS-101 support of bussed ECU key loading • Interface directly with Tier 2 LMD/KPs, ICOR, hard copy readers (KOI-18), Tier 3 devices (SDS, SKL, CT3, Fill UAS, KYK-13, KYX-15), ACES and DMD workstations • Receives Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) Hopsets, Lockouts, and Transmission Security Key (TSK) from a Tier 2 Workstation and loads data into radios • Decrypts TrKEK encrypted key (i.e. black key) • Supports simple key fill (i.e. DS-101, DS-102, RS-232) • Supports complex loading operations (e.g. SINCGARS, AN/PSC-5, etc.) • Maintains User selected default data and preferences for simplified key loading operations • Stores audit trail (1 MB), uploads audit data, and provides date and time functions • Has User accessible COMSEC batteries • Uses simple menu driven HMI • Provides extended clearance on female port for direct connect to ECUs • Facilitates left or right, one handed operation • Provides a custom flush mounted CIK • Powers on with Backlight off • Is depot Repairable
BATTERY AND POWER
• Commercially available, removable, batteries (4 AAA) • User replaceable COMSEC batteries
WARNING THE OPERATOR MUST PERFORM A COMPLETE BATTERY CHANGE WITHIN TWO MINUTES OR THE RASKL WILL ZEROIZE THE KEYS AND LOADSETS ON THE DEVICE WITHOUT WARNING.
• COMSEC Batteries will require replacement about every 4 years. • AAA Average Battery life: • Lithium – about 18hrs op. with no backlight or 18 months storage. • Alkaline – about 10hrs op. with no backlight or 12 months storage.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 66
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Step 1: To replace the Batteries, turn off the RASKL by removing the CIK. Step 2: Place the RASKL upside-down on a clean dry surface. Step 3: Remove the Battery Compartment Cover by unscrewing the two captive screws with a coin or screwdriver. Step 4: Note the orientation of the existing batteries before removing them from the compartment. (Note - once the batteries have been removed, there is a battery outline within the battery compartment which shows the correct orientation of the batteries.) Step 5: Install the replacement batteries in the compartment in the proper orientation. Step 6: Reinstall the battery compartment cover and tighten the two captive screws with a coin or screwdriver. Step 7: Turn on the RASKL to ensure it is operational. Step 8: Set the chemistry of the installed main power batteries when prompted by the RASKL.
COMSEC BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The following procedural steps are for replacing the two 1/3N button cell COMSEC batteries with two fresh 1/3N button cell batteries. These batteries should be changed once the “COMSEC Status:” on the “View Battery Status” screen indicates “BAD”. Always replace COMSEC batteries with two new ones, and perform the replacement one at a time.
WARNING IN ORDER TO AVOID TAMPERING OF THE DEVICE AND RENDERING IT DISABLED UNTIL DEPOT REPAIR, CHANGE ONLY ONE (1) COMSEC BATTERY AT A TIME.
Step 1: To replace the Batteries, turn off the RASKL by removing the CIK. Step 2: Place the RASKL upside-down on a clean dry surface. Step 3: Remove the Battery Compartment Cover by unscrewing the two captive screws with a coin or screwdriver. Step 4: It is not necessary to remove the main power batteries.
WARNING But if the main power batteries are removed to gain easier access to the COMSEC batteries, data on the device may be lost.
Step 5: Slide the COMSEC battery retainer towards the female fill connector exposing the 1/3N button cell battery. Step 6: Using a long slender object, slide the COMSEC battery upwards to remove. Note orientation of battery as it is being removed.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 67
WARNING IN ORDER TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DISCHARGE OF THE COMSEC BATTERIES, DO NOT USE TOOLS WHEN INSERTING THE NEW 1/3N BUTTON CELL BATTERIES. REMEMBER TO CHANGE ONLY ONE (1) COMSEC BATTERY AT A TIME.
Step 7: Without the use of any tools, install new 1/3N button cell battery into the vacated opening in the same orientation as the just removed battery. There is also an outline on the battery board to aid the installation of the battery in the proper orientation. Step 8: Referring to Figure 6-4, slide the COMSEC battery retainer towards the male fill connector exposing the second 1/3N button cell battery. Step 9: Using a long slender non-conductive object, slide the battery upwards to remove. Note orientation of battery as it is being removed. Step 10: Without the use of any tools, install new 1/3N button cell battery into the vacated opening in the same orientation as the just removed battery. There is also an outline on the battery board to aid the installation of the battery in the proper orientation. Step 11: Slide the COMSEC battery retainer back to the middle. Step 12: If main power batteries were uninstalled, reinstall the “AAA” batteries in the compartment in the proper orientation. Step 13: Reinstall the battery compartment cover and tighten the two captive screws with a coin or screwdriver. Step 14: Turn on the RASKL to ensure it is operational. Step 15: Set the chemistry of the installed main power batteries when prompted by the RASKL.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 68
TROUBLESHOOTING LIST
1. Symptom: RASKL Initialization screen remains displayed for greater than 10 seconds. a. Possible Cause: Inserted CIK Token is bad. i. Corrective Action: Attempt to access RASKL with a different CIK Token. b. Possible Cause: COMSEC batteries are drained or tamper event detected. i. Corrective Action: Disposition to Depot for repair. c. Possible Cause : First time inserting/creating SSO CIK i. Corrective Action: During the initial SSO CIK creation, boot time is approximately 40 seconds. This is normal operation.
2. Symptom: Alarm condition displayed and RASKL shuts down. a. Possible Cause: Software error occurred. i. Corrective Action: Restart RASKL device. b. Possible Cause: Data on device became corrupted. i. Corrective Action : << Warning>> - DATA WILL BE LOST Execute the “Delete All” function within Manage Data screen. Power off RASKL. Power on RASKL and reload data. ii. Corrective Action : << Warning>> - DATA WILL BE LOST Perform 2- Button Zeroize on the device. Reinitialize accounts and reload data.
3. Symptom: “RASKL has been zeroized” message appears. a. Possible Cause: Two button zeroize activated previously activated. b. Possible Cause: Main power batteries (i.e., “AAA”) previously drained. c. Possible Cause: Too much time passed while changing the main power batteries (i.e., “AAA”). d. Possible Cause: CIK Token left in RASKL® for more than 4 hours. i. Corrective Action: Reinitialize accounts and reload data.
4. Symptom: RASKL won’t power up or immediately shuts down during power up. a. Possible Cause: Main power batteries (i.e., “AAA”) low. i. Corrective Action: Follow procedures to replace main power batteries (i.e., “AAA”).
5. Symptom: “Skull and Crossbones”. a. Possible Cause: Software error occurred. i. Corrective Action: Restart RASKL device. 6. Symptom: icon appears during power up and then device powers down. a. Possible Cause: Hardware failure. i. Corrective Action: Disposition RASKL® to Depot for repair.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 69
7. Symptom: “Primary Image Failed” message appears. a. Possible Cause: Software application corrupted i. Corrective Action: Download newest RASKL® application to device using the “SSO ADMIN”, “SOFTWARE UPDATE” function.
8. Symptom: Battery Icon in upper right of display is blinking. a. Possible Cause: Main power batteries have 15% or less power remaining. i. Corrective Action: Follow procedures to replace main power batteries (i.e., “AAA”).
9. Symptom: “Invalid CIK inserted” message appears. a. Possible Cause: Inserted CIK not initialized for the device. i. Corrective Action: Insert CIK initialized for the device. b. Possible Cause: Bad CIK Token. i. Corrective Action: Disposition CIK Token.
10. Symptom: Document Outline Icon appears in upper left of display. a. Possible Cause: Audit Trail is between 90% and 99% full. i. Corrective Action: Upload audit trail using “SSO ADMIN”, “AUDIT TRAIL” function. Once Audit Trail has been uploaded, use “AUDIT TRAIL”, “Delete” function to clear audit log.
11. Symptom: Black Document Icon appears in upper left of display. a. Possible Cause: Audit Trail is 100% full and is no longer inserting audit entries into the log. i. Corrective Action: Upload audit trail using “SSO ADMIN”, “AUDIT TRAIL” function. Once Audit Trail has been uploaded, use “AUDIT TRAIL”, “Delete” function to clear audit log.
12. Symptom: RASKL doesn’t communicate with CES or DMD PS workstation. a. Possible Cause: Wrong Baud Rate selected. i. Corrective Action: Using the “SETUP/STATUS -> PREFERENCES” screen, use the “Baud Rate Default” function to setup RS-232 baud rate expected by ACES or DMD PS (usually 2400 baud). b. Possible Cause: Wrong COMM port setup on the PC Workstation. i. Corrective Action: Reference ACES or DMD PS help to correctly set up COMM Port on the PC. c. Possible Cause: Bad RS-232 to 6-pin audio connector fill cable. i. Corrective Action: Use a different RS-232 to 6-pin audio connector fill cable.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 70
RASKL POWER UP
The RASKL powers up when the Snap-On style CIK (with integral snap) is inserted into the CIK receptacle, then powers down when the CIK is removed. Should the RASKL shutdown while the CIK is inserted due to the optional power save mode, the center keypad button (SEL/POWER) is pressed for two (2) seconds to power the device back up.
If the CIK is left in a RASKL device for four (4) continuous hours without removal, the RASKL device will ZEROIZE the keys and loadsets on the device without warning. To reset the timer, the User simply removes the CIK and reinserts. The CIK timer is active whenever the CIK is installed, regardless if the RASKL® is powered on or not. Note: This is a security feature required by the NSA since no password in conjunction with the CIK is used to access the device
When fully charged, and the User selects applicable battery type, the RASKL can run for more than 12 hours at 70 degrees Fahrenheit.
During battery change-over, the User must perform a complete battery change within two minutes or the RASKL will ZEROIZE the keys and loadsets on the device without warning.
Zeroize
& Zeroize Press and hold both keys for 2 seconds.
Alarms
INVALID CIK: Displays after Initialization Screen 1 if invalid CIK is inserted into RASKL device; RASKL auto powers down.
ALARM: Displays on specified alarm; RASKL displays screen and powers down.
SKULL AND CROSS BONES: Displays when unrecoverable error has occurred; RASKL auto powers down.
PRIMARY IMAGE FAILED: Displays if the RASKL is booting to the secondary software image (backup).
Sel/Power (Tactical (no password)) >>> Sel/Power (SSO) >>>
Sel/Power CIK Will be overwritten (OK) >>> Sel/Power SSO created (OK)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 71
MAIN MENU
Fill By Key: Functions to allow the operator to fill a single key to end item cryptographic equipment.
Fill By Loadset: Functions to allow the operator to fill a Loadset to end item cryptographic equipment.
Rx and Tx of RASKL Data (Rx/Tx Data): Allow the operator to Rx and Tx keys and database information with other devices (ACES, DMD PS, ICOR, RASKL, SDS, SKL).
Manage RASKL Data (Manage Data): Functions to allow the operator to manipulate key and loadsets stored within the RASKL (e.g., Delete, Sort, and View TrKEKs).
Setup/Status: Functions to allow the operator to set up defaults for ease of use, (shutdown timeouts, default key tag information, etc), and view system status (remaining battery power, current set date/time, etc).
Site Security Officer Administration: Functions to allow the SSO to perform security critical tasking, (audit trail) account set-up, and additional device configuration that cannot be performed under Setup/Status.
Site Security Officer Administration:
Power-Off Timeout: Allows SSO operator to determine when (and if) the RASKL device power down after a period of inactivity.
CAUTION: If the device is set to power-off after a period of inactivity, the operator must remember to remove the CIK token prior to the automatic zeroization timer expiring in 4 hours. Even If the device is powered off, the CIK timer remains functioning for as long as the CIK remains installed
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 72
Account Setup: This initial account (and any other SSO account) has the authority to create additional accounts (up to 9 total for the device) and may choose on an individual account basis, the access privileges granted (i.e., SSO or User).
CAUTION If a SSO privileged CIK is not installed in the RASKL, access to the SSO Admin screen is not permitted by the device.
Account Setup:
- View Accounts: Allows SSO operator to view the currently registered account names and their privilege type (i.e., SSO or User). - Create Account: Allows SSO operator to create additional accounts. The account can be privileged as an SSO or a User. The RASKL can have (9) accounts on the device, where the first operator must be an SSO. - Delete Account: Allows SSO to delete an account. CIK associated with the deleted account to be unusable. Account name will not be deleted; will still be available for future creations of an account with the same name. - Delete Account Name: Allows SSO operator to delete unused account names from the RASKL device.
Audit Trail:
- View: Allows SSO operator to view the current capacity of the audit trail and to also view the audit trail event log for COMSEC incident investigation purposes. - Upload: Allows SSO operator to upload the audit trail to a PC workstation (ACES, DMD PS) or to a DS-101 compatible device (KOK-22 [KP]). Uploading the audit trail does not automatically delete the audit trail. - WARNING: If the audit trail is not uploaded on a regular basis, it can become very large in size (up to 1MB) which then causes the audit upload operation to take a significant amount of time. If this situation is encountered, ensure fresh main power batteries are installed prior to beginning this operation. Additionally, the RASKL will no longer add audit entries into the log when the audit trail becomes full.
- Delete: Allows SSO operator to delete the audit trail log from the RASKL. This operation should be conducted following a successful audit upload. This operation will also reset the audit trail capacity indicator.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 73
Software Update:
- Receive Software Update: Allows SSO operator to receive a new version of software to be run by the RASKL device. The software can be received from a PC, another RASKL, or from another RASKL via a STU/STE connection.
- Transmit Software Update: Allows SSO operator to transmit the current software application on the RASKL to update another connected RASKL with the same version of software (software cloning). This allows quicker distribution of software updates to devices that may not have access to a PC to receive the software updates. The software transmit to another RASKL can be accomplished via direct connect to the other RASKL (DS-101).
Set RASKL Date/Time:
- Allows SSO operator to set the date and time. The system date and time is used to timestamp audit trail entries and also to provide a basis for time based equipment fill in the FILL BY LOADSET screen.
Set COMSEC Bat Date:
Set User Access:
- Allows SSO operator to further restrict menus (functions) from use by operator accounts of type “User”. For example, the SSO operator may want to simplify the menu as much as possible for the end User, and may choose to only have the FILL BY KEY and FILL BY LOADSET screens available for their use. Or the SSO operator may choose to limit access to DEVICE SETTINGS and/or PREFERENCES.
NOTE: When the SSO disables access to a screen and an operator with “User” privileges attempts to navigate to the disabled screen, the message, “USER ACCESS NOT PERMITTED Access to this screen has been disabled by the
Reset Defaults: - Allows SSO operator to reset the Settings and Preferences back to factory defaults.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 74
Setup/Status
Device Setting:
Backlight Timeout - Allows the operator to set the time duration that the backlight remains on following the last key stroke. The backlight remains on at the brightness as adjusted by the operator.
Auto Scroll Delay - Allows operator to set the scrolling speed of the text on screens where item identifiers are longer than the display screen’s width.
Battery - View Status - Allows operator to view the remaining main battery power and COMSEC battery power. Set Battery Type - Allows operator to set the chemistry of the main power batteries that are currently installed so that the fuel gauge displays accurately.
Preferences: Allows operator to set defaults for easier and more User-friendly use of the RASKL.
Key Format
Boot Screen- -Allows operator to determine the first screen that the RASKL displays following a successful boot-up.
Baud Rate Default - Allows operator to set the default RS-232 baud rate to be used by RASKL when performing RS-232 transmits and receives.
Rx Key Info Default - Allows operator to set up default key attribute information to be used when receiving key that doesn’t come with key identifier information. This occurs when receiving in DS-102 modes from Common Fill Devices (KYK-13, KYX-15, and KOI-18). During the receipt of key without an identifier and this default information appears on the RASKL screen, the operator has the opportunity to change any of the attributes necessary to correctly identify the incoming key. The receive key defaults should be set to the most common attributes encountered for the operator’s supported missions, so that only a minimum set of attributes are changed at time of receipt of key.
Sort Equip/Protocol - Allows operator to set the protocol to be used when transmitting the key using the Fill By Key screen.
Set DS-101 Wake – Choose from Off or On
Set Temp Scale – Choose from Fahrenheit or Celsius
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 75
Set Fill Time - Allows the non-SSO operator to adjust the time of day to be sent to time capable equipment (SINCGARS) during fill operations. Adjusting the fill time will not affect the system clock.
View Date/Time - Allows operator to view the current set system data and time, in addition to the set fill time.
View System Info - Allows operator to view the name of the account for the installed CIK; in addition, Host and COMSEC software version, serial number of RASKL, and Audit Trail capacity.
Test RASKL - Allows operator to verify RASKL device is functioning properly. Will only perform non-destructive tests which prevent the RASKL data from being corrupted.
Rx/Tx DATA
Rx Key- Allows operator to receive key from a selected device and put the key in a selected fill slot of the RASKL.
Rx Key Needed - Bring in key material from a source (KYK-13, KOI-18, KYX-15) and have it automatically associate with a key tag that is already in the RASKL database, previous download from a ACES or DMD PS workstation
Rx Database/Loadsets - Allows operator to receive multiple keys and loadsets from other Tier 3 devices (RASKL, CT3, SDS, SKL) and mission planning data (loadsets, key tags) from Tier 2 workstations (ACES, DMD PS).
Tx All Database:
Tx Select Database: Allows operator to send selected key or loadsets that are in the RASKL data, to other Tier 3 devices (e.g., RASKL, CT3, SDS, SKL, AN/CYZ-10 with Fill UAS).
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 76
Manage Data
Delete Keys: Allows operator to delete individually selected key from the RASKL device.
Delete Loadset: Allows operator to delete individually selected loadsets from the RASKL device.
Delete All: Allows operator to delete all keys and loadsets. This function does not zeroize accounts, preferences, or audit data.
Sort Key Slots: Allows operator to change the slot location of keys that are in the RASKL.
Sort Key by ST/KMID:
Sort Loadset Slots: Allows operator to change the slot location of loadsets that are in the RASKL.
View/Delete TrKEKs: View and delete Transfer Key Encryption Keys (TrKEKs) that are “filled” to the RASKL. The RASKL can maintain up to five (5) “filled” TrKEKs, in addition to the key slots available in the Fill By Key screen.
Check Key: Allows operator to check a selected key or all keys to determine if the key has become corrupted.
NOTE: If a failure message appears, note the key(s) identification information provided. Once a key has been noted as failed by the RASKL, the RASKL does not let the operator transmit the key. It is the responsibility of the operator to then delete the key from the RASKL.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 77
Fill By Key
Fill by Key: Functions to allow the operator to fill a single key to end item cryptographic equipment.
RASKL to RASKL
Fill by Key >> SEL >> Pick key to Fill >>
Rx/Tx Data >> SEL >> Rx Key >> SEL >> DS-102 >> SEL >> Select Slot
>>Enter Key Info >>Done >> SEL>> Rcv >> >> Success
RASKL to SKL
(RASKL) Fill by Key >> SEL >> Pick key to Fill >>
(SKL) File >> Receive >> Key >> KYK-13 >> Next >> Next >> Finish >>
Fill By loadset:
Fill By loadset: Functions to allow the operator to perform equipment based loading of end item cryptographic equipment. Instructions will be provided via the display to the operator to prompt them through loading of the specific equipment selected.
Database transfer RASKL to RASKL
Rx/Tx Data >> SEL >> Tx All Database >> SEL >> Direct Connect >> SEL >> Connecting Building DB ……Success Sending …..Success Sending …..Success Success
Rx/Tx Data>>SEL>>Tx Database/Loadsets>>SEL>>RASKL/CT3/SDS/SKL (DS-101) >> SEL >> Direct Connect >> SEL >> Success Connecting Receiving Data Success
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 78
Database transfer All Key RASKL to RASKL
Rx/Tx Data >> SEL >> Tx Select Database >> SEL >> All Key >> SEL >> RASKL/CT3/SDS/SKL >> Direct Connect >> SEL >> Connecting Building DB ……Success Sending …..Success Sending …..Success Success
Rx/Tx Data>>SEL>>Tx Database/Loadsets >>SEL>>RASKL/CT3/SDS/SKL (DS-101) >> SEL >> Direct Connect >> SEL >> Success Connecting Receiving Data Success
Database transfer Select Key DB RASKL to RASKL
Rx/Tx Data >> SEL >> Tx Select Database >> SEL >> Select Key DB >> SEL
>> RASKL/CT3/SDS/SKL >> Pick Keys you want to send >>Tx >> Direct
Connect >> SEL >>
Connecting
Building DB
Sending
(Key are scrolling through as they are sent)
Success
Rx/Tx Data>>SEL>>Tx Database/Loadsets >>SEL>>RASKL/CT3/SDS/SKL
(DS-101) >> SEL >> Direct Connect >> SEL >> Success Connecting
Receiving Data
Success
Database transfer Select Loadset DB RASKL to RASKL
Rx/Tx Data >> SEL >> Tx Select Database >> SEL >> Select Loadset DB >> SEL
>> RASKL/CT3/SDS/SKL >> SEL TX LOADSET >>Tx >> Direct Connect >>
SEL >> Connecting Building DB Sending (Key are scrolling through as they are sent) Success
Rx/Tx Data >> SEL >> Tx Database/Loadsets >> SEL >>RASKL/CT3/SDS/SKL (DS-101) >> SEL >> Direct Connect >> SEL >> Success Connecting
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 79
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 80
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 81
VHF RADIO AN/PRC-119F (RT-1523F) ASIP (Advanced Sincgars Improvement Program) 9 February 2017
Technical Information
Frequency range: 30-87.975 MHz
Number of frequency: 2,320 (spaced every 25 kHz) (Example 30.000, 30.025, 30.050, 30.075)
Presets: 8 Single Channels, 6 Frequency Hop 6 Comsec (5 TEK, 1 KEK or 6 TEK (You can load TEK in position 6 but you will not be able to receive an OTAR.
Weight: 9lbs with BA-5590
Battery life: 1 min TX: 9 min RX = 33 hours approximately. BA in front of number means Non-rechargeable. BB in front of number means rechargeable.
The RT-1523F does not have a HUB battery; it contains circuitry that retains fill for 15 minutes after main power is lost (changing battery).
Power input: 13.5 VDC, man pack / 27.5 VDC, vehicular/aircraft
Power output: Low 500 microwatts Man pack Med 160 milli watts Man pack HI 4 watts Man pack PA 50 watts Vehicle w/amp
Planning range: Voice Low 200m to 400m Med 400m to 5km HI 5km to 10km PA 10km to 40km
Planning range: Data: HI 1Km up to 3 Km Man pack PA 3Km up to 10 Km Vehicle w/amp
Standby (STBY): Battery last approximately 3 month. Sync time will be lost 200 hours, all data is retained and makes radio inoperable.
OFFSET: Changes Freq. +/-5 kHz, or +/-10 kHz
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 82
Components: RT-1523F Antenna: AS-3683 (short whip with base), AS-4266 (long whip with base) H250 or HRCRD handset Canvas kit bay
SINGLE CHANNEL: SINCGARS is a “single channel” radio in that it can transmit or receive on only one channel at a time. Single channel, or the SC mode of operation, refers to the fact that only one frequency is being used for communications.
Load single channel frequencies into Sincgars RT
Function switch to load.
Press MENU/CLR Set Volume: (0-9) Select channel: (1 - 6, 7 CUE, 0 MAN). Select Power: (LO, M, HI, and PA) Select Mode: (FH, FHM, FH2 FH2M, and SC). (SC) Select COMSEC: (PT, CT, TD, and RV). (PT) Press FREQ button (00000). Press CLR button (_ _ _ _ _). Enter desired frequency. Press STO button (display blinks). Repeat for different channels.
Jamming is the intentional transmission of signals that interrupt your ability to transmit and receive. Interference is the accidental disruption of communications by friendly sources.
Anti-jamming includes any corrective action taken by the operator to work through intentional jamming and accidental interference.
The SINCGARS radio allows single channel frequencies to be offset by plus or minus 5 or 10 KHz (+/- 5 or 10 KHz). When operating in the single channel mode, this capability can be employed to help work through jamming or other interferences.
Offset +/- 5 or +/- 10 kHz will offset only the frequency on that channel, NOT all the frequencies in the radio. Each frequency in the other channels will not be offset until you modify them.
Set MODE to SC. Set CHAN to desired channel to be loaded with offset. Press FREQ button. Press ERF/OFST button. Press CHG/7 button. Continue to press button until desired offset is displayed.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 83
Fill device SKL, KYK-13 (Loading Comsec fills).
Function switch to load. Press MENU/CLR Set Volume: (0-9) Select channel: (1 - 6, 7 CUE, 0 MAN). Select Power: (LO, M, HI, and PA) Select Mode: (FH, FHM, FH2 FH2M, and SC). Select COMSEC: (PT, CT, TD, and RV). Connect fill device to FILL connector. {Follow instruction on fill device.} Press load button: (HTEK). Press store button: (STO _). Press channel button (1 - 6) of where you want to store the fill. (Beep in Hand Set)(Screen should blink). Repeat as necessary.
Note: For CUE and MAN to be secure, a TEK must be loaded in position 5
Plain Text Calls Scrolling Comsec When a station operating in CT Select channel to change COMSEC. receives a call from a station using Press CMSC/1 button. plain text (PT), the radio inserts a soft Press CHG/7 button. beeping alarm over the message to let Simply changing your channel puts the the receiving operator message is not TEK back into its original channel. secure. Cannot scroll fill position 6?
Scan Operation • Function switch to SQ ON • Select CUE channel. • Select FH mode. • Press STO button (SCN _). • Press number 0 - 7 to set priority channel. Channel 8 scans all channels equally. • Note: You can scan a total of 8 channels • To answer a call, just press the PTT within 2.5 sec (or scanning will automatically resume.) • To transmit on a desired channel, enter channel # and press PTT within 2.5 sec and start talking. • To transmit on the priority channel you selected, merely press PTT and talk. • Delete channel from scan sequence just select channel on keypad, press CLR. • Add channel back to scan just select channel on keypad. • Exit scan mode, switch to LD, change FH to SC, and set channel from CUE to another position. • Check Frequency: To determine the frequency of a locked in channel, press Freq. and frequency will be shown in RT display.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 84
OTAR (Over the Air Rekey)
Manual Keying (MK) The MK OTAR procedure allows an NCS to transmit a TEK from a source Fill device through the SINCGARS radios, to one or more target Fill device. This is a useful form of OTAR in that the receiving stations need not travel to the NCS to physically load their Fill device.
Send a key from one CFD to another CFD thru the radio net.
Manual Keying (MK) (SKL)
NCS Radio Outstation Radio FCTN Switch: SQ ON FCTN Switch: SQ ON Mode: SC Mode: SC Comsec: CT Comsec: CT On your operation CH Same operation CH KEK CH 6 Same KEK CH 6 as NCS Same KEK CH 6 as Outstation
NCS: H2V77 this is P7X99 standby for manual keying. ACK when ready to receive MK OTAR. Over
Outstation: P7X99 this is H2V77 Roger out.
NCS SKL Out station SKL File File OTAD OTAD Select: Manual Rekey Select: Receive Variable (RV) Select: an equipment: [RT-1523B] [Next] Key Tag Information [NEXT] Perform MK-RV? [YES] Key Tag Information 2 [NEXT] Generate new replacement TEK? [NO] Profile [Finish] Select an outstation KEK [NEXT] RV in progress...... Select and replacement TEK: [NEXT] Load Key Received Connect to Equipment type: [NEXT] Select Equipment Type (RT-1523B) Load outstation KEK to NCS [NEXT] Store Key and Load or Store Key Load outstation KEK to NCS [FINSH] Only Connect to Receive equipment [OK] Press Load Button on Radio Press LOAD/0, STO, SA/6
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 85
On Radio Press LOAD/0, STO, SA/6
Operation Successful [OK] [DONE] Pre-steps MK Operation [FINISH] Poll net. Retry MK operation for failed station [N] Select original KEK for reload to NCS [Finish] Load Original KEK back to NCS [NEXT] Load Original KEK back to NCS [FINISH] Connect to receive equipment [OK] Press Load Button
On Radio Press LOAD/0, STO, SA/6
Operation Successful [DONE] Operation Successful [OK]
Outstation: P7X99 this is H2V77 ready to receive MK OTAR Over.
Do not press SEND until the outstation stations are ready to press RCV? Then press SEND within 20 second of directing them to press RCV.
NCS: H2V77 this is P7X99 MK OTAR will now be sent: After receipt of MK OTAR return to operation channel, go to channel 6 now; press RCV now! Out.
Outstation: P7X99 this is H2V77 Roger out.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 86
Automatic Keying (AK) (SKL)
NCS Radio Outstation Radio FCTN Switch: SQ ON FCTN Switch: SQ ON Mode: SC Mode: SC Comsec: CT Comsec: CT On your operation CH Same operation CH KEK CH 6 Same KEK CH 6 as NCS Same KEK CH 6 as Outstation
NCS: H2V77 this is P7X99 standby for AK, ACK when ready to receive AK OTAR. Over
Outstation: P7X99 this is H2V77 Roger out.
NCS SKL File OTAD Select: Automatic Rekey Select an equipment: [RT-1523] Next Generate new replacement TEK? [No] Select one or more outstation KEK(s) [Next] Select a replacement TEK: [Finish] [Finish] AK in progress Operation Successful [Finish] Have all outstation been successfully rekeyed? Load replacement TEK to NCS [Next] Load replacement TEK to NCS [Finish] NCS SKL (VU) Ready to Send Key [OK] Select one or more (KEKs) Press LOAD Button [NEXT>>] Operation Successful [DONE] Generated KEK(s) [FINISH] VU in progress
GENERATING KEYS
Generating a key (SKL) File OTAD Variable Generate (VG) Key Tag Information’s (NEXT >>) (NEXT >>) Profile (Finish) VG in progress
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 87
Frequency Hop Definition
FREQUENCY HOPPING: In the frequency hopping (FH) mode of operation, the SINCGARS radio transmits and receives on any or all of the 2320 frequencies, with 25 KHz separation, in the 30.000 to 87.975 MHz range. For best results, 1200 or more of the total 2320 frequencies are normally used.
NCS CONTROL: The NCS radio, and only the NCS radio, uses the “FH-M” MODE position. In this mode, the NCS radio automatically brings the time of all net radios back into synchronization every time the NCS transmits. In short, when an operator is monitoring the operational net, there is little or no possibility that your radio will drift out of proper sync time.
JAMMING: Jamming a SINCGARS FH net can be done, but only with extraordinary effort and commitment of equipment on the part of the enemy. Tests have shown that even when 30% of the FH channels have been jammed, a significant achievement, voice messages are still quite understandable.
HOPSET: Frequencies made available for a SINGARS radio to hop on are called a “Hopset” A typical hopset consists of what remains of the total 2320 frequencies after protected frequencies, such as commercial television, are removed, Protected frequencies are frequently referred to as “lockouts”.
Transmission Security Key (TSK): The pattern in which the radio selects frequencies to hop on is pseudo-random, as determined by the transmission security key (TSK). Depending upon the number of frequencies available for hopping and the TSK itself, the exact sequence of frequencies used during any one second will not be repeated for long periods of time.
NET ID: The remaining variable required for two or more frequency hopping radios to communicate is called the “Net ID.” It is a three-digit number, 000-999, which controls where in the pseudo-random sequence the radio begins to hop.
FH DATA: Hopsets, (with lockouts integrated), TSK, net ID,
LOADSET: All of the COMSEC keys (TEK and KEK) and FH data (hopset, TSK, and net ID) required to load all six channels of the SINCGARS radio.
Loading time can be done by: ANCD, Dagger, manually via the keypad, or by receipt of an ERF.
The RT must be +/- 4 seconds in order to be in a FH net. The RT must be +/- one minute for passive late net entry. The RT must be less than 100 days from net sync time in order to receive an ERF.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 88
Loading a Load Set. (SKL) Change Net ID#. From Eqs Tab Highlight load set Function switch to LD. File > Transmit > Load Choose channel of Net ID you Transfer type: (ICOM Transfer) wish to change (1 - 6). Include time: (OK) Press FREQ (F XXX). Connect to: (NEXT>>) Press CLR (F _ _ _). Profiles: (SEND) Enter new Net ID #. Press load Button: Press STO (blinks). Re-Load equipment? (Yes/No) Function switch to SQ ON. Operation successful: (OK) Make communication check. DONE
Late Net Entry: The term “Late Net Entry” means that the operator missed the announced net opening time and wishes to enter the net now, or operator left the net for some reason and now wants to re-enter, or sync time in the operator’s radio now differs by more than +/- 4 seconds form that of the net.
Passive Late Net Entry. • The RT is out of the +/- 4 sec window. • The RT is still in the +/- 1 minute window of net SYNC time. • Press FREQ button then Press SYNC button (LF # # #). • Wait for radio traffic to be heard (DO NOT PRESS PTT). • Display shows F # # #, the L was dropped. • Make communications check with NCS.
HOT START NET OPENING: Method of opening a FH net in which net operators load all required COMSEC, FH data, and SYNC time from their SKL and merely call the NCS to check into the net.
Load time manually • Obtain correct time (GPS, and SKL). • Press TIME button: (DD). • Press CLR button (_ _). Enter Julian date. • Press STO button. • Press TIME button. (HH MM). • Press CLR button (_ _ _ _). • Enter HH; enter MM (1 minute ahead). • When RT and time source min. are the same, zero seconds, press the STO button on the RT.
CUE FREQUENCY: SC frequency and designated channel to contact the NCS when caller has a non-FH radio or has lost contact with the FH net.
MANUAL FREQUENCY: SC frequency designated for transmission and receipt of ERFs during cold start net openings. FCTN switch does not have to be in the LD position to load this channel.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 89
Retransmission operations
Retransmission operations are utilized when a unit, command, or activity is too far away for solid two-way communications; or when there is an immovable object blocking your communications attempts. Outstations will always follow the normal operating procedures.
Single channel to Single channel
Both RTs at the RXMT site will be set up the same, with exception of the frequency. The frequencies will be at least 10 MHz apart. The radio at the Retransmit site can be set to PT or CT.
Outstation RT Retransmit Site RT Outstation RT
Set RT A controls: Set RT B Set RT C Set RT D controls: Freq: (35.550) Freq: (35.550) Freq:(45.550) Freq: (45.550) PWR HI PWR: HI PWR:HI PWR HI FCTN SQ ON FCTN: RXMT FCTN:RXMT FCTN SQ ON MODE SC MODE: SC MODE: SC MODE SC COMSE CT CMSC: PT/CT CMSC: PT/CT COMSE CT Connect retransmit cable to RXMT connector on RT B and C.
Single channel to Frequency Hop. Set RT A controls: Set RT B Set RT C Set RT D controls: Freq: (35.550) Freq: (35.550) NET: (302) NET: (302) PWR HI PWR: HI PWR: HI PWR HI FCTN SQ ON FCTN: RXMT FCTN: RXMT FCTN SQ ON
MODE SC MODE: SC MODE: FH MODE FH
COMSE CT CMSC: PT/CT CMSC: PT/CT COMSE CT
Connect retransmit cable to RXMT connector on RT B and C.
Frequency Hop to Frequency Hop Set RT A controls: Set RT B Set RT C Set RT D controls: NET: (363) NET: (363) NET: (302) NET: (302) PWR HI PWR: HI PWR: HI PWR HI FCTN SQ ON FCTN: RXMT FCTN: RXMT FCTN SQ ON MODE FH MODE: FH MODE: FH MODE FH COMSE CT CMSC: PT/CT CMSC: PT/CT COMSE CT
Connect retransmit cable to RXMT connector on RT B and C
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 90
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 91
Urban Version AN/PRC-148(V) 4(C) or (V) 6(C) JEM (JTRS Enhanced Multiband Inter/Intra Team Radio (JTRS – Joint Tactical Radio System)
4 versions
Urban Version AN/PRC-148(V) 4(C) or (V) 6(C) Immersible to 2 meters for 30 minutes, 6-pin audio connector and internal speaker/microphone (V) 4 (C) is non-COBRA capable. (V) 6 (C) is COBRA capable.
Maritime Version: AN/PRC-148(V) 3(C) / (V) 5(C) Immersible to 20 meters for 2 hours, 10-pin or special 6 Pin audio connector, and internal audio transducer (V) 3 (C) is non-COBRA capable. (V) 5 (C) is COBRA capable.
Components:
Receiver-Transmitter Unit (RTU). Three antennas: 30-88 MHz tape/blade, 90-512 MHz whip and 136-174 MHz whip. Rechargeable lithium-ion battery (2 ea.). Battery case for non-rechargeable Batteries (2 each). Transceiver/battery holster. Accessory carrying bag. Audio/key fill adapter (20 meter ver. only).
Physical Characteristics:
Frequency Range: 30-512 MHz Contiguous 5 kHz and 6.25 kHz Step Size
Planning Ranges: Voice Low (1W) 200m to 400m Voice Med (3W) 400m to 5 Km Voice High (5W) 5Km to 10 Km Data High (5W) 3Km to 6 Km
Can transfer configuration information to other JEMs by means of a cloning cable, and utilizing Over-The-Air Cloning (OTAC)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 92
Physical Parameters (with battery) Length: 8.44 inches (21.44 cm) Width: 2.63 inches (6.68 cm) Depth: 1.52 inches (3.86 cm) Volume: 33.74 cubic inches (552.8 cubic cm) Whisper mode (first 2 positions). Weight: 2.2 lbs. including battery and antenna.
Power output: Basic FM, ANDVT, HTW, & P25 .1, .5, 1, 3 or 5 Watts SINCGARS (SC, FH, FHM, FH2, F2M) SCM, ASCM 1, 3 or 5 Watts Basic AM & HAVEQUICK (SC or FH) 1 or 5 Watts Satcom & IW 3 Watts
Operating temp: -31°C (-24° F) to +60°C (140° F)
Programmable Channels 256 memory preset channels 16 groups, 16 channels per group 10 scan plans, 16 channels per scan plans plus home channel.
COMSEC: US Type 1 VINSON and FED-STD-1023 ANDVT Receive OTAR compatible Rechargeable hold-up battery (HUB) NSA Certified for TOP SECRET SAVILLE: 20 Traffic Encryption Keys (TEK), 1 Key Encryption Key (KEK) P25 AES keys: 20 AES key (Advanced Encryption Standard) KGV-11: 8 Transmission securities Key (TSK) ACC 1.3: 1 Transfer Key Encryption Key (TRKEK) JOSEKI: 1 Red Private Joseki Component (PJC)
Waveforms/Modes (Implemented and Planned) AM/FM HAVEQUICK I/II MIL-STD-188-241-1/-2 (SINCGARS) MIL-STD-188-181B (56 kbps) HTW MIL-STD-188-181C (SATCOM, IW) ANDVT Project 25 Blue Force Tracking Mobile Ad Hoc Networking (MANET) Retransmission
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 93
Emergency Beacons and GPS:
AM Swept Tone Beacon. GPS Interface to PLGR, DAGR, commercial GPS devices, and Thales Remote Control Unit with GPS Situational Awareness display of up to 10 users when connected to DAGR or other GPS receiver.
Battery:
The radio draws current from the battery even when powered off. A charged battery will be fully discharged after 45 days if left attached to a radio.
The COMSEC keys in JEM will be held for five (5) minutes after the removal of the main battery. For security reasons, after 5 minutes without the main battery, the COMSEC keys will be zeroized.
NOTE: This does NOT apply to PJC.
The JEM Radio contains an internal rechargeable hold-up battery (HUB) to keep the Private Joseki Component (PJC) key alive as long as the HUB Battery is charged.
Without the main battery installed, a fully charged HUB will keep PJC key alive for approximately 60 days. If the HUB is fully discharged and PJC is zeroized, the radio will display “No PJC”. In this state, the JEM can operate in Retransmit Mode and Plain Text Line of Sight Mode. PJC can be loaded using a standard key loader such as a DTD or SKL.
Be sure to turn the radio OFF before removing the battery. Failure to do so MAY cause loss of key and/or programming.
Battery life: 8 hours at 5 w at 8:1:1 duty cycle.
Functions
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 94
ERROR MESSAGES:
“ALARM" flashing: Crypto alarm means you have selected a CT Channel and no key fill is loaded; clear the alarm by pressing PTT, or switch to a PT Channel or load key fill using a key fill device.
“NOKEY" flashing: Indicates that there is no AES/COMSEC key loaded in the key location assigned to the currently selected channel.
“NOPJC” flashing: Indicates that there is no PJC component loaded.
“ERROR" flashing: Indicates an operational fault; continue troubleshooting to determine specifics.
“NOPWR" flashing: Indicates that there is no RF output power. Could be antenna connector problem.
Fuel Gauge “flashing” or low battery icon: Make sure battery is precisely aligned with bottom of radio and wait five seconds. If icon is still displayed, replace battery with a fully recharged pack. Flashing/Empty Battery Fuel Gage Indicates 20% Battery Life remaining.
“UNLCK” flashing: May be caused by rapid changing of Channels. Power OFF for five seconds, then ON. May also be an indication when the synthesizer is not locked on a frequency?
“OTAR” flashing: Indicates that an Over-the-air-rekey (OTAR) signal is being received.
Transmit Screen
To adjust output power, press or keys on keypad while pressing PTT switch. Momentarily release PTT and re-key for the new power setting to take effect.
Squelch Screen
Press and hold Squelch Disable switch until Squelch Adjust screen is displayed. Press or keys to increase or decrease squelch opening threshold.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 95
MODE SELECT SCREEN: Press MODE key
1. SELECTS AUDIO PATH:
INT AUDIO: Uses internal speaker and microphone. TOP AUDIO: Routes audio input/output path to top audio connector. TOP SIDETONE: When transmitting, audio is routed to accessory earpiece. This helps the operator modulate voice level. SIDE AUDIO: Routes audio input/output to side connector. SIDE SIDETONE: When transmitting, audio is routed to accessory earpiece. This helps the operator modulate voice level.
NOTE: When INT AUDIO is NOT selected, JEM PTT and Internal Speaker/Microphone are disabled.
2. ACTIVATES EMERGENCY BEACON. Select frequencies you want to activate and press enter. When the Emergency Beacon is activated, the user can still transmit and receive on the regular selected channel. The Emergency Beacon can only be activated on a Basic channel.
121.5 MHz is Civilian 243.0 MHz is military 1 programmable frequency (116-150 MHz or 225-400 MHz)
3. TRAFFIC MODE Select VOICE MODE, DATA MODE, or RETRANSMIT. Switch to DATA MODE or RETRANSMIT before connecting data or retransmit cables.
NOTE: AN/PRC-148 (JEM) DOES NOT AUTOMATICALLY DECTECT CABLES.
4. CLONING OPTION: Cloning TX / Cloning Rx (with cable) OTAC TX / OTAC RX (Over The Air Cloning)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 96
5. GPS TX: The two information screens show the radio Combat ID (CID) and position information (grid reference) on screen one and altitude, speed, and Figures of Merit on screen two that are being transmitted by the radio.
6. GPS RX: The JEM can receive and store SA information from up to 10 different CIDs – to scroll through the available CIDs, press the [▲] or [▼] keys.
7. UPDATE OFF: SW UPDTE ON – Change Default Password CFG UPDT ON – Configuration Download Receive Ready
8. BLUE FORCE TRACKER: BFT requires the approval of the NRO and is only available to authorized customers
OFF BFT PTT BFT EMERG: The emergency mode provided by BFT allows the user to transmit a high priority positional data packet at specified. BFT AUTO: Blue Force Tracking (BFT) provides automatic transmission mode that transmit positional (GSP coordinate) data at a user-defined repetition rate repeatedly until BFT Auto has been disabled. Allows the user to transmit a high priority positional data packet at specified.
9. SILENT OFF/ON:
10. OFFSET = - - - -:
11. ASCM MODE – J or C: J = Radio with the jammer C = Radio no with the jammer
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 97
KEY FILL ALT / MODE > KEYFILL
DS-101 Key fill: Enables the load of Black COMSEC keys using a DS-101 type fill device (AN/CYZ-10 (DTD) or AN/PYQ-10 (SKL)).
DS-102 Key fill: Enables the load of Red COMSEC keys using a DS-102 type fill device (KYK-13, KYX-15, AN/CYZ-10 (DTD), or AN/PYQ-10 (SKL)) or System key load (Private JOSEKI Component or Transfer KEK) using a DS-102 fill device.
MODE 23 Key fill: Enables both the COMSEC key load and TRANSEC hopset/lockout set load functions into all SINCGARS channels. (Requires use of AN/CYZ-10 (DTD) or AN/PYQ-10 (SKL)).
TRNSEC: Enables the SINCGARS hopset load function into the channel selected from 1 through 6 and MAN (manual) or the lockout set into LOUT, using a MX-18290/VRC fill device.
TOD: Enables the HAVEQUICK I/II Time of Day load functions (load, transmit, receive, emergency initialize).
MWOD-A: Enables the HAVEQUICK I/II Multiple Word of Day load from an external fill device (e.g., KYK-13.)
MWOD-M: Enables a manual load of the HAVEQUICK I/II data from the keypad and display.
ERFTX: Future mode to let the AN/PRC-148 can send an ERF (Electronic Remote Fill)
P25KFD: Enables the load of AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) key using a key fill device (e.g. KVL 3000+) 1st responder keys
NO PRIVATE JOSEKI COMPONENT If “NOPJC” indicator is displayed on Default Display, PJC must be loaded into the radio prior to other keys being loaded.
WITHOUT A PJC LOADED, RADIO CAN OPERATE IN PLAINTEXT OR RETRANS MODES ONLY
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 98
Loading a key into the radio.
1. Press [ALT] and [MODE] Select Key fill, Press ENT 2. Select DS102 Press ENT. Connect fill device Press ENT. 3. Press ENT use [▲] or [▼] Select TEK 01-20 and press [ENT] in the “KEY:” field. 4. Press ENT User can label keys in LBL field (5-digit alphanumeric field). 5. When label is entered, press [ENT] to leave change mode. 6. User CANNOT label KEK, TRKEK or PJC 7. Press ENT User can designate TEK or KEK as Secret (S), Top Secret (TS), Confidential (C), and Unclassified (U). 8. Place the cursor on the “S” field, and highlight it by pressing [ENT]. 9. Use [▲] or [▼] select U, S, TS or C and confirm with [ENT] 10. Everything must be label PRIOR TO loading TEKs or KEKs.
Loading a Load set into the radio.
Load set keys are loaded in the 1st five fill position... (TEK01-TEK05)
1. Press [ALT] and [MODE] Select KEY FILL, Press ENT 2. Select MODE23, Press ENT. Connect mode 23 device, Press PTT TO LOAD. 3. Initializing crypto channels please wait. 4. Load set keys are loaded in the FIRST FIVE fill positions. (TEK01 thru TEK05)
KEY DATABASE: Displays COMSEC KEYS
Press [ALT] and [MODE] Select STATUS, Press ENT Select KEY DATABASE, Press ENT Select Algorithm type, Press ENT
Checks algorithm type, location, and classification of COMSEC keys loaded in the radio. Keys are listed TEK 1-20, then KEK, then OTAR Count. If a key is loaded, the classification is shown. Empty locations are shown by a “--”.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 99
Key Retention:
The AN/PRC-148 (JEM) will retain a key fill during a battery change. Radio must be powered off before changing the battery or key will not be retained. The COMSEC keys in JEM will be held for five (5) minutes after the removal of the main battery. For security reasons, after 5 minutes without the main battery, the COMSEC keys will be zeroized.
NOTE: This does NOT apply to PJC.
STATUS
Press [ALT] and [MODE] Select STATUS, Press ENT
CLOCK The CLOCK selection displays the radio’s real-time clock information. The format is HH:MM:SS, using a 24-hour clock. The display includes a two-digit Julian date. (Use Zulu Time)
ZEROIZE
Zero Selective Key: Press ALT & MODE, Select ZEROIZE, Press ENT Select ZERO COMSEC, Press ENT Select SELECT KEY, Press ENT Select the key you what to Erase, Press ENT Are you sure, Press ENT. Press ESC to Exit.
Erase All: Press ALT & MODE, Select ZEROIZE, Press ENT Select ZERO COMSEC, Press ENT Select ERASE ALL, Press ENT Are you sure Press ENT. Press ESC to Exit. ERASE ALL zeroizes Storage TEK, KEK and TRKEK.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 100
Clear All: Press ALT & MODE, Select ZEROIZE, Press ENT Select CLEAR ALL, Press ENT Zeroizes all COMSEC keys and all TRANSEC keys/hopsets. ZEROIZES Storage KEK and TRKEK Resets all channel programming to factory defaults: All channels to 167.5625 MHz, Alternate channels are AM and FM frequencies, All channels set to 5 watts output, No squelch tones Plain (PT) Zeroize all keys. Reset to defaults Are you sure? Press ENT. Press ESC to Exit.
Set Defaults: Press ALT & MODE, Select ZEROIZE, Press ENT Select SET DEFAULTS, Press ENT Can reset radio parameters to factory default settings. Resets all “Access denied” functions to allow programming from keypad. DOES NOT affect COMSEC or TRANSEC fill data. Reset to defaults Are you sure? Press ENT. Press ESC to Exit. Writing factory defaults
Mechanical (Emergency) zero
Turn volume switch counterclockwise past off position until it stops. Pull down on button on side under volume switch. Zeroizes Crypto keys only!
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 101
Maintenance
BIT (Built-In-Test): Press ALT & MODE Select Maintenance, Press ENT Select BIT, Press ENT Performing Tests….
The Built-In-Test function allows the user to run a self-test of the primary radio boards: Control CCA, Front Panel, Power Amplifier, and Synthesizer. Selecting BIT and pressing [ENT] begins the test. The screen displays "Performing Tests" while BIT is running. At the test conclusion (10-15 seconds), the screen will show the test results (PASS or FAIL) for each board.
Elapsed Time: Press ALT & MODE Select Maintenance, Press ENT Select Elapsed Time, Press ENT
The Elapsed Time Screen shows the total time the radio has been in Transmit mode (PTT pressed), Receive mode (actively receiving radio signals with audio output), and Standby mode (powered on but neither transmitting nor receiving). The time is shown in hours: minutes.
Options: Press ALT & MODE Select Maintenance, Press ENT Select Options, Press ENT
The Options Screen displays the enabled radio operating software options. The available options are Basic, SINCGARS, ANDVT, HTW, HAVEQUICK I/II (HQII), Retrains, Software Maintenance, Over-the-air cloning (OTAC), FH2, M-HOP, S-HOP, MELP, P25, IW, SATCOM, INTC, MELP, P25, BFT, OPTY
Versions: Press ALT & MODE Select Maintenance, Press ENT Select Versions, Press ENT
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 102
Programming
RESTRICTED ACCESS:
Operator access to radio programming (and other selected functions, such as SCAN and Zeroize) can be “locked out” by the PC Configuration Toolkit.
If a “locked out” function is selected, the “Access denied” screen is shown.
Access can be restricted either by individual channels or by overall function. (e.g., Zeroize)
GLOBAL:
Press ALT & MODE, Select PROGRAM, Press ENT, Select GLOBAL, Press ENT
TX TIMEOUT: BL TIMEOUT Sets automatic Sets automatic timeout transmit time-out. for display backlighting.
SET CLOCK: MIC LEVEL: Set internal real-time HIGH or LOW gain clock
NOTE: The radio gives two warning tones. The first warning tone indicates the radio will time out in 10 seconds. The second tone indicates that the radio has stopped transmitting. There is no visual indicator.
SIDE CONN: Enables/disables the radio side connector. Side Connector - Disable the side connector except when connecting an external cable or when operating in a Vehicle Adapter. To prevent damage to the radio while powered on, the 22 pin side connector MUST be disabled before the radio is immersed in water (especially salt water).
TONE VOLUME: Sets the volume level for alert and alarm tones (0-7)
CHANGE PC PW: Changes SW Update Password. Change password for PC Toolkit access; operator must enter current password, and then enter new password twice. When entering password, use MODE key to toggle between upper and lower case alpha characters.
The password must contain at least 1-letter and 1-number. The password must be between 6 and 12 characters, alphanumeric only (A-Z, 0-9), contain no spaces, contain at least one alpha and one numeric character, must be all caps and be different from the previous 10 passwords.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 103
SET DISPLAY: Sets the brightness and contrast of the front panel LCD using the arrow keys to adjust the brightness and contacts.
SIDE BUTTON: Allows the side buttons to be pre-set to a number of functions. The side buttons can be either pre- programmed using the PCCT or can be set by the operator.
RADIO UNITID: The P25 Unit ID can be programmed using the PC PCCT. P25 Unit ID – Valid, Ranges 1 – 9,999,999
EMERGENCY:
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select EMERGENCY press [ENT]. Select BEACON SETUP press [ENT].
Program emergency channel. (116-150 MHz or 225-400 MHz) Programmable transmit and idle (on and off) times. (1sec - 30sec).
Select SA SETUP press [ENT] Enter your CID. CID identifies which radio a received grid came from, and identifies your radio’s grid to others.
Allows the transmission of (SA) and GPS data to be enabled or disabled. When enabled, the radio must be in secure (CT) mode and attached to a GPS receiver in order to transmit SA/GPS data.
Allows the reception of (SA) and GPS data to be enabled or disabled. When enabled, the radio must be in secure (CT) mode and attached to a GPS receiver in order to transmit SA/GPS data.
TYPE: NMEA
RATE: (9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 19200, 16500, 12200,)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 104
PROGRAMMING
BASIC Channel
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select CHANNEL press [ENT].
1. Channel Number 001-256
2. Plain or Secure
3. Channel Label: 7 Digits Alphanumeric
4. TX RF Power: AM 1 or 5 Watts FM .1, .5, 1, 3 or 5 watts
5. Operating Mode: Basic, ASCM, SCM, SATCOM, IW, P25, HTW, ANDVT, HQ/HQII, SINCGAR
6&7. Frequency: 30-512 MHz in 5 and 6.25 kHz steps.
8 & 9. Squelch Tone: • Changing RX tone also changes TX tone. • Can use to set to civilian radios such as the Motorola radio. • Disable (set to off) in CT mode. • CTCSS (Continuous Tone Controlled Squelch System). • Also known as PL Tones, Privacy Codes, and Squelch Tones. • Must be 150 Hz for all U.S. combat net radios. • In SINCGARS mode, 150 Hz is automatically set.
10. Modulation Type: • AM (Amplitude Modulated) • FM (Frequency Modulated) • NB (Narrowband FM-12.5 kHz bandwidth) PLAIN TEXT ONLY • CPM (Continuous Phase Modulation) (Fixed) (HTW) • PSK (Phase Shift Keying) (Fixed) (ANDVT) • SBPSK (Shaped Binary Phase Shift Keying)
11. Traffic Clock: 12kbs or 16kbs, 16 kilobits per second (VINSON).
12. Comsec: Traffic Encryption Key. (Whatever you named it when you loaded it)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 105
13. RPTR (REPEATER DELAY): • Sets receive delay for signal repeater operation. Repeater Delay. • Repeater Delay (in seconds): None, .02, .04, .06, .08, and 1.0 • Disabled in HAVEQUICK Net • When operating through a repeater, the inherent delays in the system can cause the end of each transmission to be “echoed.” Enabling Repeater Delay eliminates the “echo.” • Does not affect ability of AN/PRC-148 to transmit or receive through a repeater.
14. FADE (FADE BRIDGE): • Allows the encryption clock to continue to operate during momentary signal loss so that encryption synchronization is not interrupted. • When a signal fades out of reception, the crypto chip on a receiving radio powers down. Synchronization needs to be re-established before encrypted communications can continue. • Enabling the Fade Bridge function of the radio will allow the crypto chip to stay active from 1- 4 seconds after the AN/PRC-148 has stopped receiving a signal. The 1- 4 second setting is user-adjustable on the AN/PRC-148 in 1-second increments. • Synchronization will not have to be re- established for 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, or 4.0 0.0 seconds if Fade Bridging is enabled.
15. PHASE (Crypto Synchronization): • Active during Encrypted Operations. • PHASE is used to set the length of the initial bit synchronization pattern transmitted by the radio. The radio uses this information to synchronize the clock timing of the sending and receiving radios. The default value is 256 milliseconds. Other values are 384 milliseconds, 1.06 seconds, and OFF. The default value is sufficient time under most operating conditions. If the radio signal is going through a repeater system, the synchronization may be truncated and require longer than the default value. Bit Synchronization is necessary all encrypted operations. • Default of 256 msec usually OK.
16. SQLCH (Squelch): • Squelch is used to set the pre-programmed squelch level for the selected channel. Squelch values are from 0 to 7. Lower values allow weaker signals to be heard; higher values block more background noise.
Clear Bypass Reception: • The PRC-148 is capable of receiving unencrypted messages while set for secure mode operation. • Encrypted radio’s screen will change and emit the Clear Signal when receiving an unencrypted transmission.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 106
SINCGARS SC Channel
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select CHANNEL press [ENT].
1. Select Channel 2. Secure or Plain 3. Label your channel (optional) 4. TX RF Power: 1, 3 or 5 Watts 5. Operating Mode: SINCGAR 6. SINCGARS = : Sincgars Channel 1-6, MAN, CUE, HS1 – HS6 7. ECCM: Electronic Counter Counter-Measures: SC (Single Channel) FH (Frequency Hopping), FHM (Frequency Hopping Master), FH2 (Frequency Hopping 2), F2M (Frequency Hopping 2 Master). 8. FX= 67.5000: Single Channel Frequency: 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz in 25 kHz steps 9. FM (Can’t change) 10. 600: Data Transmission Rates: • SINCGARS SDM: 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 16000 bps • SINCGARS EDM: 1200N, 2400N, 4800N, and 9600N bps • PCKT or RS232 • (N indicates Enhanced Data Mode – uses additional error correction) 11. TEK06: COMSEC key location: TEK 01-20 12. RPTR: • Repeater Delay (in seconds): None, .02, .04, .06, .08, and 1.0 • Disabled in HAVEQUICK Net • When operating through a repeater, the inherent delays in the system can cause the end of each transmission to be “echoed.” Enabling Repeater Delay eliminates the “echo.” • Does not affect ability of AN/PRC-148 to transmit or receive through a repeater. 13. OFFSET: Used to change a SINCGARS SC operating frequency by adding or subtracting 5 or 10 kHz. Can be used to reduce effects of interference. (-10, -5, 0, +5, +10 kHz) 14. FADE: Fade bridging allows the encryption clock recovery to “freewheel” during momentary signal loss so that encryption synchronization is not interrupted. The secure radio can be programmed to provide fade bridging from 0 to 4 seconds in one second increments. 15. SQLCH: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 107
SINCGARS FH Channel
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select CHANNEL press [ENT].
1. Select Channel 2. Secure or Plain 3. Label your channel (optional) 4. TX RF Power: 1, 3 or 5 Watts 5. Operating Mode: SINCGAR 6. SINCGARS = CH 1-6, MAN, CUE, HS1 – HS6 7. ECCM: Electronic Counter Counter-Measures Mode: SC (Single Channel), FH (Frequency Hopping), FHM (Frequency Hopping Master), FH2 (Frequency Hopping 2), and F2M (Frequency Hopping 2 Master). 8. FX= 67.5000: Single Channel Frequency:30 MHz to 87.975 MHz in 25 kHz steps 9. FM (Can’t change) 10. 600: Data Transmission Rates: – SINCGARS SDM: 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 16000 bps – SINCGARS EDM: 1200N, 2400N, 4800N, and 9600N bps – PCKT or RS232 – (N indicates Enhanced Data Mode – uses additional error correction) 11. TEK01: COMSEC key location: TEK 01-05 12. NETID: Net ID numbers distinguishes one Frequency Hopping net from another when all other frequency hopping data elements are the same. Hopping preset channel. Net Identification Number: 000 to 999 13. OFFSET: Used to change a SINCGARS SC operating frequency by adding or subtracting 5 or 10 kHz. Can be used to reduce effects of interference. (-10, -5, 0, +5, +10 kHz) 14. FADE: Fade bridging allows the encryption clock recovery to “freewheel” during momentary signal loss so that encryption synchronization is not interrupted. The secure radio can be programmed to provide fade bridging from 0 to 4 seconds in one second increments. 15. SQLCH: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Late Net Entry (LNE): – Press ALT + GR, LNE will be displayed in lower left corner of default screen. – When SINCGARS transmission received, radio clock will synchronize; LNE erased. – If radio is more than 30 seconds off Net Time, may need to repeat LNE. – If PTT pressed before external transmission received, LNE cancelled. Press [ALT] + [GR] to activate LNE:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 108
Thales Remote Control Unit with GPS (RCU-G) MA6795
Allows user to control the volume, channel, and access radio menus remotely. Allows user to display current location with the embedded commercial GPS.
Connect RCU-G to 22-pin side connector with the provided cable (ensure the side connector is enabled.) RCU-G can be connected before or after radio boot-up.
Once connected, the RCU-G runs a Power on Self-Test (POST). After the POST, the RCU-G will show the radio’s default display.
GPS automatically begins acquiring satellites after POST.
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select GLOBAL and press [ENT]. Select SET CLOCK press [ENT]. Select GPS UPDATE press [ENT]. • RCU-G can be used to set SINCGARS clock. • GPS UPDATE will only work if the RCU-G is tracking satellites. • Press ENT on GPS UPDATE, and then press ESC to return to the default display. • MANUAL allows for a manual SET CLOCK to be performed.
GPS TX
Press [MODE]. Select GPS TX press [ENT].
• Displays grid you are transmitting. • Screen 1 shows CID and position. • Screen 2 shows altitude, speed, and Figures of Merit. • (Press ENT to view second screen).
GPS RX
Press [MODE]. Select GPS RX press [ENT].
• Screen 1 shows CID and position (MGRS format). • Screen 2 shows altitude, speed, and Figures of Merit. • Press ENT to view second screen • Can save up to 10 unique CIDs. • Press down arrow key to view other CIDs. • Previous information overwritten when new transmission received. Oldest deleted when CID #11 received.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 109
ANDVT (Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal ANDVT Parameters
Frequency Range - 30.0 to 512.0 MHz • Normal use is for NON-Line of Sight communications in 240 to 320 MHz range. Modulation (Fixed): • Shaped Binary Phase Shift Keying. • 5 kHz Bandwidth. Traffic Rate (Fixed) • Over-the-air encrypted digital data rate of 2400 bps Secure Interoperable with ANDVT, KY-99, KY-99A, AN/PSC-5, AN/PSC-5D, AN/PRC-117F. ANDVT is always secure; All ANDVT channels must have an active Comsec key assigned. Requires an antenna with at least +7dBi of gain. High Gain Antenna: TRIVEC AV-2055-3 • Frequency: 240 – 318 MHz • Gain: +10.5 dBi • Weight: 3.1 lb. • Connector: BNC Male • dBi gain is used to indicate the increase in power of one antenna (transmitting or receiving) as compared to another antenna (an antenna with a dBi gain of 0).
ANDVT Channel: Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select Channel, press [ENT]. Set Operating Mode to ANDVT.
ANDVT Definitions:
ANDVT: Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal
Delay (ANDVT) • Time between transmit carrier going active without modulation and the carrier having modulation applied • 135, 295, 600, 895, 1200 msecs.
Shaped Binary Phase Shift Keying (SBPSK) • The form of phase shift keying used in the AN/PRC-148 ANDVT mode. Phase shift keying is a method of signal modulation that shifts the phase angle of the carrier. In SBPSK, the phase of the carrier can be unchanged or shifted 180 degrees.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 110
RPTR • Repeater Delay (in seconds): None, .02, .04, .06, .08, and 1.0 • Disabled in HAVEQUICK Net • When operating through a repeater, the inherent delays in the system can cause the end of each transmission to be “echoed.” Enabling Repeater Delay eliminates the “echo.” • Does not affect ability of AN/PRC-148 to transmit or receive through a repeater.
FADE • Allows the encryption clock to continue to operate during momentary signal loss so that encryption synchronization is not interrupted. • When a signal fades out of reception, the crypto chip on a receiving radio powers down. Synchronization needs to be re-established before encrypted communications can continue. • Enabling the Fade Bridge function of the radio will allow the crypto chip to stay active from 1- 4 seconds after the AN/PRC-148 has stopped receiving a signal. The 1- 4 second setting is user-adjustable on the AN/PRC-148 in 1-second increments. • Synchronization will not have to be re-established for 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, or 4.0 0.0 seconds if Fade Bridging is enabled.
TFRAME (Training Frame) • One frame is a 32-bit pattern of “0s” and “1s” • Selections are 6, 9, 12, 15, 30, and 60 frames • Repetitive pattern used for synchronization and mode identification
SQLCH: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
VOC: • LPC-10: Vocoder mode that provides basic voice quality and legacy equipment interoperability.
• MELP: (Mixed-Excitation Linear Predictive vocoder), Improves voice quality vs. old LPC-10 interface. NPP (Noise Pre-Processor) = ON/OFF Reduces noise on the transmitting end. FILTER (Rx Noise Filter) = ON/OFF Reduces noise on the receiving end.
JEM radio automatically detects MELP or LPC-10 signal.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 111
(BASIC) WIDEBAND SATCOM Channel
Press [ALT] plus [MODE] Select PROGRAM and press [ENT] Select Channel, press [ENT] Set Operating Mode to BASIC • To program an WIDEBAND 25 KHz SATCOM channel, program a BASIC SECURE FM channel AND attach a high gain antenna (+7 dBi or more). • CTCSS tones are not used for SATCOM. • Fade is recommended to be set at 2.
SATCOM NB Channel
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select Channel, press [ENT]. Set Operating Mode to SATCOM.
SATCOM WB Channel
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select Channel, press [ENT]. Set Operating Mode to SATCOM.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 112
ASCM Channel
SATCOM WB ONLY CHANNEL or LOS
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select Channel, press [ENT]. Set Operating Mode to ASCM.
SCM Channel
LOS
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select Channel, press [ENT]. Set Operating Mode to SCM.
HTW Channel
HTW
Press [ALT] plus [MODE]. Select PROGRAM and press [ENT]. Select Channel, press [ENT]. Set Operating Mode to HTW
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 113
GROUP
Press [GR] key • Display lists current group labels. • Groups hold up to 16 channels. • Every channel must be assigned to at least one group to be accessible. • Press [▲] or [▼] keys to scroll through group numbers. • Press [ENT] to confirm new group selection.
Programming a Group
Press [ALT] plus [MODE] Select PROGRAM and press [ENT] Select Group, press [ENT]
DISABLED Receive Screen
SCAN
Enables user to monitor multiple channels.
SCAN can monitors UP TO 17 channels - clear and secure, different TEKs, different traffic rates (12/16 kbps)
Radio has 10 Scan Plans with UP TO 16 pre-set channels each; the radio’s HOME channel becomes the 17th channel of the Scan Plan when SCAN function activated.
Does NOT monitor Frequency Hopping channels.
If the radio is set to either a SINCGARS or HAVEQUICK channel, scan cannot be activated.
If a SINCGARS FH or HAVEQUICK FH channel is included in a Scan Plan, the radio skips that channel during SCAN.
Scan Plan can include Basic (fixed frequency) channels and ANDVT channels – Will scan either Basic OR ANDVT channels, depending on what the channel type of the Home Channel is when scanning is activated.
A SINCGARS SC or HAVEQUICK SC channel can be entered into a scan plan. Traffic will be seen as BASIC FM or AM.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 114
Home Channel: • The Active Channel becomes the HOME channel when SCAN is activated. Normal receive and transmit operations may only be performed from the HOME channel. Scan will not start if the HOME channel is a frequency hopping channel or the radio is in data mode. • The HOME channel determines the type of channels that can be scanned in a given Scan Plan. • If the HOME channel is a LOS Basic channel, the radio will skip any ANDVT or Project 25 channels in the Scan Plan. • If the HOME channel is an ANDVT channel, the radio will scan only ANDVT channels in the Scan Plan. • If the HOME channel is a Project 25 channel, then only Project 25 channels will be scanned.
Normal SCAN • In Normal SCAN mode, the radio scan function sequentially checks each channel in the current selected Scan Plan for radio signals. If a signal is detected, the radio pauses on that channel until 2 seconds after activity ceases (to allow the user an opportunity to answer). If the user presses the PTT switch during the 2 second “hold” period, the radio will automatically transmit on the received scan channel.
Priority Monitor • In Priority Monitor mode, the radio alternates between the Scan Plan channels and either one or two Emergency Monitor (Priority) channels in the following sequence (Priority channels are P1 and P2): P1-P2-HOME-P1-P2-CH1-P1-P2- CH2-P1 . . . . .
NOTE: A radio with a full plan (17 channels) will take approximately 1.7 seconds to complete a scan cycle.
Select a SCAN plan: Press ALT and GR key to access Scan Menu. Select Plan Select press ENT Select Plan (SP01 - SP10)
Press ALT and GR key to access Scan Menu. Select Plan Config press ENT
Add channels to your Scan plan: Delete channels to your Scan plan:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 115
Press ALT and GR key to access Scan Menu. Select PRI CONFIG press ENT Priority Channel:
The Priority Channel Assignment Screen allows the user to select the Priority 1 and Priority 2 channels from the channels already programmed in the selected scan plan and set the Priority Scan mode.
Activating Scan: Press ALT and GR key to access Scan Menu. Select Scan on, press ENT
Cloning
Two types of cloning: Wired and wireless (Over the Air Cloning (OTAC)).
Allows a user to copy settings and a frequency plan from one radio to another.
Cloning does NOT transfer: COMSEC/TRANSEC/AES SINCGARS NET ID or TIME HAVEQUICK Time of Day HAVEQUICK TRANSEC is able to be cloned.
CLONING (WIRED) Cloning cable (P/N 3500610-501) (NSN 5995-01-487-1136)
Ensure both radios are set for INTERNAL AUDIO and 22 PIN SIDE CONNECTOR ENABLED.
Connect the SEND end of the cloning cable to the side connector of the SEND (CLONE TX) radio set (the radio set with the information to be cloned)
Connect the RECEIVE end of the cloning cable to the side connector of the RECEIVE (CLONE RX) radio set (the radio set to receive the information)
Press [MODE] Select CLONING OFF, CLONING TX, or CLONING RX Switch to CLONING TX or CLONING RX before connecting cloning cable. Press [ESC] to cancel selection.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 116
Sending Radio Receiving Radio
• The SEND radio displays CLONING PTT TO SEND. • The RECEIVE radio displays CLONING RECEIVE RDY.
• Press the PTT on the SEND radio to initiate cloning. • The SEND radio attempts to establish communications with the RECEIVE radio and check waveform compatibility (e.g., SINCGARS, HAVEQUICK). • The SEND radio will only transfer channel parameters for waveforms present in both radios.
• If there is an error during cloning, or if the SEND radio cannot detect the RECEIVE radio, a SENDING ERROR message will appear on the SEND radio. • If the RECEIVE radio detects an error condition during cloning, a RECEIVE ERROR message will appear on the RECEIVE radio.
• Once the SEND and RECEIVE radios have successfully established communications, the screens on the SEND and RECEIVE radios will appear as shown below.
When cloning is successfully completed: • The RECEIVING radio will reboot (to activate the new configuration) and resume normal operation. • The SENDING radio will revert to the following screen, so that you may clone additional radios.
Over The Air Cloning (OTAC)
Press [MODE] Select OTAC TX or OTAC RX
Enter desired frequency, power and TEK. To start cloning process, press ENT.
When the cloning process begins, the TX and RX radios will display the screens below.
TX will repeat until ESC is pressed. RX radio only reboots if cloning is 100% received.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 117
Special Power Adapter Interface
Physical Characteristics:
Weight: less than 16 ounces. Accepts 12-32 VDC input. Standard DC input cable - 3500460-501. Connectors: Top and bottom – Same twist-on connector as the rechargeable battery. Side – MS/3112ES5 Cannon plug connector for directly attaching SOP equipment. Charges battery operates radio, or both. LED giving Charge Indication. Standard DC input cable - 3500460-501. Alternate cable kit - 1100533-501.
Electrical Protection:
The SPAI and SPAI DC Input Cable interfaces are protected against any failures on interconnecting cables or terminations and are protected against electrostatic discharge.
The SPAI or SPAI DC Input Cable will not be damaged by any of the following conditions of use when applied for an indefinite period of time:
Reverse input of the supply voltage Over-voltage input of the supply voltage Short circuit to ground or a short circuit in either the battery or Receiver/Transmitter
Performance:
The SPAI will charge a fully discharged MBITR lithium ion battery within 3.0 hours at a nominal battery temperature (+21oC). The battery is charged to within 90% of capacity in the first two hours. The SPAI is capable of charging over a temperature range -10°C to +40°C.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 118
A-320 Amplifier & A-320DPA
Package Contents 1. A-320 Amplifier 2. A-320DPA 3. Protective Caps 4. Velcro Strap 8” (x2) 5. A-320 Power Cable (0670-000-320) 6. Amplifier Holder (0670-400-000) 7. RF Jumper Cable 24” TNC to BNC (0670-000-704) 8. Antenna Relocator (0670-000-305) 9. Antenna Relocator Cable 30” TNC to TNC (0670-000-703) 10. Quick Operating Instruction Card (0670-000-102) 11. 20w Antenna (0670-000-307) 12. AC to DC power converter kit part of OP-177/U (5140-00-329-4386)
A-320V1 20 Watts Multi-Band Amplifier The A-320 is a small, lightweight &rugged RF power amplifier designed to be used with most handheld radios operation in the 30 – 512 MHz range. The A-320 provides a 20 Watts output with a 5 watt input from the radio. DC power is from a single BA-XX90 type battery or any 22-23 VDC source.
Operation 1. Connect TNC to BNC RF jumper cable between radio antenna connector and A- 320 R/T connector. 2. Connect appropriate antenna or optional antenna relocation assembly cable and antenna to A-320 ANT connector. Ensure the antenna is rated for 20 Watts of RF power and deployed properly. 3. Connect supplied power cable between BA-XX90 (or Equivalent) and A-320 PWR connector. 4. Turn on A-320 by holding the ON/Off button for 1 second. The RX and 20W O/P PWR indicator will be illuminated. 5. Set amplifier for desired output power by pressing and releasing the PWR SET button. The power level will cycle one position with each button press. 6. Indicator dimming is accomplished by pressing and holding the PWR SET button. When desired intensity is achieved release the PWR SET button. There are five (5) possible settings including full on to full off. 7. Ensure the attached radio is set for 5 watts. (3watts min, 7 watts max) 8. Mode TX indicator will be solid red during transmit. Mode RX indicator will be solid green during receive mode. 9. The amplifier is turned off by pressing and holding the On/Off until all indicators extinguish (̴3 Seconds).
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 119
Status Indicator Definition 1. All non-blinking fault indicators will place the amplifier into bypass node (no amplification). To reset faults, cycle the power switch, if faults persist, corrective maintenance may be required. 2. Blinking faults indicate the amplifier has detected a condition that the operator needs to address. There are three such faults: a. If a Temp/Current fault occurs the indicator will blink and power will automatically be reduced to protect the A-320. If the temperature /current continues to increase beyond the second threshold the amplifier will go to bypass (no amplification), indicated by a steady Temp/Current light. Upon cooling or elimination of the over-current condition the fault will self-reset and the power setting will return to original selected power setting. b. A blinking battery fault indicates the battery voltage has fallen below 22 VDC; the amplifier will continue to operate. A solid battery fault indicates a bad battery (Voltage below 18V above 34V) and the amplifier will go to bypass (no amplification). Battery faults can only be resolved with a new or recharged battery. c. A blinking VSWR fault indicates an antenna fault and output power has been reduced to 7 watts. Selected power level is restored on RX mode. The VSWR fault is cleared on re-key with proper antenna load.
VSWR: High VSWR seen at ANT connector during TX CURRENT: High DC current draw. SYSTEM1: Return for Depot repair. SYSTEM2: Return for Depot repair. BATTERY: VDC less than 22 VDC. TEMP: Case temperature has exceeded safe limits.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 120
ULTRALIFE A-320DPA DUAL PORT ADAPTER
The A-320DPA is a small, lightweight & rugged adapter designed to be used with the A-320 (V1) Amplifier. The A- 320DPA provides Dual Antenna Ports and a selectable SATCOM Low Noise Amplifier (LNA). DC power is from a single BA-XX90 type battery or any 22-34 VDC source.
Operation
1. Align the A-320DPA to the A-320(V1) RF and DC connectors. Press the A- 320DPA firmly onto the A-320(V1), both latching arms should click when engaged fully. 2. Connect appropriate antennas or optional antenna relocation assembly cable and antenna to A-320DPA ANT connectors. Ensure the antennas are rated for 20 Watts of RF power and deployed properly. 3. Connect supplied power cable between BA-XX90 (or equivalent) and A-320DPA PWR connector. 4. Turn on A-320DPA (V1) by holding On/Off button for 1 second. The RX and 20W O/P PWR indicator will be illuminated. 5. Ensure the user supplied radio is set for 5 Watts. (3 Watts Min, 7 Watts max) and connect coaxial cable between radio’s antenna port and the R/T port of the A-320DPA. 6. Set the desired operating mode on the A-320DPA’s rotary Switch. The mode indicator will be solid RED for LNA Mode or GREEN for NO LNA Mode. Note that if the switch is set to OFF, you can still turn on the attached A-320(V1), but no signal will be routed to it for amplification. 7. To remove the A-320DPA from the A320 (V1) depress both latching arms simultaneously to release the locking latches from the A-320(V1). Pull the unit uniformly away from the amplifier. Do not twist during removal. Twisting the A- 320DPA may cause damage to all connectors.
Mode Indicator Definition
1. NO LED: A-320DPA is in bypass (OFF) mode. The R/T port’s signal will be connected directly to the 30-88 MHz and 116-512 MHz Antenna ports for both TX and RX. The A-320(V1) will be bypassed in this mode (no TX amplification.) 2. RED LED: A-320DPA is in LNA mode. The internal SATCOM LNA is enabled for RX. The 116-512 MHz port only supports 243-270 MHz operation. The 30- 88 MHz port supports its full range. TX will be amplified by the attached A-320(V1). 3. GREEN LED: A-320DPA is in the NO LNA mode. Both antenna ports will support their full frequency range. The SATCOM LNA is disabled and TX will be amplified by the attached A-320(V1)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 121
DATA
Can be configured for various speeds: 16k BASIC, SINCGARS 2.4K ANDVT 56k HTW Basic Only
Operational only in CT mode with valid key fill 5.01xx firmware allows for voice to have the priority over data (VOD).
Ensure radio is in DATA mode.
Press MODE, and change VOICE MODE to DATA MODE. Press ENT.
DATA MODES: SINCGARS, ANDVT, Basic, HaveQuick, Single Channel.
If configured correctly for DATA, screen below will be displayed. Connect data cable to 22 pin side connector of radio and to data controller computer.
Data - (HTW) • Frequency Range - 30.0 to 512.0 MHz • 25 kHz Bandwidth • Modulation – CPM • 56k bits per second traffic rate • Secure (CT) data only • Interoperable with Mil STD 188 – 184 • HTW Channels MUST has an active COMSEC key assigned. • HTW Channels are Data only.
DATA MODE 56k HTW Configuration (DATA only, no VOICE) • Place the radio in DATA mode if not already • Press ALT + MODE, select PROGRAM, select CHANNEL • Change the operating mode to HTW.
DATA MODE 56k HTW Configuration (DATA only, no VOICE) • Select RX and TX frequencies and TEK. ESC to default screen.
5.01xx firmware and later allows for voice to have transmit priority over data (VOD).
If data is interrupted with voice, it will automatically recover dependent on the data controller software.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 122
PDA 184 PDA-184 CHEAT SHEET
Install PDA-184
1. Set up radio in CT/DATA preset (If in DAMA/IW Mode, get to “Connected/Idle”)
2. Install data cable to RT & COMPUTER (Open Device Manager). Insure computer recognizes PDA-184 Cable and the Driver are installed. (Cable is seen as an “Unknown” RS232 Sync Cable). The driver is in the OS. Search automatically for driver.
3. Click on Sompe Configurator >> Additional Software & Resources >> Install (Client Version)
Open PDA-184 software
4. Setup Address Book: Add Stations: (Minimum of 2) Station settings: Station ID: ###, Station Sign: XXXXXX> ADD Check Selected Destination Address Line Number Click “Apply Changes” if possible
5. From pull down menu: settings > PDA184 Settings (F1) or F1 button. Check & set the following: Mil-Std-184 a. Set your station ID number: ## Ops Mode: IW, CPM, DAMA = PSK, FSK, Manual IW = IW (CPM, Vinson, ANDVT) CPM = KG84 (1-4/A-D) NB = DAMA (ANDVT, KY99, KY99A) PSK WB = FSK (VINSON, BASIC, KY57) Global Settings (default) Radio Settings (pick your radio) (PRC-148) Email settings Select field station Use Mail Gateway Mail Gateway Station (#) number if doing EMAIL (OUTLOOK) Check for mail at the gateway every ### Seconds Device Settings – RS 232 Synchronous (Typical)
2. Click “OK”
3. Click “Apply Changes Now”
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 123
Delete all traffic Files 1. In “MIL184G folder, then “log” folder, empty the three folders located here (“activity”, “chat”, “station”) 2. In “MIL184G” folder, then “rxDir”, delete all files. 3. In “MIL184G” folder, then “txDir”, delete your traffic files only. 4. If you saved files anywhere else on the computer, they need to be deleted if no longer needed for transmitting.
Send a chat message: Place a check next to the SID in the address book window. Type text in the Text Input box. Click SEND
Send an attachment or file: Click file icon (File Cabinet). Browse for file. Send is initiated when file is double clicked.
FILE MESSAGE FORMAT EXAMPLE ALL ATTACHED FILE MSG’S WILL BE IN .TXT FORMAT (NOTEPAD)
FILE NAMING SCHEME
Student Number, Internal Authenticator, Message Number, Message Proword
Example: 69BEVIS 02BORIS .TXT
69 BEVIS 02 BORIS (This is the Subject line if sending email)
P7X DE R8J RR UNCLAS 011630ZJAN14 02 BORIS AAA 40 TROOPS BBB MOVING SW IN A COLUMN CCC 17SPU123456 DDD 82ND ABN BRIGADE EOM
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 124
Retransmission
– Minimum requirement: Two radios and retransmission cable (3500611-501). – Bi-directional. – Simplex or half-duplex radio channel programming. – Connect AN/PRC-148 (JEM) retransmission cable to side connector of both radios. – Set radios to RETRANSMIT from Mode screen.
Expedient Retransmission Kit (1100540-503) – Retransmission Cable – Filters (frequency-specific) – Antenna Cables
Radios can be set for clear (PT) or secure (CT) mode: connecting the retransmit cable will force the radios into a “RETRANS” CT mode that does not require a COMSEC key to be loaded.
Retransmission is available for Basic (AM, FM, NB), SINCGARS (Single Channel and Frequency Hopping), and ANDVT channels (not HAVEQUICK). Both radios in the retransmit pair must use the same waveform, i.e., Basic to Basic, SINCGARS to SINCGARS, ANDVT to ANDVT. Select desired retransmit channel on each radio.
The data rate (12k or 16k) must be programmed the same in both radios.
SINCGARS FH RETRANS requires that both radios have SINCGARS TRANSEC filled.
Radios used for RETRANS must not be on the same NET ID.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 125
(MA6943) 20W VEHICLE ADAPTER
Vehicle Adapter (MA6943) (NSN 5940-01-507-3991) • 30 MHz to 512 MHz • 5 or 20 watts RF output (FM), • 20 watts only (AM) • 12 to 32 VDC input • -31°C to +60°C Operational Temperature Range • SINCGARS and HAVE QUICK interoperable • Sand / Dust • Driven Rain • Vibration / Shock • Less than 11 pounds
Provides connections for: • Removable Control Head • Audio headset or handset • Multifunction (equivalent to radio side connector) • Intercom or speaker • Data • Antenna • Power Charges the radio’s battery while the radio is inserted in the vehicle adapter, and Allows rapid insertion and removal of the radio.
The detachable Removable Control Head (RCH) for the VA is the primary user interface. It includes all the keypad functions of the radio, an 80 x 32 Liquid Crystal Display, volume control and channel select toggle switches, and PTT and squelch keys. The Control Head can be left attached to the VA or can be used remotely via the 10 foot cable that connects it to the VA front panel.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 126
Remote Control keypad • Volume knob replaced by rocker key. • Channel knob replaced by rocker key. • Rockers provide additional surface area for identification. • PTT Key –Used in place of radio side mounted PTT. ( yellow ) • SQL on front for access. • ALT lettering colored blue . • Mode, SQL, & PTT Keys offset due to microphone position. • RCH Keypad Summary • Channel can be changed using the Up or Down CH buttons when the radio is in the default screen. • Output power levels of 5 or 20 or 50 Watts FM can be controlled using the PTT and Up or Down CH buttons. • Speaker On/Off can be controlled by holding ALT and pressing the Up or Down [±VOL] buttons. • Backlighting level controlled by holding ALT & ENT.
• Ensure VA is set to 20w when transmitting. Hold PTT and use up or down arrow keys to change power. Release PTT for changes to take effect.
• Vehicle Adapter Data Operation - When using PN 4600106-1, ensure the VOICE DATA toggle switch on that cable is switched to DATA. The screen below will be displayed.
• Vehicle Adapter Retransmission Operation. - Connect PN 3500565-501 to each VA’s multi-function connector. - Set each radio to desired frequency and operating mode (operating modes and traffic rates must match). - Seat and lock both radios into VA simultaneously. - Screen below should be displayed. - Radios must be taken out of RETRANS mode to be used for other operations.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 127
Frequency Code
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 128
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 129
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 130
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 131
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 132
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 133
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 134
Selected Antenna
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 135
Antenna Terminology
WHAT IS AN ANTENNA? • A transmit antenna is an electrical circuit that converts radio frequency energy into electro-magnetic energy and radiates it into space. • A receive antenna is the opposite of a transmit antenna.
TERMINOLOGY
Isotropic Antenna: is a theoretical antenna that radiates energy equally in all directions; used as one of the base (or reference) antennas. • Isotropic theoretical ‘perfect’ antenna in free space over “perfect” ground. (No loss of signal due to cables, wires, weather, water table, etc). • Theoretical antenna that radiates energy equally in all directions; used as one of the base/reference antennas • The closest real physical antenna to an isotropic is a simple, vertical “whip” antenna, which radiates RF signal in a 360-degree pattern along the ground. The whip antenna however does not radiate (to a useful extent) vertically above the antenna. • The isotropic antenna does not exist except on paper. • The base-line real antenna is known as a doublet.
Radiating element – The element of an antenna that radiates electro-magnetic energy.
Ground Element/Counterpoise - The element that provides the radio frequency energy its potential ground to complete its circuit. (Ground stake or in wire form as the counterpoise)
Transmission Line - The wire component that transfers radio frequency energy from the radio to the antenna with minimal lose. Coaxial cable, single wire, double wires, braided tohethere, ladder line, etc.
Balun - Balanced to unbalanced. A coupling device that connects an unbalanced transmission line to a balanced antenna, i.e. coaxial cable transmission line to a single- wire radiation element(s) (can be ratio’d- simple example; 50-ohm coaxial matched to 200 ohm ant equals 4:1 ratio, Doublet ant 50-ohm with coaxial 50-ohm uses 1:1 balun.)
Feed Point - the point on the antenna that radio frequency is applied from the transmission line or radio to the antenna; Center-fed / End fed.
Major Lobe of Radiation - The largest portion of electro-magnetic energy radiated from an antenna. In HF skywave communications, the major lobe of radiation must be oriented at the correct take off angle to effectively reach the distant station.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 136
Take-Off Angle - The required angle in respect to ground that energy (the major lobe of radiation) must travel from one point to another to reach the distant station.
Near-Vertical-Incident-Skywave (NVIS) - Communications – radiating electro- magnetic energy at a near vertical (90) angle for short range HF communication.
Take Off Angle: The “Rise-over-Run” is a field expedient method of determining take off angle.
Example; A 900 mile ‘commo-shot’ would have an approximate T/O angle of 19 deg.
Ex. What is the (approx) take-off angle of a 2100 mile ‘commo-shot'?
A 2100-mile commo shot will require an approx take off angle of eight-degrees. (8°)
Angle of incidence: The angle at which skywaves enter the ionosphere and refract back to Earth. ***
Gain: The apparent increase in signal strength without the increase of transmitter power. An engineer’s numerical rating.
In antenna design; gain is the ratio power received by a directional antenna to power received by an isotropic antenna. The numbers describe how well an antenna converts input power into radio waves headed into a specific direction; radiation pattern directivity and how efficient the antenna is.
Gain is a combination of the two: directivity and efficiency.
A dipole antenna radiates signal.
Adding a reflector and director to the antenna narrows the radio signal
The signal is made more directional and giving an apparent increase in signal strength (clearer) at the receiving station.
Antenna gain may express an apparent increase in radiated signal strength (positive gain) or a loss of radiated signal strength (negative gain).
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 137
Gain - Is expressed in decibels (dB), a logarithmic scale.
dBi - Antenna gain compared to an isotropic antenna.
dBd - Antenna gain with respect to a doublet antenna.
To determine these values requires engineering laboratory conditions. (equations using “lossless” antennas).
Isotropic antenna: A theoretical antenna that radiates energy equally in all directions and has a gain of zero (0); expressed as dB(i).
Doublet antenna: The base ½ l antenna that is used to measure the increase in gain of other antennas, expressed as dB(d). The doublet has a 2.14 dB(i) gain over an isotropic.
Impedance - Inductive and capacitive reactance that influences the resistance to the flow of radio frequency energy at the feed point onto the antenna, measured in ohms.
Feed Point Impedance - The inherent impedance at the feed point of an antenna. This must be Known in order to Match the transmission line to the antenna. This will Increase radiation efficiency and Decrease SWR.
ANTENNA POLARIZATION
• The polarization of an antenna refers to the orientation of the electric field (E-plane) of the radio wave with respect to the Earth’s surface. • The magnetic field of a radio wave is at right angles to the electric field.
Vertically Polarized Antennas - Tend to be mostly Omni-Directional and are used primarily for ground wave / line-of-sight communications in VHF frequency range using simple, small whip antennas. Nearly 98% of the Army’s radio communications. Units to left, right, front & rear.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 138
Vertically polarized antennas are best suited to ground wave propagation because the electrical lines of force have less contact with the ground.
Horizontally Polarized Antennas - Are mostly Bi-Directional and are primarily used for long-range HF communications.
Horizontally polarized antennas are best suited for sky wave propagation since the E-field is diminished more rapidly over ground.
ANTENNA RECIPROCITY • A good vertically polarized transmit antenna will be a good vertically polarized receive antenna. • A good horizontally polarized transmit antenna will be a good horizontally polarized receive antenna.
Antenna Components: • Radiating element • Ground element • Transmission line (on most antennas)
Rules for an efficient antenna: • Every antenna has a resistance to the flow of current. Minimizing resistance makes the antenna more efficient. • That’s why we have antenna formulas and math problems; metals have resistance to the flow electrons. 1. To minimize resistance: a. Select best wire available (including durability considerations) b. Construct antenna to ½ λ of operating frequency. c. Adjust antenna to multiples of ½ λ
2. To reducing resistance you: a. Increase flow of current b. Decrease reflected power c. Radiate more efficient energy
Antenna resonance: is when an antenna’s physical length equals the operating frequency’s electrical length.
The minimum length required to make an antenna resonant is one-half wavelength; (½λ)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 139
Every antenna has a single mathematical resonant frequency, however modern radio technology allows for antennas to operate using a range of frequencies (frequency range).
The general rule is to build / construct an antenna using the lowest frequency of the frequency range. (Lower frequency / longer wire). Radio technology will adjust to operate with the higher frequencies.
Better to have more wire than less.
Antenna Length Formulas
¼ λ - 234/Frequency = length in feet
½ λ - 468/Frequency = length in feet
Full wave close loop - 1005/Frequency = length in feet
Under average conditions the formula is sufficiently accurate for wire antennas at frequencies up to 30 MHz.
Full wave loop – 1005 / Freq (MHz) = Length in feet ** (N = # of ½ wavelengths)
MWLW - 492 (N - .05) / Freq in MHz = length in feet ** (N = # of ½ wavelengths)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 140
Ground Wave Antennas Common Line of Sight Antennas
Whip Antenna or ¼ λ (image) Antenna Whip/Image Antenna Frequency range: 30 to 88 MHz Polarization: Vertical Power capability: Matched to specific radio
Vertical Antenna Pattern Solid patterns produced by vertical half-wave antenna located a half-wavelength above ground.
Antenna Group OE-254: Frequency range: 30 to 88 MHz Formula: none Feed Point Impedance: 50 - 75Ω Radiation pattern: Omni-directional Minimum Height: 25 feet Takeoff Angle: change height Polarization: Horizontal and vertical simultaneously • Omni-directional, bi-conical, broad- band LOS VHF/FM antenna. • Replaced the RC-292 VHF/FM antenna. • Designed for use with the Frequency Hopping SINCGARS AN/PRC-119 radio (30-87.975 MHz).
¼ λ Vertical Whip/"Jungle" Antenna
Characteristics:
Vertically Polarized Omni -Directional Line of sight/Ground wave Increase distance by height-above ground Feed point impedance approx. 50 -70 Ω ¼ λ - 234/Frequency = length in feet
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 141
Jungle Antenna for 52.50 MHz
Calculate the total length of wire needed to construct of a Jungle antenna for a frequency of 87.975 MHz
STEP 1: Divide 234 by the Frequency in MHz (87.975 MHz) Answer: 2.65 Feet. STEP 2: Multiply .7 by 12 to convert to inches. Answer: 8 Inches STEP 3: Add one foot to each element. Answer: 2’ 8’’ + 1’ = 3’ 8’’ STEP 4: Multiply the total length of one element by four. Answer: 14 Feet, 8 Inches
FINAL ANSWER: 14’ 8” Of wire needed to construct this field expedient jungle antenna.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 142
100' Vertical half-Rhombic Antenna
Characteristics: 100' Vertical Half-Rhombic
Frequency range: 2 to 90 MHz Polarization: Vertical Power capability: Determined by terminating resistor Radiation pattern Azimuthal (bearing): Bi-Directional W/O resistor (Along axis of wire) Unidirectional W/Resistor (Along axis of wire) Line-of-sight/ground wave Feed point impedance approx. 400-600 Ω End-Fed Minimum Height: 30’
¼ Wave Slant Wire Antennas:
Formula: ¼λ Feed Point Impedance: 50-75Ω Uni-directional Minimum Height: 6” Takeoff Angle: Change wire angle
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 143
VHF "J"- Pole Antenna
Characteristics: Vertically Polarized Omni-Directional Line-of-Sight/Ground wave Increase distance by height-above-Ground Feed point impedance approx. 50 Ω
Reverse Scissors Antenna:
Formula: ¼λ Feed Point Impedance: 50-75Ω Uni-directional Minimum Height: 6” Takeoff Angle: Change wire angle Long range
Improvised Insulators
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 144
Sky Wave Antennas
Planning ranges for Sky wave antennas: Some antennas are useful for most ranges based off their height above ground, number of wavelengths (this determines the take- off angle) these capabilities and characteristics will be discussed.
• Short range (NVIS) 0 -500 miles • Medium range 500 - 1500 miles • Long range 1500 - 2500 + miles
Typically, ¼ and 1/2 wavelength antennas are suited for short to medium range communications.
Where as Multi-Wavelength long wires and sloping "V"s are more suited for medium to long range communications.
Half-wave Dipole Antenna
Characteristics: ½ λ Doublet
Frequency range: ± 2% of design frequency Polarization: Horizontal Power capability: 1,000 watts Center-Fed Max direction of radiation is broadside Bi - directional Minimum height above ground is ¼ wavelengths (246/Frequency MHz) Adjust take off angle by adjusting height above ground Feed point impedance approx. 50 - 75 Ω
½ λ Doublet for 17.500 MHz
STEP 1: Divide 468 By 17.500 ANSWER: 26.74’ STEP 2: Convert .74 into inches ANSWER: 8.4 = 8”
Total length of wire needed is 26’8”
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 145
Mulit-band Dipole Two Frequency's
Formula: ¼λ Feed Point Impedance: 50-75Ω Bi-directional, broadside Minimum Height: ¼λ Takeoff Angle: Change height
Sloping Dipole
Formula: ¼λ Feed Point Impedance: 50-75Ω Uni-directional Minimum Height: N/A Takeoff Angle: Change slope
½ λ Inverted Vee Antenna
Characteristics: ½ λ Inverted Vee Antenna
Frequency range: ± 2% of design frequency Polarization: Horizontal (some vert. off sides) Power capability: 1,000 watts Radiation pattern Azimuthal (bearing): Basically Omni directional with combination polarization Center - Fed, Apex 90 / 120 degree • Max direction of radiation is broadside • Minimum height - above ground is ¼ wavelengths (246 / Frequency MHz) • Adjust take - Adjust take-off angle by adjusting the height above ground of feed- point / center. Raise or lower the center, keep legs in-line until signal rcvd, then adjust inward. • Feed point impedance approx. 50 - 75 Ω
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 146
¼ Wave Slant Wire Characteristics: ¼λ Slant Medium range Polarization: Vertically polarized (some horizontal off the sides). End-fed. Max direction of radiation along the counter-poise. Radiating element angle 30 – 60 degree Adjust take-off angle by adjusting the radiating element. Feed point impedance approximate 50 - 75 W.
REFLECTION FACTOR
The height above ground affects the antenna’s radiation pattern
The radiation pattern will change depending on whether the reflected energy arrives IN-PHASE OR OUT-OF-PHASE with the antenna.
Take-Off Angle vs. Distance.
TAKE OFF ANGLE
The rise over the run is a field expedient method of determining your take off angle if you do not have your chart.
Example; a 900 mile ‘communications-shot’ would have an approximate T/O angle of 19 deg.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 147
14 % off - center-fed
Characteristics: ¼ Wave Slant Vertically polarized (some hor. off side) End - Fed Max direction of radiation along counter poise Radiating element angles 30 -60 Degrees Adjust take - off angle by adjusting radiating element Feed point impedance Approx. 50 -70 Ω
Distance offset from center to feed a ½ λ 14% off-center fed antenna for 24.975 MHz
STEP 1: Use ½ λ Formula to determine length of antenna 468 ÷ 24.975 = 18.74 .7 x 12 = 8.4 (18’ 8”) 18’ 8” ÷ 2 = 9’ 4 “
STEP 2: Multiply answer by 18.74 x .14 = 2.62’ from center of antenna. .62 X 12 = 7.44” Answer: 2’ 7”
Multi-element array (YAGI)
Formula: ¼λ Feed Point Impedance: 50-75Ω Uni-directional Minimum Height: ¼λ Takeoff Angle: Orient on takeoff angle Can add reflectors & directors
Element spacing:
• Reflector - 10 % longer than radiating element - 22 % spacing (approx.)
• Director - 10 % shorter than radiating element - 22 % spacing (approx.)
• Spacing may vary depending on number of elements used and desired effect (gain & directivity)
Parasitic Element means that it is insulated for the radiating (driven) element. Reflectors and directors are not xxx not connected to the radiating element. Multiple directors insulated from the radiating element.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 148
Characteristics: ½ λ Inverted L Antenna
Formula: ¼λ & ½λ Frequency range: Less than 2:1 over design frequency Polarization: Vertical from vertical section Horizontal from horizontal section Power capability: 1,000 watts Azimuthal (bearing): Omni directional Vertically/Horizontally polarized Broadside / Bi-directional Minimum height above ground is ¼ wavelengths Feed point impedance approx. 400 -600 Ω
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 149
Full wave closed loop
Characteristics: Full wave closed loop
Center-fed (location of feed point determines polarization). Max direction of radiations is broadside/vertical based on plane of antenna. Minimum height above ground is ¼ wavelengths (246/Frequency MHz). Adjust take off angle by adjusting height above ground/plane of antenna. Feed point impedance approx. 200 Ω.
Length of each side of a square full wave (23.225 MHz).
STEP 1: Divide 1005 by 23.225 ANSWER: 43’ 4’’
STEP 2: Divide answer by 4 for length of each side Divide answer by 3 for length of each side ANSWER: 10’ 10” ANSWER: 14’ 4”
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 150
Long wire
Horizontal long-wire antennas are at least one wavelength long, end fed, and more directional than half-wavelength antennas. The gain and directivity of long-wire antennas are dependent on the number of wavelengths that the antenna is constructed to. The more wavelengths, the higher the gain and more directives it is.
Multi-wave long wire w/resistor
1. The 400-600 ohm resistor does not give the antenna more db gain, it only eliminates the rear signal path (radiation lobe). The gain in a Long-wire is solely a function of antenna length; the antenna length determines take off angle. 2. Increases of ½ λ keeps the antenna resonant. 3. Best constructed no less than 2 λ.
However, long-wire antennas require a larger area and more materials for construction. (Lots of wire; 300 / 400 ft)
HAM radio operators refer to this antenna as a "beverage antenna". Again it is at least one wavelength long but must be cut in multiples of half wavelengths (i.e., 2 1/2 wavelengths).
1. The antenna is erected parallel to the ground in the direction of the receiving station at a height of 10 to 20 feet. 2. The radiation pattern is bidirectional and "off the end," but is variable from approximately 54 to 16 degrees, depending on the number of wavelengths. (From 1 wavelength to 8 l‘s) The more wavelengths, the lower the angle. (take-off angle) 3. To make the antenna unidirectional, a 400- to 600-ohm carbon resistor is attached to the end toward the direction of desired transmission. The radio is then grounded, as is the resistor, in the same manner as the vertical half-rhombic. 4. This antenna has a gain that is also variable, depending on the number of wavelengths. The more wavelengths, the higher the gain. ** (To get any use, usually 2 l‘s or more) 5. This antenna is used for long-range HF communications.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 151
Characteristics: Multi -Wavelength Long Wire Antenna
Frequency range: 2 to 30 MHz Polarization: Vertical Power capability: 1,000 watts Azimuthal (bearing): Uni-directional with terminating resistor Bi-directional without terminating resistor Minimum height - above ground is 6 -12 feet Adjust take-off angle by adjusting number of wavelengths on wire or by changing the angle of the wire. Feed point impedance approx. 400 -600 Ω
Multi -Wavelength Long Wire Antenna without Resistor
Multi -Wavelength Long Wire Antenna with Resistor
MWLW FORMULA (FEET)
492 X (N -.05) / Frequency in MHz (N = Number of ½ Wavelengths)
EX. A 5 Wavelength antenna for 15.500 MHz
STEP ONE: 492 x (10 - .05) = 492 X 9.95 = 4895
STEP TWO: 4895 ÷ 15.500 = 315’10”
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 152
100' Vertical half-Rhombic Antenna (HF / VHF)
Characteristics: 100' Vertical Half-Rhombic
Frequency range: 2 to 90 MHz Polarization: Vertical Power capability: Determined by terminating resistor Radiation pattern Azimuthal (bearing): Bi-Directional W/O resistor (Along axis of wire) Unidirectional W/Resistor (Along axis of wire) Line-of-sight/ground wave Feed point impedance approx. 400-600 Ω End-Fed Minimum Height: 30’ 1. The vertical half-rhombic is the description of a shape for a type of Longwire antenna. 2. It can be constructed in the HF/VHF frequency range and be either terminated or un- terminated. 3. It is raised in the center to lower the maximum lobe of radiation (take-off angle) if there is not enough wire for a proper Long-wire antenna for the distance required.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 153
Sloping Vee Antenna
Frequency range: 3 to 30 MHz Polarization: Horizontal Power capability: Depends on terminating resistors Radiation pattern Azimuthal (bearing): Directional (20° either side of direction of radiation) Feed Point Impedance: 400-600Ω Uni-directional with resistor (Bi- without) Minimum Height: 30’ Takeoff Angle: Change height Angle between legs is based on range: 60° angle = < 1000 miles 45° angle = 1000 – 1500 miles 30° angle = > 1500 miles Standard lengths: 117’ and 234’
1. A long-range multi frequency antenna. 2. The terminating resistor will make the antenna non-resonant since it absorbs the reflected wave. 3. Built with radiating legs 117ft long; the resonate length of a 2 MHz freq. a. 234 / 2 MHz = 117 ft (lowest op freq) 4. Remember, more wire than frequency will usually work; the radio will compensate. 5. The long legs, high center point, and the focusing of the signal by the terminating resistors, create a long range signal path. 6. We have noted that, as antenna length is increased, the lobe of maximum radiation makes a more acute angle with the wire. Two such wires may be combined to form an angled “V” so that the main lobes from each wire will reinforce along a line bisecting the angle between the wires. This increase the “gain” and directivity, since the lobes in the other directions basically cancel out.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 154
Sloping wire
Frequency range: Depends on wire Length/configuration Polarization: Vertical Power capability: Determined by Terminating resistor Radiation pattern Azimuthal (bearing): Bidirectional for Unterminated Directional for Terminated
Length of wire is 117 Feet or 234 Feet Long.
Kailua Offset Antenna
Formula: 54 feet long overall, 18 feet tall 36 feet to right, 18 feet to left Feed Point Impedance: 450Ω Minimum Height: 18 feet Use: ALE (PRC 137F), 6.5 MHz – 28 MHz
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 155
AS-2259/GR
The AS-2259/GR antenna is designed to provide high-angle radiation (near vertical incidence) to permit short-range sky wave propagation over communication circuits ranging from 0 to 300 miles. The AS-2259/GR may be used with tactical HF radios that tune a 15-foot whip antenna such as the AN/GRC-193 or AN/MRC-138. Characteristics are:
Frequency range: 2 to 30 MHz Polarization: Horizontal and vertical simultaneously Power capability: 100 watts Radiation pattern: Azimuthal (bearing): Omnidirectional Vertical (take-off angle):
Types of Transmission Line
• You must know the feed point impedance of the antenna you are making a transmission line for. • The following matching techniques can be used to effectively match different types of common transmission lines to antennas. • You may not have the exact equipment or materials to construct a “kit bag” antenna.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 156
Expedient Matching – RF Choke:
Match Antenna: Half-wave (FPI=75Ω) With transmission line: Coaxial Cable (50-75Ω) Tape wraps to transmission line
Expedient Matching – Twisted Pair:
Match Antenna: Half-wave (FPI=75Ω) With transmission line: Twisted Pair (200Ω)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 157
Expedient Matching – Delta Match:
Match Antenna: Half-wave (FPI=75Ω) With transmission line: Twin Lead (300-450Ω) A (feet) = 123 / Frequency (MHz) 37.5 for Meters D (feet) = 148 / Frequency (MHz) 45.1 for Meters
A = 468 ÷ 17.500 MHz = 26.74 Feet .7 x 12 = 8.4 = 8 Inches A = 26 Feet and 8 Inches
B = 123 ÷ 17.500 MHz = 7.02 Feet
B = 7 Feet
C = 148 ÷ 17.500 MHz = 8.45 Feet .5 x 12 = 6.0 = 1 Inch C = 8 Feet and 1 Inch
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 158
• The length of transmission line (coax) is typically a limiting factor in the construction of your antenna. • Limit of about 50 ft. coaxial. (50 ft. math) (The ant kit you are issued won’t have that much) • Loss of energy in the transmission line will degrade the radiated signal. • This is called “Line Loss”.
SOF-230 HF Antenna Kit
Transformer: 9:1 Balun • Sloping V • Also used as a "switch" from coax to single wire • Typically end fed ants
Center Junction** (Trade name for a balun) • 75 ohm (matches coaxial cable) • Used for center fed dipoles: (Doublets, Inv V’s, etc)
The AV 2040-() is a foldable, man pack, high gain, UHF Satellite Communication (SATCOM) antenna designed for special missions where portability and high gain are required.
Frequency 240-400 MHz VSWR 1.5:1 Gain AV 2040-3 +7.0 dBic, 240-400 MHz AV 2040-2 +11.0 dBic, 240-318 MHz AV 2040-1 +9.0 dBic, 240-400 MHz Power handling 200 Watts CW Axial Ratio 3dB Weight 6.5 pounds Connector BNC Male Finish Black Military P/N (AV2040-3) NSN 5985-01-149-2576
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 159
The AV 2055-3 is the smallest, lightest and highest-gain foldable, antenna available. This man pack UHF Satellite Communication (SATCOM) antenna is designed for special missions where portability and high gain are required.
Frequency 240-318 MHz VSWR 1.5:1 Polarization Right Hand Circular Gain +10.5 dBi, 244-318 MHz Power handling 200 Watts CW Axial Ratio 3dB at half power points Weight 3.1 pounds Connector BNC Male Deployment time <1 Min Wind loading designed to withstand 80 MPH Temperature Operating: -54 to 250 degrees FahrenheitStorage: -54 to 250 degrees Fahrenheit Finish Black Military P/N NSN 5985-01-463-6558
X-Wing" High/Low Angle SATCOM Antenna (AV2090-4)
Frequency High Angle: 225-400MHz, Low Angle: 225-400MHz VSWR 1.5:1 High Angle, 3.0:1 Low Angle Polarization High Angle: Right Hand Circular, Low Angle: Vertical, Linear Gain High Angle: +8 dBic, Low Angle: +3.0 dBil Power Handling 200 Watts CW Axial Ratio 3 dB at half power points Weight 2.75 pounds Connector N Female, High Angle TNC Female, Low Angle Finish Black Mounting Fix Isolation 24 dB Min Qualification Mil Std 810 Military P/N NSN 5985-01-505-0548
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 160
The AV2091 "Egg-beater" is a UHF SATCOM Antenna that is ideal for high speed SATCOM-On-The-Move (SOTM) operations on vehicles. The AV 2091-2 can be used with most tactical Multi-Band, Multi-Mode Receivers (MBMMR), as well as all ground transceivers that accept 50 ohm antenna impedance. The AV 2091-2 is available in black and Desert Sand finish and has magnetic mount.
Frequency 243-318 MHz VSWR 1.5:1 max Polarization Right Hand Circular Gain +6 dBiC Power Handling 200 Watts Weight 2.8 lbs. Connector N Female Finish Black or desert sand Mounting Magnetic Qualification Mil Std 810F
Antenna Troubleshooting
These are for receive to transmit, for transmit to transmit; separate by a minimum of 2 wavelengths.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 161
SWR Meter
The SWR can indicate problems with the antenna system, I.E. not resonant to the operating frequency or an open condition in the antenna system.
A good SWR reading is 1.5: 1 or better (perfect is 1:1)
If your SWR is 2: 1 or worse, you may need to re-adjust your antenna length (due to end effect), or trouble shoot your antenna system.
END Effect Resonant Antenna
End effect is when the antenna is electrically longer than its physical (calculated) length. This is because the voltage is not abruptly reflected back to its source (feed point) when it reaches the end of the wire.
The voltage will build up until it is too great and has nowhere to go before it is reflected back to its source (feed point)
So, we shorten our antenna approx. 5 percent off total length from our base calculation to compensate for this effect.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 162
Clandestine Antenna Considerations
There is no such thing as a pre-made clandestine antenna.
A clandestine antenna is nothing more than how well you can hide an antenna.
Some things to consider are:
• Type of communications net (SAT, HF, LOS, etc.) • Operating frequency • Frequency of contact • Direction to Base-Station • Power considerations, availability, reliability, and interference (fluctuation) • Rural or Urban environment • Select area in city closest to base station if possible. • Select room in building closest to base station. • Listen to frequency for possible intermodulation with surrounding signals. • Select best directional antenna.
Construct clandestine indoor antenna.
Select the most suitable indoor location at the site for the required transmission. • Select a building in a sector of the city towards the receiving station so transmitted signal will not be distorted or attenuated by other structures. Avoid industrial areas and areas where buildings are made of reinforced steel (skyscrapers). • Check the area around the building location for television and radio reception antennas to determine the possibility of interference with local reception of television and radio signals. Avoid areas with many rooftop antennas, high-tension power lines and heavy motor vehicle traffic. To detect such sources of interference, use a small AM transistor radio (with an earphone) set to the highest frequency. • Select as high a floor as possible within the chosen building so other close buildings do not interfere with transmitted signal. Install antenna on the side of the building in the direction of transmission if possible. • Check local available power for adequacy of voltage, current, and frequency requirements. Power sources must be sufficient enough to preclude fluctuation in other areas of the neighborhood or building when transmitting. • Check walls and ceiling of the room for reinforcing bars or beams, metal lathe plaster, or any substance that conducts electricity. Hold the compass close to the walls and ceiling to detect metallic objects. This procedure, however, will not detect nonmagnetic metal, so a thorough inspection must be made. • Use the radio receiver to check for local reception interference from faulty wiring, fluorescent lights, and other sources. • Determine if the noise created by the radio station will be detected by nearby rooms or passersby. • Determine the bearing to the receiving station in relation to the layout of the room.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 163
Install antenna:
• Determine the length of the antenna for frequency used, and use the appropriate formula for ¼ λ , ½ λ , or full wavelength antenna. • Depending on which antenna you choose, if you must alter the antenna to fit in a confined space, ensure you adjust each side of the antenna to keep it symmetrical. • Measure and adjust antenna wire to a tolerance of 2 inches. • Attach antenna to wall resulting in closest azimuth to receiving station.
Clandestine Outdoor Antennas:
• Determine if the radio station is to permanent and operated from inside a structure or if the station is to be operated from the antenna site. • If the radio station is to be operated inside a structure, select a location as close as possible to the structure and one in which the transmission line will not be discovered during operation by passersby or damaged by vehicular traffic. • Check area around location for television and radio reception antennas to determine the possibility of interference with local reception of television and radio signals. Avoid areas with many rooftop antennas (if tactically possible). • Check the area of the location for local causes of reception interference, such as heavy motor vehicle traffic or high-tension power lines. • If using local power, check for adequate voltage, current, and frequency requirements. • Determine the azimuth / bearing to the receiving station in relation to the layout of the location. • Check for metal obstructions that may cause distortion in radiated signal. • Check the location for adequate horizontal clearance in the direction of transmission in relation to the required transmission angle. The horizon, whether it is from terrain or buildings, should be no more than one-half the transmission angle. • Check the location for a means to conceal or disguise the antenna and transmission line from view and a means to support the antenna, such as exterior steps made of wood, guy wires for signs, rain gutters, or clotheslines. • Check the concealment of the antenna and transmission line from different angles in the area.
Some things to consider are:
• Rural or urban environment • Select area in city (building) closest to receive station (base station / FOB) if possible. • Select room in building closest to base station. • Listen to frequency for possible intermodulation with surrounding signal. • Select best directional antenna
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 164
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 165
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 166
HF RADIO AN/PRC-137F SMRS (Special mission Radio system)
Planning range: 6250 Miles/10,000Km
CLOCK TIME: Internal clock is powered by external battery (4x AA). GPS provides time for base/operator input for outstation. 2 minute error WWV, radio Canada, Internet, GPS 1 minute time slots “Probes” each minute looking for outstations
MESSAGE AN/PRC-137 holds a total of 40 messages. CAPACITY Message capacity: 256k Maximum message size (ALE) 60 kb, HDR 23Kb, AHFN 3Kb Message Precedence: Normal or High or Flash Normally 1 message per contact Using MoVer software can combine messages.
Components: Carry bag RT-137F and battery box (eliminator) RT-2018 Digital Message Device (DMD) (Laptop Computer) Computer Interface Cable DMD battery adapter J92 adapter Antenna Kit
LPI: Low probability of interception - (LPI): RT uses the lowest possible power.
LPD (ALE): Low Probability of Detection (LPD) - RT hides its signal in the normal background noise of the frequency
Capabilities: "Sleep" function in ALE mode Autonomous communications Automated frequency management Frequency management (ALE) Automatic Link E Can receive an Over the Air ReKey (OTAR) Operator scheduled wake times One minute EPOCHS (contact time) Must do a NET ENTRY prior to sending and receiving ALE messages 100 preset channels of which 4 can be used without DMD attached to radio
SIZE: 100 cu in. 130.5 cu in with battery.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 167
WEIGHT: 10.70 LBS. (+/-) with battery pack. 6.0 LBS.
POWER: BA 5590 Battery/Rechargeable 590/490. Last 60-90 day in ALE at 5 contacts per day. Internal 3-5 year COMSEC battery which holds keys until zeroized.
RF POWER: Output (100 mW TO 10 W).
INTERFACES: Issued computer device uses windows XP or windows 7
ANTENNA: Automatic tuning of whips, long or short wires, NVIS, Virtually anything.
FREQUENCY: 2 to 60 MHz General Coverage. (Upgrade to 512MHz) 2 to 30 MHz Operational Coverage VHF: 30-60 MHz VHF/UHF: 225-420 MHz.
Operating Modes: SOF ALE MIL STD ALE SC (CT & PT) in USB, LSB, AME, FM, CW
SECURITY: Password and tamper proof features a. Password protected (can’t access the radio until correct password is entered) b. Tamper Proof: When OS integrity is broken, unit will zeroize completely. c. Over The Air Zeroize (OTAZ). d. Manual zero by operator.
Crypto keys: KEK - Key Encryption Key (Unwrapping Only) FILL XXPRC137 TSK - Transmission Security Key (Generate TRANSEC Data) FILE XXINIT TEK - Traffic Encryption Key -Included in INIT File. Used for radio operation -Two TEK (network keys) Downloaded from base during Net-Entry. These TEK’s are used for every time. Decrypting MSG traffic.
Battery Box: 4 ea. AA batteries to maintain radio time Solid RED LED means radio is not receiving power. (5590 or 2590 below 21%) Flashing RED LED means AA batteries need to be changed (ribbed BB only) Non-Ribbed BB you must detach from radio and press button to check status
Green Led on Radio: Rapid flash: (COMSEC fault - No crypto in radio.) Solid On: (Radio is transmitting a message) Slow Flash: (Receiving or impending message) Single flash: (Successful fill) crypto loaded Bad HUB: (Flashes rapidly, then slow 4 or 5. Return to EMS)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 168
Radio Components:
Crypto Rules for ALE
1. Must use SKL 2. Must use DS101 protocol to load ALE keys (Initialize radio). 3. Must set correct DTG prior to loading ALE Comsec. 4. Must load XXPRC137. 5. Must load XXINIT.
Crypto Rules for Interop
1. Must utilize DS-102 and KOI-18 emulation to fill the keys when using the SKL to load PRC-137. 2. Secure Digital Voice in the VHF range (30-60 MHz) use KY57. 3. Secure Digital Voice in the HF range (2-29.999 MHz) use KY99. 4. Turn Digital Voice off prior to switching back to ALE.
Modular Version Software (MoVer)
MoVer Capabilities
1. One computer can control any number of devices – limited only by the physical connections available. 2. Both Peer-to-Peer and Hub-and-Spoke networks can be accommodated. 3. MoVer can deliver a message to a recipient up to 10 hops away from sender, using any combination of supported devices. 4. MoVer will find a route to any recipient in the Network; the user doesn’t have to know how to route the message. 5. Large messages can be split for TX and reassembled after RX. 6. Multiple small messages can be combined for TX in a single burst. MoVer will separate them for delivery after RX. 7. MoVer evaluates multiple compression algorithms for each message, selecting the method that produces the smallest compressed message size. 8. MoVer networks are fully scalable.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 169
Startup procedure for HF ALE Radio: 1. Connect power source to radio. 2. Turn radio to OFF. 3. Turn radio to Channel 1, 2, 3 or 4. (flashing Green light) 4. Randomize the radio. (Green light stop flashing and starts back up) 5. Connect the interface cable that goes between the radio (Red Dot Connector) and the computer. Computer: 1. Connect power source to computer. 2. Attach interface cable to computer 3. Turn on computer. 4. Open MoVer software. 5. Select MoVer > Setup Local Alias: xxxxxxxx , Select OK Are you 100% sure? Yes / No Are you 100% sure? Yes / No 6. Drag the icon of the radio you want to initialize down to the domain icon and release. 7. Pick Comm Port 1 , Select OK 8. Click on the radio icon and select Open. 9. Click on Toolbox 10. Click on Initialize 11. The Initialize wizard opens. Ensure radio is in channel 1-4 and click next. 12. At the Date/Time screen set the correct date and ZULU time. Press Next 13. At the Parameters screen select parameters file to update. Select OSARAMS.dat, Press Next 14. Configure the radio’s frequency settings. Select HF UHF FIXED, Press Next 15. Wake Interval select: (5, 15, 30 Minutes, 1, 4 Hours) ALE Group select: (1 -25) (must match the base-station) Advanced Operation: Check Adaptive Power Control Check Standby Mode Press Next 16. Enter the base station you with to communicate with. Base UID xxxxxxxx Base’s Alias xxxxxx Press Next 17. Move the radio’s switch to the “FILL” position, load keys, and then click “Next” a. Disconnect interface cable and connect fill cable to Red Dot Connector. b. Fill radio with COMSEC. c. Reconnect the interface cable to the Red Dot Connector and Press Next 18. Move the radio’s switch to a channel position CH1-CH4 and. Press Next 19. Before moving switch to network insure an antenna is connected. X Move switch to NETWORK Position, The radio has now been initialized! Press Finish
Wait for a Net Entry (shouldn’t take longer the 15 min.) Note: Make sure the radio enters the tuning mode. If it doesn’t, switch the mode selector switch to the “OFF” position back to a “Channel” position then to “Network”. If this fails to start the Tuner, click on the Antenna health Status area and click on the “Tune” button. Cycle the mode selector switch to the OFF, Channel and Network positions until the radio enters the tuning mode.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 170
Startup procedure for HF/ FM Voice Radio: 1. Connect power source to radio. 2. Turn radio to OFF. 3. Turn radio to Channel 1, 2, 3 or 4. 4. Randomize the radio. 5. Connect the interface cable that goes between the radio (Red Dot Connector) and the computer. Computer: 1. Connect power source to computer. 2. Turn on computer. 3. Open MoVer software. 4. Select MoVer > Setup Local Alias: xxxxxxxx , Select OK Are you 100% sure? Yes / No Are you 100% sure? Yes / No 5. Drag the icon of the radio you want to initialize down to the domain icon and release. 6. Pick Comm Port 1 , Select OK 7. Click on radio Icon and select Open. 8. Select Interop.
Channel: 1-4 Frequency: RX xxx.xxx MHz TX xxx.xxx MHz Simplex or Half Duplex Press Submit Modem: Type: OFF, FSK-A, FSK-W, FSK-NS, 39 TONE
Power: Adjust Power….
Message: Create… (Not Used)
Mode: USB, LSB, AME, FM, CW
Advanced: Bandwidth: 2.7 kHz FM Dev 8.0 kHz Squelch: 0 Squelch OFF, RF Gain: 100 RF Gain: 100 AGC: Slow AGC: Fast
Digital Voice: OFF, KY99 (HF) KY57 (VHF),
Volume: Min – Max Warning: Digital Voice Is ON! 9. Connect Handset.
Digital Voice Mode must be turned OFF before switching to Network Position! Failure to do so may LOCK UP THE RADIO making it inoperative!
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 171
UHF Initialization Procedures Note: In Mover to do UHF the RT must have the UHF slice connected. Radio: 1. Connect power source to radio. 2. Turn radio to OFF. 3. Turn radio to Channel 1, 2, 3 or 4. 4. Randomize the radio. 5. Connect the interface cable that goes between the radio (Red Dot Connector) and the computer. Computer: 1. Connect power source to computer. 2. Turn on computer. 3. Open MoVer software. 4. Select MoVer > Setup Local Alias: xxxxxxxx , Select OK Are you 100% sure? Yes / No Are you 100% sure? Yes / No 5. Drag the icon of the radio you want to initialize down to the domain icon and release. 6. Pick Comm Port 1 , Select OK 7. Right-click on the radio icon and select Initialize. 8. Radio to channel 1, Press Next 9. At the Date/Time screen set the correct date and ZULU time. Press Next 10. At the Parameters screen select parameters file to update. Select OSPARAMS.dat, Press Next 11. Configure the radio’s frequency settings. Select: HF UHF FIXED, Press Next a. Uplink/Downlink1- 4 b. Frequency Uplink xxx.xxx MHz Downlink xxx.xxx MHz c. Transponder: 0-255 d. Offset 25 kHz – 0 Hz or 5 kHz – 0Hz e. Press Next f. Wake Interval: (15, 30 Minutes, 1, 4 Hours) Advanced Operation: Check Adaptive Power Control Check Standby Mode Press Next 12. Enter the base station you with to communicate with. ID xxxxxxxx Base’s Alias xxxxxx Press Next 13. Move the radio’s switch to the “FILL” position, load keys, and then click “Next” 14. Disconnect interface cable and connect fill cable to Red Dot Connection. 15. Fill radio. 16. Reconnect the interface cable to the Red Dot Connector and Press Next 17. Move the radio’s switch to a channel position CH1-CH4 and then click “Next”. Press Next 18. Before moving switch to network insure an antenna is connected.
X Move switch to NETWORK Position, The radio has now been initialized! Press Cancel
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 172
Zeroizing the Radio
Select channel 1
Select MoVer > Zeroize
Select Components to Zeroize System Items: Select ALL Connected Devices: Select ALL Press OK
Move Switch to a Channel Position (CH1-CH4). Press Next
Choose one of the following options. Hard: “Soft” + keys + epoch history. Soft: messages + black keys + roster. Press Next
Move the radio’s switch to the Z position (Zeroize), then press the radio’s detent button and wait……
Clicking “Finish” will remove Zeroized Radio from the canvas. Press Finish
Remove power from Radio
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 173
Operate PSC-5 using MoVer Software
1. Setup PSC-5 and Antenna as per SOI. 2. Ensure PSC-5 is set to the data mode. 3. Ensure Modem is turned to ADM-P01. 4. Connect PSC-5 data cable to the Serial Port. 5. Click on the MoVer icon on the desktop. 6. Click on MoVer in the main menu and select Setup. 7. Click on the Aliases tab and fill in your alias. 8. Drag the PSC-5 Icon down to the domain icon and release. 9. Select line number. (This is your ADC address from SOI). 10. Select Net ID. (See SOI) 11. Select COM port. 12. Click on PSC-5 icon and select the “Setup” tab and make changes as necessary. (See SOI) 13. Send/Receive Email to same as HF ALE
AN/TRQ-43G Initialization procedures
Modular Version (MoVer) Base Station Setup
1. Click on the MoVer icon on the desktop. 2. Click on MoVer in the main menu and select Setup. 3. Click on the Aliases tab and fill in your alias. 4. Close the menu. 5. Drag the TRQ icon down to the domain icon and release. 6. Select proper serial port. 7. Click on the base icon and select Setup 8. Click on Toolbox and Initialize. 9. In the Initialization Wizard Screen click the Next button. 10. Follow initialization wizard instructions.
Load crypto when directed to.
11. Reconnect the interface cable to the RED DOT connector and rotate mode selector switch to channel 1, 2, 3 or 4. 12. MoVer will verify you have the crypto loaded. Follow the instructions on the pop-up screens. 13. When directed, rotate the mode selector switch to the network position. 14. On the Main Menu click Toggle View. Open up Outlook and send your traffic.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 174
Converting AN/PRC-137 to Base station Operations
1. Randomize radio, connect interface cable and open up MoVer 2. Drag the TRQ-43 (Base) icon to the canvas and release. 3. Click on the icon and select “open” 4. Click on the Toolbox tab and click on the Initialization button. 5. Proceed with initialization in the same manner as the TRQ-43. 6. Return mode selector switch to network position.
You MUST use a broadband antenna (AS-2259/GR or AS-2268 NVIS Antenna, B&W, etc.) when this radio is operated in a base station configuration.
MoVer Base Station LAN E-Mail Setup
Requirements:
Install E-Mail Server
(Must be met before completing the steps outlined below)
- PC Running MoVer must be “join” to the domain running the mail server, or in a workgroup authorized to access domain resources (the mail sever) - Determine “Alias” names for all outstations (maximum 8 characters) - Determine “Usernames” for all outstations and MoVer base station. - Determine “Passwords” for all user accounts.
Note: Ensure passwords meet minimum security (complexity) requirements. Check with your LAN administrator.
- If using Exchange mail server, POP protocol enabled at the server.
1. Click “Manage” > ”Devices” > “Internet” Tab a. Click and drag “MAIL Server” icon to the Canvas (“Mail Server Configuration” window will appear) b. In the “Domain Name” field – enter the “E-Mail” domain name. (do not use the FQDN of the e-mail server) (example: Example.smil.mil, not “mailserver.smil.mil” MoVer will use this entry to “auto-append” email addresses later when a user “double-clicks” the Base station’s alias to send an e-mail. c. In the “Server Settings” fields – enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name (DNS Name) of the SMTP/POP mail server. If known, the applicable IP address can also be used. d. Enter the appropriate ports, if other than default. (POP – 100; SMTP -25) e. Enter incoming and Timer settings as appropriate.
2. Click “OK”
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 175
Create User Accounts
1. Provide the list of Username and Passwords to the mail server administrator. (If using Exchange, ensure POP is also enabled at this time.)
2. Click “Manage” > “Users” > “New” (note. This step is not required if the MoVer base station administrator wishes to wait until the outstation obtains a net entry and transmits a message – doing so will allow MoVer to “auto-capture” the username.)
a. Enter username. i. For outstations – DO NOT select query mailbox or select an ALIAS until the user accounts are created and enabled at the mail server and the outstation has obtained a net entry at the base station. ii. For the Base Station account – click the “Load alias” radio button and “query mailbox” 1. Enter username and password
b. Once the outstation has obtained a net entry, select the username and click “modify”. i. Click the “selected alias” radio button and select the appropriate outstation ALIAS. ii. Click the “QUERY MAIL” radio button. (Username and password fields will appear)(note: The user account MUST be created and enabled at the mail server before completing this step) iii. Click “OK”
c. Repeat step (1) for each outstation user.
Warning: if the user accounts are created and POP enabled before the mail server is configured, the MoVer POP service may fail download mail from the mail sever. To correct this error, right click the “mail server” component on the Mover canvas and click ‘remove’. Drag the MAIL icon back onto the canvas and re- install the mail interface. Doing so will reset and the service and mail messages should begin to flow. If the problem continues, double-check ALL settings, usernames and passwords.
Troubleshooting
Device will not open on desktop canvas 1. Check interface cable connections. 2. Check mode selector switch position. 3. Clean connector pins. 4. Check for other programs using the same conn port setting. 5. Remove the device from the canvas, stop the service. Open the program and drag the device back onto the canvas.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 176
Outstation does not do a net entry within 15 minutes.
1. Check for correct DTG and UID 2. Re-upload parameters and reset base ID 3. Turn radio Off 4. Check for signal strength readings. 5. Check antenna connections 6. Check coax 7. Check Battery
Radio does not tune.
1. Cycle mode selector switch from off to a channel position to Network. 2. Click on the antenna status area and click on the tune button. Cycle node selector switch from off to a channel position to Network until radio starts tuning cycle.
No power to the radio.
1. Check/replace BA5590 2. Check current flow from battery. 3. Replace battery eliminator
Radio in continuous 12 second time elapse
1. Go to terminal screen and type NSYNC and press enter 2. Turn radio off then back to network. Listen for tune.
TRQ-43G showing 10 watt amplifiers.
1. Rotate mode selector switch to a channel position 2. In the terminal screen type PA 3. Rotate mode selector switch to the off position and back to a channel position. 4. Mode settings should show PA125 VHF
Note: When changing base stations during operations, NEVER type over a previous UID. ALWAYS use the next available line.
If not connected within 15 minutes: Do MAST, re upload parameters, Wait another 10 Minutes, Zeroize/re initialize radio
MAST
M = Messages A = Antenna S = Settings T = Time
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 177
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 178
AN/PRC-137H SMRS
Software Version 1.16.36
Planning range: 6250 Miles/10,000Km
CLOCK TIME: Battery Eliminator using super capacitors powers internal clock. GPS provides time for base station and outstation. 2-minute error
MESSAGE CAPACITY: Message capacity: 256kb Maximum message size (ALE) AHFN: 3Kb, HDR: 23Kb Message Precedence: Normal, High and Flash Multiple attachments can be placed on a single message.
Components: Carry bag RT-2018(P)(C)/U Digital Message Device (DMD) (Laptop Computer) Computer Interface Cable DMD battery adapter J92 adapter External GPS antenna Antenna Kit
LPI: Low probability of interception - (LPI): RT uses the lowest possible power.
LPD (ALE): Low Probability of Detection (LPD) - RT hides its signal in the normal background noise of the frequency
Capabilities: "Sleep" function in ALE mode Autonomous communications Automated frequency management Frequency management (ALE) Can receive an Over the Air Rekey (OTAR) 20 sec EPOCHS (contact time) Must do a NET ENTRY prior to sending and receiving ALE messages Interop mode provides100 preset channels of which 4 can be used without DMD attached to radio
SIZE: Height: 1.8”, Width: 8.8”, Length: 8.8”
WEIGHT: 6.5 LBS.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 179
POWER: BA 5590 Battery/Rechargeable 590/490. Internal Hold Up Battery (HUB): Holds keys when radio loses main battery power. When radio is zeroed properly the HUB battery could last up to 2 years.
RF POWER: Output (100 Mw TO 10 W).
INTERFACES: Issued computer device uses windows XP or windows 7
ANTENNA: Automatic tuning of whips, long or short wires, NVIS, Virtually any conductive item.
FREQUENCY: HF: 2-30 MHz VHF: 30-60 MHz VHF/UHF: 225-420 MHz
Operating Modes: SOF ALE SC (CT & PT) in FM SC (PT only) in USB, LSB, AME and CW
SECURITY: Password and tamper proof features: a. Not password protected. b. Tamper Proof: When OS integrity is broken, unit will Zeroize completely. c. Over The Air Zeroize (OTAZ). Initiated from Base Station. d. Manual zero by operator.
Crypto keys: TRK - (Unwrapping Only): XX-PR137 KEK - Key Encryption Key: XXINIT TSK - Transmission Security Key (Generate TRANSEC Data) XXINIT NETEK - Net entry Traffic Encryption Key (Initial radio key for net entry). Contained in the XXINIT File. NTEK- Traffic Encryption Key (XXNETWK 00A/B for Base Station only) - Used for radio secure operations (NTEK). -Two NTEK (network keys) Downloaded from base during Net-Entry. These NTEK’s are used to encrypt and decrypt MSG traffic.
Battery Eliminator: Power controlled by super capacitors. Fully charged will provide 2 to 3 days of holding time (only) in radio when main power is removed from the radio.
Green Led on Radio: Rapid flash: (COMSEC fault - No crypto in radio.) Solid On: (Radio is transmitting a message) Slow Flash: (Receiving or impending message) Single flash: (Successful fill) Bad HUB: (Flashes rapidly, then slow. Return to EMS)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 180
Radio Components:
1. Battery Eliminator: Maintains radio time. 2. “Zero” Detent Button: Used during the Zeroizing Procedure. 3. Green LED: Displays certain Radio status conditions. 4. Red Dot Connector: Used for Secure operations. (Interfacing with DMED, Loading Crypto and Secure Voice). 5. White Dot Connector: Used for non-secure operations. (Plain Text Voice and connecting external crypto devices). 6. Internal GPS Antenna: Used to acquire accurate GMT. 7. Antenna Binding Post. (Ground) 8. Antenna Binding Post. (Positive) 9. Satellite Antenna Port. (BNC) 10. Mode Selector Switch.
Crypto Rules for ALE
1. Use SKL/CYZ-10 2. Use DS101 protocol to load ALE keys (Initialize radio). 3. Must set correct DTG prior to loading ALE Crypto. 4. Load XXPRC137. 5. Load XXINIT. 6. Load NETWORK A/B. (Base station only)
Crypto Rules for Interop
1. Must utilize DS-102 and KOI-18 emulation to fill the keys when using the SKL/CYZ-10 to load PRC-137. 2. Secure Digital Voice in the VHF/FM range (30-60 MHz) use CVSD/KY57. 3. Secure Digital Voice in the VHF/UHF: (225 -420 MHz) use CVSD/KY57
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 181
Install and Operate the RT-2018 (P)(C)/U (outstation)
Radio: 1. Connect power source to radio. 2. Turn radio to Channel 1. (Radio will not initialize from CH 2, 3 and 4). 3. Randomize the radio. (Connect handset to the Red Dot Connector). While observing the flashing green LED key the handset. The LED will momentarily stop flashing then resume flashing. Radio is now randomized. 4.Connect the interface cable that goes between the radio (Red Dot Connector) and the computer. Computer: 1. Connect power source to computer. 2. Attach interface cable to computer. (Serial/USB) 3. Turn on computer. 4. Open the MoVer7 software. 5. “Radio Status”: Click “cancel”. 6. Select the “Options” tab. 7. From the Options screen select appropriate COM PORT. Connection to radio will be established.
Initialize Radio 1. Open the Options Tab. 2. Click on Initialization Wizard. 3. Initialization wizard: a step-by-step initialization process, click next. 4. Select Radio Type: Choose OUTSTATION. 5. Radio will go through the process of updating parameters to Radio. 6. Enter Station Name: Input the outstation alias (1-8 characters, no spaces) and click next. 7. Enter Date/Time: Ensure the Date/Time is within two minutes of the basestation/GMT. 8. Turn GPS on: Select to use GPS time. (Outdoors only) 9. Send Position with messages: The RT’s 10 digit Grid will be included in outgoing messages. 10. Enter the Base station UID and Alias (if known). Click Next. 11. Set Adaptive Power Control: Ensure the block is checked and click next. 12. Save Parameters to file: Select save now or skip save. 13. Place radio switch into the “fill” position (Green LED should no longer be flashing) and load crypto. 14. After successful crypto load (wait for LED to stop flashing), reconnect interface cable and move selector switch to CH 1 and click next. 15. Ensure antenna is connected and move radio to Network position. 16. Listen for Radio to tune*. 17. Radio has been initialized: Press OK.
Note: Make sure the radio enters the tuning mode. If it doesn’t, switch the mode selector switch to the “OFF” position then back to a “Channel” position then to “Network”. Cycle the mode selector switch to the OFF, Channel and Network positions until the radio enters the tuning mode.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 182
Perform Net-Entry
1. After successful initialization and tuning of the antenna, the RT should perform a Net-Entry within 15 minutes. 2. To verify Net-Entry press the “status” button. 3. When Net-Entry is complete the Crypto Status will show “Ready”. Crypto status appears under “Network Status”. If crypto status displays “Initialized” the radio does not have a Net-Entry. 4. The active Basestation Alias, UID and last contact time will be shown under “Remote Status List”. 5. This completes the Net-Entry process and the outstation can now send/receive message traffic with the base.
Create a New Message
1. RT must have a net-entry before message traffic can be sent/received. 2. From any screen within the Mover Suite click on the “Create New Message” button. 3. To Address: By default messages will be automatically transmitted to the active base-station. Input of the to address is not required. To send to another station on the network click on the plus sign and select the address of the desired recipient (address list is required). (Addressee can also be manually inputted by typing it, i.e. [email protected]) 4. Priority: Select the desired message priority: a. Normal: Messages will cue up in order sent to radio. b. High: Messages will go to the front of the cue. c. Flash: 200-character limit, no attachments. Emergency use only 5. Use HDR Waveform: Selecting HDR will increase msg transmission speeds assuming an efficient antenna is being utilized. Under HDR the RT loses its LPI/LPD protection. (High link margin is required). 6. If HDR is not selected the RT will use default transmission speeds with full LPI/LPD protection. 7. Subject: Self explanatory 8. Message: Input the body of the message. If sending a msg to another outstation then “T
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 183
Convert Outstation to Base station
Radio:
1. Connect power source to radio. (Running as a Base station the RT will consume considerably more batteries than the Outstation). 2. Turn radio to OFF. 3. Turn radio to Channel 1. (Radio will not initialize from CH 2, 3 and 4). 4. Randomize the radio. 5. Connect the interface cable that goes between the radio (Red Dot Connector) and the computer.
Computer:
1. Connect power source to computer. 2. Attach interface cable to computer. (Serial/USB) 3. Turn on computer. 4. Open MoVer7 Suite software. 5. “Radio Status” will open, click “cancel”. 6. Select the “Options” tab. 7. From the Options screen select appropriate com port. Connection to radio will be established. 8. Click on Initialization Wizard. 9. Initialization wizard will allow a step-by-step initialization process, click next. 10. Select Radio Type: Choose Base station. Click next. 11. Radio will go through the process of updating parameters to Radio. 12. Select ”Single Site” 13. Enter Station Name: Input the outstation alias (1-8 characters, no spaces) and click next. 14. Enter Date/Time: Ensure the Date/Time is accurate; all outstations must be within two minutes of the Base. 15. Use GPS time: Check to use GPS antenna (preferred), leave unchecked for manual time. Click Next. 16. Amplifier Power Gain: Adjust gain as required. By default gain will be 125 Watts. Click next. 17. Save Parameters to file: Select save now or skip save. 18. Place radio switch into the “fill” position and load crypto. (In addition to outstation crypto the Base must also be loaded with the Network Keys). 19. After successful crypto load, reconnect interface cable and move selector switch to CH 1 and click next. 20. Ensure (Broadband) antenna is connected and move radio to Network position. 21. Radio has been initialized: Click next.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 184
Interoperability (Interop)
1. Modulation Modes:
a. USB: 1.6 MHz to 30 MHz b. LSB: 1.6 MHz to 30 MHz c. AME: 1.6 MHz to 30 MHz d. CW: 1.6 MHz to 30 MHz e. FM Voice: 20 MHz to 60 MHz 225 MHz to 420 MHz
2. Simplex or Half Duplex capable.
3. Plain text through white dot connector. (Changes to settings must be made through Red Port).
4. Cypher text through Red dot connector. (Must disconnect interface cable and connect Hand Set).
5. 100 Preset channels.
6. First 4 presets coincide with CH 1, 2, 3 and 4 of radio.
7. Radio will hold 4 Interop TEK’s.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 185
SETUP HF CLEAR VOICE
Radio:
1. Connect power source to radio. 2. Turn radio to OFF. 3. Turn radio to Channel 1, 2, 3 or 4. 4. Randomize the radio. 5. Connect the interface cable that goes between the radio (Red Dot Connector) and the computer.
Computer:
1. Connect power source to computer. 2. Turn on computer. 3. Attach interface cable to computer. 4. Open Mover 7 Suite software. 5. Enter com port. 6. Click on “status” button 7. Click the plus sign next to Interop configuration. 8. Press Edit. 9. NET: Select preset channel. 10. RX/TX Frequency: Enter desired frequencies in MHz 11. Power attenuation (dB): Select appropriate power level (0-40) 12. Volume: Select appropriate power level (0-12). 13. Digital Voice: Off (Clear). 14. Modulation type: Select USB/LSB. 15. Bandwidth (KHz): Select 2.7 16. Squelch Level: Select Desired Level. 17. AGC: Select Slow. 18. Press OK to save settings 19. Connect handset to white dot connector. 20. Establish voice communications.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 186
SETUP FM CLEAR/SECURE VOICE Radio:
4. Connect power source to radio. 5. Turn radio to OFF. 6. Turn radio to Channel 1, 2, 3 or 4. 7. Randomize the radio. 8. Connect the interface cable that goes between the radio (Red Dot Connector) and the computer.
Computer:
1. Connect power source to computer. 2. Turn on computer. 3. Attach interface cable to computer. 4. Open Mover 7 Suite software. 5. Enter com port. 6. Click on “status” button 7. Click the plus sign next to Interop configuration. 8. Press Edit. 9. NET: Select preset channel. 10. RX/TX Frequency: Enter desired frequencies in MHz 11. Power attenuation (dB): Select appropriate power level (0-40) 12. Volume: Select appropriate power level (0-12). 13. Digital Voice: Off (Clear), CVSD/KY57 (Secure) 14. Modulation type: Select FM. 15. FM Deviation (KHz): Select 8.0 16. FM Squelch: Select OFF/TONE/NOISE. (Normally Tone). 17. Press OK to save settings 18. For Secure communications load appropriate TEK IAW SKL procedures. 19. Connect handset to white dot connector (Clear), Red dot connector (Secure). 20. Establish voice communications.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 187
UHF (SATCOM) ALE Procedures
Not available at this time.
Zeroizing the Radio
1. Click on the Options Tab.
2. Click on Zeroize.
3. The Zeroize wizard will open, follow the steps for proper Zeroize.
4. Choose Soft or hard Zeroize. Hard for complete Zeroize.
5. Wizard will show as items are zeroized.
6. When prompted, move the switch to the Z position and press the gray detent button.
7. Select whether to leave comport open or closed.
8. Disconnect the RT from the main power source.
9. Once completed do not rotate the Mode Selector Switch out of “Z” or re-apply power to the radio. This will preserve the life of the HUB.
NOTE: Zero does not delete message traffic from the message folders. Operator must manually delete message traffic.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 188
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 189
AN/PRC-150
Frequency Range: 1.6 MHz to 59.999 MHz in 100Hz steps (.0001 MHz) 1.6 – 29.999 MHz (HF (USB)) 30.000 – 59.999 MHz (VHF (FM))
Mode of Operation: Fixed: PT & CT (also known as Single Channel) (Voice and Data (called TacChat) ALE: (with pre-programed frequency’s) (HF data system) Frequency Hop: (HF frequency’s 2.6 - 29.8 MHz) (HF Frequency's) 3G: (ALE 3rd generation)
200 channel presets: 000 – 199 (000 is the scratch channel)
Modulation types: SSB: Single Side Band (USB: Upper Side Band or LSB: Lower Side Band) CW: Continuous Wave (old school Morse code!) FM: (Frequency Modulation) AME: (Amp Mod Equivalent)
COMSEC: Type 1 (NSA) Vinson: (VHF/FM voice) (KY-57) ANDVT: (HF voice) (KY-99) KG84: (Data) KG84R, KG84NR Citadel (CC) Foreign / Allied armies may operate “secure” communications
3 power settings in HF: Low 1 watt Med 5 watts Hi 20 watts In the FM mode (30 – 60 MHz) the RT has an output of 10 watts.
Components: Man pack backpack (ruck)
The RT 1694D with Battery Box H250 handset Ground stake “kit”: Stake & Copper wire 6ft KDU extension cable Y-adapter assembly (boxy thing) ASYNC data cable Leg key
OE-505 Whip Antenna Kit (10372-0240-02) Components: Base Whip Adapter (10372-1260-01) Collapsible Whip (AT271A/PRC-25) Antenna Base (10372-0277) Antenna Bag (CW-503/PRC-25)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 190
1. GPS Interface connector J2 2. Audio connector J1 (six pin) 3. KDU (Keypad Display Unit) with Liquid crystal display (LCD) 4. Fill J18 (crypto six-pin; ANCD/SKL/KYK-13) 5. Antenna connector J7 (BNC type) 6. Grounding post (Whip base) 7. Accessory J6 (power amp) 8. Function switch OFF PT (plain text) CC (Citadel Cover, Coalition forces communications, requires depot level access) CT (Secure mode DOD type-1 Comsec) RV (Receive variable for OTARs) LD (load DOD type-1 crypto) Z (zeroize, pull to engage) 9. KDU (Keypad Display Unit) 0/ Circular arrow, alternate display 1/Call: Fix mode: initiate a hail ALE: initiate an ALE call FH: TX a reply to SYNC req 2/LT: Activates the backlight FCTN 3/MODE: Switches between ALE, HOP, FIX, & 3G 4/SQ: Squelch 5/Zero: Not used on the KDU CLR: Clear, abort function, terminate ALE ENT: Enter VOL: Volume PRE: Presets Menu arrows, cursor movement 10. Data connector 10-pin
INSTALLING THE RADIO
1. Ensure RT is off. 2. Install x2 batteries in battery box. (390’s, 590’s, 5590’s) 3. Single battery install on J11 connector (over HUB battery door), Second battery to J10 4. Attach Ant/base/adapt to RT. 5. Connect handset. 6. Detach KDU and connect with remote cable to unit. Note: Line up the white dots; push, do not xxx not turn.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 191
OPERATING THE RADIO Fixed (SC), Plain Text (PT), Cipher Text (CT), DATA, ALE
Power ON / Adjust displays
Rotate function switch PT Allow to cycle thru to MANUAL screen Press 2/LT: Bright (0-7) by pressing the 6/up or 9/down Press Right Arrow Contrast (20-100% Increment of 5 (6/up or 9/down) Press ENT Light Operation to (Momentary/Off) Press ENT
Radio Bit test
Press 7/OPT > Test – ENT> BIT – ENT> System – ENT> Test in progress>CLE 4time
Radio settings
Press 3/MODE (FIX, 3G, ALE, HOP) ENT
Zeroize radio
Rotate function switch PT to Z (zeroize complete) Rotate function switch Z to PT.
Programing Config Radio Function switch to PT 8/PGM Config – ENT Radio – ENT TX Power: (Low, Med, High) Squelch: (On, Off) Squelch Level: (Med, Low, High) FM Squelch Type: (Tone, Noise) FM squelch type TONE (150 Hz) Radio Silence: (Off, On) (prevents auto reply to LQA& ALE calls) Coupler (Internal): (Enabled, Bypassed) FM Deviation: (8.0 kHz, 6.5 kHz, 5.0 kHz,) CW Offset: (1000 Hz, 0) RX Noise Blanking: (OFF, On) Compression: (ON, Off) EXT 20W PA Coupler: (Disabled, Learn Tune, Memory Tune,) Radio Name: (No stations def.) Error Beeps: (Off, On)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 192
Then press 0 to change to frequency page.
Program PT Single Channels
USB (1.6 to 29.999 MHz) 8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT Channel – ENT Channel # to change - ### ENT RX Frequency: ##. #### MHz ENT TX Frequency: ##. #### MHz ENT Modulation: (USB, FM, CW, AME, LSB) ENT (Frequency Range 1.6 – 29.999 MHz) AGC Speed: (Med, Slow, Off, Auto, Data, Fast) ENT IF Bandwidth: (3.0, 2.7, 2.4, 2.0) kHz ENT RX Only: (No/ Yes) ENT Limit Max TX Power? (No/Yes) ENT Enable Hail TX: (No/Yes) ENT Enable SSB Scan: (No/Yes) ENT CLR
FM (30.000 to 59.999 MHz) 8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT Channel – ENT Channel # to change - ### ENT RX Frequency: ##. #### MHz ENT TX Frequency: ##. #### MHz ENT Modulation: (USB, FM, CW, AME, LSB) ENT (Frequency Range 30. to 60.000 MHz) RX Only: (No/ Yes) ENT Limit Max TX Power? (No/Yes) ENT Enable Hail TX: (No/Yes) ENT Enable SSB Scan: (No/Yes) ENT CLR
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 193
SYSTEM PRESET (FIX) Plain Text Voice 8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT System – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE01) – ENT Preset Name (XXXXXXX) – ENT Radio Mode: (FIX, 3G, ALE, HOP) – ENT Channel Number: (###) – ENT Modem Preset: (Off, MDM1-20) – ENT Encryption Type: (NONE = PT) (TYPE1= CT) (Citadel) – ENT PT Voice Mode: ME6-(Digital Voice (MELP 600bps) –1.6 to 29.999MHz– ENT CVSD – Continuously Variable Slope Delta (Digital voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz) AVS - (Analog Voice Security) –A voice scrambling features of Citadel COMSEC. Is not considered secure but does provide privacy. CLR – (analog voice) – No encryption DV24- (Digital Voice 2400bps) DV6 – (Digital Voice 600bps) ME24 – (Digital Voice (MELP 2400bps) NONE CC/CT Voice mode: ME6 – (Digital Voice for HF 1.6 to 29.999MHz – ENT CVSD – (Digital Voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz) DV24 DV6 ME24 NONE Enable: (Yes, No) – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE02)
Voice Modes DV6 - DV24 - ME24 - ME6 RT will auto select on DV & ME settings. CLR: (analog voice) CVSD: (digital voice for FM frequency) AVS: (analog voice security) ME6: on High Frequency will cause a delay and digitizing voice. Speak slow and clear.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 194
PROGRAM CT CHANNELS Fixed (SC)
The PRC-150 operates with the KDU as the CIK when in CT. The RT automatically initializes the CIK when crypto is loaded. Removing KDU is same as removing a CIK. Type I: NSA approved crypto. (I.e. TEKs, KEKs, TrKEKs) Citadel: Crypto for foreign / allied militaries. (CC) PRC-150 will hold twenty-five (25) TEKs, one (01) KEK, and one (01) TrKEK for each type of COMSEC. The three (3) types of COMSEC are: VINSON, ANDVT, & KG-84.
GUIDELINES
Fix (SC) operations: 1.6 to 29.99 MHz (HF, USB) PT CLR or DV ANDVT Comsec 30.00 to 59.99 MHz (VHF FM) PT CLR Vinson & CVSD
LOAD COMSEC
Rotate from OFF to LD. Fill Device: (KYK-13, D101, KOI-18, KYX-15) - ENT Crypto Type: Vinson - FM voice - ENT KG-84 - ANDVT - Key Type: (TEK, KEK, TrKEK) - ENT Key Number: (01-25) - ENT Press ENT to Initiate Fill - ENT Fill Done Press ENT - ENT More Fill Data? (Yes/No) - ENT Move Switch Out of LD Position Rotate function switch CT
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 195
SYSTEM PRESET (FIX) Cypher Text Voice
8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT System – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE01) – ENT Preset Name (XXXXXXX) – ENT Radio Mode: (FIX, 3G, ALE, HOP) – ENT Channel Number: (###) – ENT Modem Preset: (Off, MDM1-20) – ENT Encryption Type: (NONE = PT) (TYPE1= CT) (Citadel) – ENT Crypto Mode: ANDVT-BD (HF) (1.6-29.999 MHz), KG-84R, KG-84NR, ANDVT–HF, VINSON (FM) (30-59.999 MHz), Encryption Key: (XXX##) – ENT PT Voice Mode: ME6 – 1.6 to 29.999MHz – ENT CVSD - digital voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz AVS (analog voice security) CLR – (analog voice) DV24- DV6 ME24 NONE CC/CT Voice mode: ME6 – 1.6 to 29.999MHz – ENT CVSD - digital voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz DV24 DV6 ME24 NONE Enable: (Yes) – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE01)
ADDITIONAL This radio also has the ability to FH in the HF frequency range (02.00 - 30.00 MHz) ALE compatible with PRC-137* 3G: next generation ALE TAC CHAT: texting between radios
APPLICATION SF will retain the ability to conduct long range HF communications for alternate communications when SATCOM is unavailable. Colombia to USSOCOM (Florida) Rwanda to SOCEUR (Germany) The PRC-150 may be a primary radio system for that purpose.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 196
DATA Secured (Tactical Chat)
Preset Modem 8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT Modem – ENT Modem Preset to change – MDM1-20, – ENT Preset Name – ARQ – ENT Modem Type – ARQ, Serial, Mil110B, HFNET, FSK-W, FSK-V, FSK-N, FSK-A, AUTO – ENT Enable – (Yes – No) – ENT Modem Preset to Change: (MDM2) CLR
Data Self Address 8/PGM Mode – ENT ARQ – ENT Self_Addr – ENT ADD (XXXXXX) – ENT (Your Call sign)
Data Message Preset 8/PGM CONFIG - ENT Message – ENT Route modem Data to – RDP, DTE PORT, FILE, – ENT Route ARQ Data to – RDP, DTE PORT, FILE, – ENT Source Address: (XXXX) (Your Call sign) Destination Address: (XXXX) (Base station) Auto TX Type: (ARQ, NON-ARQ)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 197
8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT System – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE01) – ENT Preset Name (XXXXXXX) – ENT Radio Mode: (FIX, 3G, ALE, HOP) – ENT Channel Number: (###) – ENT Modem Preset: (Off, ARQ, MDM2-20) – ENT Encryption Type: (NONE = PT) (TYPE1= CT) (Citadel) – ENT Crypto Mode: KG-84R, KG-84NR, ANDVT–HF, ANDVT-BD (HF) (1.6-29.999 MHz), VINSON (FM) (30-59.999 MHz), Encryption Key: (XXX##) – ENT PT Voice Mode: ME6 – 1.6 to 29.999MHz – ENT CVSD - digital voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz AVS (analog voice security) CLR - analog voice DV24- DV6 ME24 NONE CC/CT Voice mode: ME6 – 1.6 to 29.999MHz – ENT CVSD - digital voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz DV24 DV6 ME24 NONE Enable: (Yes) – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE02)
Connect to Radio
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 198
CF-19 Install
Open SOMPE Configurator icon. Tab: Additional Software and Resources (Used for AN/PRC150) Install RPA Install TacChat (150 Radio)
Install TAC CHAT
Run install shield Wizard Modify Next Install Next Finish
Install NRDI Drivers COM1 115200 Check “Utilize this Radio Network Connection for All IP traffic to unknown destinations”
DATA TAC CHAT V2
Set up CF-19 “Sompeuser” “XXXXXXXXXXXXX” All Programs Commo Apps Tactical Chat Tactical Chat or Double click TAC CHAT Icon.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 199
Conversation Pane will open
1. Options on Conversation Pane
2. Self-Address (XX##XX##) – ENT 3. Connection (Harris Automatic IP Radio Connection COM 1 4. You should see (READY) in lower left corner of conversation pane.
On the Task Bar, Open Network Connection Icon Network Connections dialog box
Harris Automatic IP Radio Connection (COM1) …. Connected
To read received message: My Computer C: Sompe Harris File Tactical Chat File Received files
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 200
ALE (1.6 to 29.999 MHz)
The PRC-150 is Mil-Std-188-141A Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) capable.
Frequencies in this type of ALE net are preprogrammed in a channel group rather than a range of frequencies as in the PRC-137.
ALE NET SETUP
Preset channel frequencies Set those channels into groups Input the addresses of the net Self-Address identifies your radio. (Give the radio your call sign) Individual Addresses identify other individual stations in the network. Three character addresses: (FOB, AOB, ODA’s; A11, A53, A75 Begin scanning the frequencies of the channel group. Make TX on a channel.
8/PGM CONFIG - ENT PORTS – ENT ASCII – ENT Data Rate – 115.2K, 57.6K, 38.4K, 19.2K, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300, Data Bits – 8, 7, Stop Bits – 1, 2 Party – None, Space, Mark, Odd, Even, Flow Control – None, Hardware, XON/XOFF, Echo – On, Off
8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT Channel – ENT Channel # to change - ### ENT (Program all your channel) minimum of 4 RX Frequency: ##. #### MHz ENT TX Frequency: ##. #### MHz ENT Modulation: (USB, FM, CW, AME, LSB) ENT AGC Speed: (Med, Low, High) ENT IF Bandwidth: (3.0, 2.7, 2.4, 2.0, ) kHz ENT RX Only: (No/ Yes) ENT Limit Max TX Power? (No/Yes) ENT Enable Hail TX: (No/Yes) ENT Enable SSB Scan: (No/Yes) ENT CLR
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 201
8/PGM Mode – ENT ALE – ENT Chan_Group – ENT ADD – ENT ## - ENT (Add all channel in ALE) ADD - CLR
8/PGM Mode – ENT ALE – ENT Address – ENT Address Type – Self – ENT Add - ###### - ENT Channel Group - ##- ENT Address Type – Individual – ENT Add - ###### - ENT (Enter the call sign (address) of the base station (FOB).) Channel Group – ## - ENT ASSOC Self – XXX – ENT Address Type – Individual – ENT CLR
8/PGM Mode – ENT ALE – ENT Config – ENT Max Scan Channel: ### (The number of channel that you program) Listen Before TX [ON, OFF] Key to Call [ON, OFF] Max Tune Time [10 SEC] Link Time Out [ON, OFF] Link Time Out [3MIN] Link to any calls [ON, OFF] Link to all calls [ON, OFF] Link to inlink calls [ON, OFF] AMD Operation [DISABLE, ENABLE] AMD Auto DisplayLAY [ENABLE, DISABLE] Scan Rate [ASYNC, 5, 2] Link protect level [OFF, Level 1] Link Protect Key [00000000] CLR
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 202
DATA – MODEM PRESET (ALE Secure) Preset Modem 8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT Modem – ENT Modem Preset to change – MDM1 – ENT Preset Name – ARQ – ENT Modem Type – ARQ, ANDVT, 39 TONE, XDL, WBFSK – ENT Enable – (Yes – No) – ENT Modem Preset to Change: (MDM2) CLR
Preset ARQ 8/PGM Mode – ENT ARQ – ENT Self _ADDR - ENT ADD – X#X## - ENT (The C/S of your radio)
DATA – MESSAGE PRESET (ALE Secure) 8/PGM Config – ENT Message – ENT Route modem Data to: (RDP, DTE PORT, FILE) – ENT Route ARQ Data to: (RDP, DTE PORT, FILE) – ENT Source Address: (XXXX) – ENT Destination Address: (XXXX) – ENT Auto TX Type: (ARQ, NON-ARQ) – ENT
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 203
DATA – SYSTEM PRESET (ALE NET Secure) 8/PGM Mode – ENT Preset – ENT System – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE01) – ENT Preset Name (XXXXXXX) – ENT Radio Mode: (FIX, 3G, ALE, HOP) – ENT ASSOC SELF – X#X## - ENT Modem Preset: (Off, ARQ, MDM2 -20) – ENT Encryption Type: (NONE = PT) (TYPE1= CT) (Citadel) – ENT Crypto Mode: KG-84R, KG-84NR, ANDVT–HF, ANDVT-BD (HF) (1.6-29.999 MHz), VINSON (FM) (30-59.999 MHz), Encryption Key: (XXX##) – ENT PT Voice Mode: ME6 – 1.6 to 29.999MHz – ENT CVSD - digital voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz AVS (analog voice security) CLR - analog voice DV24- DV6 ME24 NONE CC/CT Voice mode: ME6 – 1.6 to 29.999MHz – ENT CVSD - digital voice for FM – 30 to 60 MHz DV24 DV6 ME24 NONE Enable: (Yes) – ENT System Preset to Change: (SYSPRE02) CLR x4
SET [3/MODE] TO <
RT is scanning the channels of the ALE net waiting for a “call”.
Initiate call 1/Call Call Type: Manual, Automatic – ENT Address Type: Individual – ENT Indiv Addr [XX##] - ENT XX## choose channel 02 Linked to “XX##” “Radio check, over” [CLR] to end the call
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 204
FREQUENCY HOP (with HF frequency’s)
PRESETS Each radio in the net is programmed with common information called presets. There are four types of presets: channel, modem, system, and manual. Channel presets assign a number to the frequencies that will be used. Modem presets allow you to setup a different digital voice or data transmission speeds.
System presets associate a radio mode, encryption key, voice settings and data settings to a channel, ALE associated self-address, 3G, 3G + net or frequency hop net.
Fixed Frequency Fixed Frequency Operation Single channel voice or data operations use FIX mode.
Hailing can be performed form FIX mode to stations that are in HOP mode. When programming channel presets, you can select a frequency to be a hailing frequency.
Hailing frequency also known as “CUE”
FIXED MODE (also known as Single channel)
3G
Third generation ALE. The HF protocols defined by STANAG 4538, characterized by faster linking and the ability to operate successful in lower signal to noise ration situations.
3G vs ALE
Faster link ALE uses channels 000 thru 099. 3G uses channels 100 thru 162. ALE uses channel plans 3G uses named channel groups. 3G requires a Time of Day (TOD) update; sync broadcast
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 205
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 206
SOF System Satcom/Equipment/Waveforms
Satellites offer the military enhanced capabilities on the Battlefield: • Flexible communications • Position / navigational data • Early warning weather • Targeting capabilities • Surveillance
What is a satellite? • Most communications satellites are active microwave repeaters or transponders.
Transponder: • Antenna • Frequency Converter • Amplifier • Transmitter • Receiver
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF A COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITE
Primary function: Worldwide, long-haul communications. Weight: Approx. 3000 pounds Power plant: Solar arrays generating average of 2500 watts Channels: 39 UHF (UFO’s) Orbit altitude: 22,300 miles Dimensions: Rectangular body approx. 6 feet long, 6 feet high, 7 feet wide and a 60-75 foot span with solar arrays deployed Launch vehicle: Atlas II and Evolved Expendable Launch Vehicle Life span: 12 to 15 years
TERMINOLOGY
Uplink (TX) - The signal transmitted from a ground terminal (radio) to a satellite.
Downlink (RX) - The signal transmitted from a satellite to a ground terminal (radio).
Satellite uplink and downlink frequencies are never the same. The uplink frequency is normally higher.
Apogee: The point in a satellites orbit where it is farthest from Earth and the velocity is slowest.
Perigee: The point in a satellites orbit where it is closest to the Earth and the velocity is fastest.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 207
Period: The time it takes for a satellite to make one complete orbit around the earth. The period increases with the altitude of the orbit. The minimum period for a sustainable orbit is 89 minutes (one rotation around the Earth)
Eccentricity: The degree to which an orbit varies from being circular. It describes the shape of the orbit. The eccentricity of a satellite’s orbit is usually a decimal number between zero and one.
If eccentricity is close to zero, then the orbit is considered circular.
If the eccentricity is between 0.5 and 0.999, then the orbit is highly elliptical
Elliptical Orbit: Follows an oval-shaped path This orbit takes about 12 hours to circle the planet Like polar orbits, elliptical orbits move in a North-South direction
FOOTPRINT: The area on the surface of the Earth that is within the field of view of the satellite’s transmitters or sensors.
SATELLITE FOOTPRINTS: (Normally two satellites covering each footprint)
CONUS: 100o and 105o West Longitude LANT: 23o and 15o West Longitude IO: 72.5o East Longitude PAC 172o and 177o East Longitude
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 208
INCLINATION: The angle a satellite’s orbital plane makes with the equatorial plane.
Prograde: An orbit with an inclination between 0 and 90 degrees. Same rotational direction as the Earth’s orbit.
Retrograde: An orbit with an inclination between 90 and 180 degrees. Opposite rotational direction as the Earth’s orbit.
MUTUAL VISIBILITY WINDOW: A view plane where the satellite has line of sight condition to both Earth terminals.
SATELLITE LINK: When two Earth terminals are involved in communications thru a single satellite.
SATELLITE NETWORK: When more than two Earth terminals are involved in communication via a single satellite.
SATELLITE SYSTEM: When two or more satellites are involved.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 209
EARTH’S ATMOSPHERE:
Divided into 5 regions
TROPOSPHERE:
1. Clouds and weather occur in this region. 2. Lowest region of the atmosphere. 3. Extends from the Earth's surface to the tropopause, the upper region of the troposphere. 4. From 0 to between 6 and 12 miles depending on position over equator/poles.
STRATOSPHERE:
1. This region extends from the tropopause to the stratopause, the upper boundary, at about 30 to 33 miles altitude. 2. Characterized by the near absence of water vapor and clouds. 3. From 6-12 miles (lows point) to between 30 and 33 miles (highness point)
MESOSPHERE:
1. Extends from the stratopause at the lower boundary to thermo pause, the upper boundary at about 50 miles altitude 2. Minimum atmospheric temperature is reached here, at 130 degrees below zero. 3. Not enough atmosphere for high altitude jets to operate in this region. 4. From 30-33 miles to Approximately 50 miles
THERMOSPHERE:
1. Extends from an altitude of 50 miles to between 200 and 375 miles. 2. Above 50 miles the temperature increases, to reach the maximum temperature of 2960 degrees. 3. 93 miles is the lowest altitude a satellite can orbit the earth for at least one revolution without propulsion. 4. At this altitude, it takes 89 minutes to complete one revolution of the Earth. 5. From 50 miles to between 200 and 375 miles
EXOSPHERE:
1. Begins where the thermosphere ends and extends out to space. This is where most of the satellites we use for communications are found. From 200-375 miles and extends out into space
93 miles is the most commonly accepted definition of where space begins.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 210
SATELLITE ORBITS
Low Earth Orbit (LEO): 1. Generally considered to have an APOGEE of no more than approximately 530 miles. 2. Orbit is considered nearly circular. 3. LEO satellites travel very fast and need to use frequent propulsion to maintain altitude. 4. Life span of LEO satellite, without propulsion, is one year. 5. Satellite circles close to Earth 6. 200 - 500 miles (320 - 800 kilometers) high 7. Must travel very fast so gravity won't pull them back 8. LEO speed along at 17,000 mph (27,359 kph)! 9. Circle Earth in about 90 minutes 10. General Uses of LEO Satellites: Earth Imagery (because of the close proximity of the orbit higher resolution imagery is possible), Observation, Environmental monitoring, Scientific.
Molniya Orbit: 1. Highly elliptical type of orbit. 2. Considered semi-synchronous, spending about six to eight hours of every 24 hours over a particular region of the earth.
Geosynchronous Orbit: 1. The satellite is synchronized with a geographical area of the earth below it. 2. Completes an orbit in the same 24 hour period as the earth’s rotation. 3. 13,000 to 22,300 miles from earth’s surface. 4. Geosynchronous Satellites are generally used for: Communications, Weather and Surveillance/Early warning
Geostationary Orbit: 1. A geostationary orbit is the same as a geosynchronous orbit except, the plane of the orbit follows the equator. 2. Satellites are parked in position, 22,300 miles above the equator at a degree of longitude that intersects with the equator. 3. Has become the world’s standard for most communications satellites.
Geostationary Earth Orbit: 1. Provides continuous communication services 2. Distance from the Earth of approximately 22,300 miles 3. Orbits the Earth in 24 hours 4. Orbits at a speed of about 7,000 mph (11,300 kph) 5. Satellites parked in the Clarke Belt a. A belt 22,300 miles (36,000 kilometers) directly above the equator where a satellite orbits the Earth at the same speed the Earth is rotating. Science fiction writer and scientist Arthur C. Clarke wrote about this belt in 1945, hence the name.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 211
ORBITAL PARKING
1. A satellite launched into a geostationary orbit is “parked” in a pre-assigned slot. 2. A geostationary parking slot is designated by the line of longitude over which it is positioned at the equator. 3. A geostationary satellite cannot be allowed to shift position from its parking slot by more than 1/10th of one degree of orbital arc. This ensures satellites do not interfere with each other’s signal.
Polar Orbit:
1. Any orbit which has an inclination of or very close to 90 degrees. 2. This orbit passes over or very near to the North or South Pole. 3. Circling at near-polar inclination 4. A true polar orbit has an inclination of 90 degrees 5. Altitude of 700 to 800 km 6. Excellent for Communications from the Earth’s polar region 7. Can be seen on 11-12 of the 14 daily NOAA polar-orbiter passes
UHF Satellites (communication)
1. Geostationary satellite orbits provide 24-hour a day operation 2. Equatorial orbit 3. Same angular velocity and direction as Earth’s rotation 4. 4 satellite constellations for worldwide coverage 5. Gap filler - 3 satellites -1976 6. Fleet Satellite Communications (FLTSATCOM) - 4 satellites - 1979-1980 7. Leased satellite (LEASAT) - 4 satellites - 1986 8. UHF Follow-On (UFO) - 10 satellites - 1993-2002
Next Generation Satellites
1. MUOS (Mobile User Objective System) Satellites: a. 5 Navy owned satellites – 2012 - 2015 i. 16-fold increase in transmission throughput ii. Replacing legacy UFO satellites 2. AEHF (Advanced Extremely High Frequency) Satellites: a. 6 Air Force owned – 2010 - present
Medium Earth Orbit: (MEO)
1. Primarily communications satellites covering the Earth's North and South Poles 2. Placed in a medium altitude oval orbit 3. Speed of 9,912 mph (15,962 kph) 4. Receivers on the ground must track these satellites 5. Orbiting anywhere from 6,000 to 12,000 miles above the Earth
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 212
FREQUENCY BANDS:
Many different frequencies are used in communications satellites. The most useful frequencies lie in the microwave bands between approximately 300 MHz and 300,000 MHz the frequency bands of interest for Army SATCOM are UHF, SHF, and with the advent of MILSTAR SATELLITES EHF
Currently SOF utilizes UHF for its single-channel SATCOM. UHF SATCOM in particular refers to communications from 225 to 400 MHz
The Army uses SHF for multi-channel SATCOM. SHF refers to communications in the C, X, and Ku bands, and a portion of the Ka band.
High altitude allows one satellite to see about 42% of the Earth's surface.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 213
SATELLITE ADVANTAGES
BANDWIDTH:
1. A satellite transponder is built to receive and transmit signals within a specific, limited band of radio frequencies.
2. The greater a transponder’s bandwidth, the greater will be its potential channel capacity (in bits per sec.) to convey information at higher throughput rates.
3. Satellite design and use is directly tied to how much channel capacity, or information throughput a satellite transponder can accommodate.
4. As a whole, satellites are capable of transmitting/relaying greater amounts of information, at faster rates, over a wider area than terrestrial communications.
5. Provides mobility and flexibility on the battlefield, and broadcast capability to deployed units in a Theater.
LARGE GEOGRAPHIC COVERAGE: (see 42% of earth's surface)
1. Service isolated areas.
2. Earth terminals are not limited by international boundaries.
3. Reliable communications are provided to mobile platforms such as ships at sea, airplanes in flight, and cars and trucks when moving.
TIMELY COMMUNICATIONS
1. Rapid displacement to new locations (Terminals can be up and on the air within minutes of arrival on site.)
2. Provides Real Time Information: a. Voice / Data b. Digitized photography
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 214
SATELLITE DISADVANTAGES:
1. Limited channel/bandwidth/power capacity.
2. UHF signals easily disrupted, intercepted, and jammed.
3. Dedicated SATCOM assets not available to all army users.
SATELLITE ANTENNAS:
1. Satellite antennas are located aboard the satellite and as part of the Earth terminal’s equipment.
2. UPLINK (TX): The signal transmitted from a ground terminal. DOWNLINK (RX): The signal transmitted from the satellite to a ground terminal.
3. Satellite uplink and downlink frequencies are never the same. The uplink frequency is normally higher.
OMNI-DIRECTIONAL/WHIP:
1. A whip antenna consists of a simple wire or mast made of material that is a good conductor. An example would be on the GPS (PLUGGER, DAGR, X-Wing) terminal that receives signals in the L-band of frequencies.
HELICAL:
1. Constructed with a conductive material formed into a helix (wire coiled into a cylindrical shape) with or without a center coil. This kind of highly directional antenna (approx. 120 degrees beam width) is used in man pack, ships, and tactical UHF terminals where size is a major concern. It is designed to provide high gain at specific frequencies.
2. Generally the HELICAL antenna systems are issued with two antenna arrays.
a. The HELICAL antenna alone provides approximately a 6-decibel (db.) gain.
b. The HELICAL antenna with one antenna array provides a 9-db gain.
c. The HELICAL antenna with two antenna arrays provides an 11-db gain.
PARABOLIC:
1. This dish-shaped antenna is normally used with UHF and SHF frequencies. A PARABOLIC antenna has a direct feed focused on the middle of the receive and transmit signals. The dish is used as a reflector.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 215
AN/PRC-117G(V)1(C) RT-1949(P)(C) & AN/PRC-152A(V)1(C) RT-19166(P)(C)
The Falcon III® AN/PRC-117G (V) 1(C) RT-1949(P) (C) System Software 4.2.2
Components:
1. Kit Bag 2. H250 handset 3. GPS Antenna 4. Antenna, Blade 30-90 MHz 5. HB Antenna, 225 MHz - 2 GHz (ANW2C) 6. LB Antenna, 90- 512 MHz 1 Components: 4 6
1. Keypad display unit (KDU) 2 5 2. RT to KDU cable 3 3. KDU wrist strap 4. Red Data EUA422/Synchronous Serial Data Cable. 5. Cable Assembly, Programming (USB) RT to PC (USB) cable. 6. Red data connector (top right,J3- 10/100 Base T Ethernet, EIA-422/3 High Assurance Internet Protocol Encryption (HAIPE).
The Falcon III® AN/PRC-152A (V) 1(C) RT-19166(P) (C) System Software 8.1.4
Components:
1. Radio Assembly AN/PRC-152A: 2. Accessory Carry Case 3. RT Holster Case 4. UHF Antenna (10”): 225 – 450 MHz (BEST FOR ANW2C) 5. VHF/UHF/HB Antenna (13”): 30 – 870 MHz (>90 MHz) 6. VHF (48”) 30 – 90 MHz (Not fielded with RT. SWC issue) 7. GPS Antenna 8. Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery (2 ea.) 9. USB/KDU Adapter 10. USB Data/Programming Cable 11. Black Pelican 1050 Case (SWC issue) 12. E-Pub CD ROM (not SWC issue) 13. Operator Card (not SWC issue)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 216
The Falcon III® AN/PRC-117G (V) 1(C) RT-1949(P) (C) System Software 4.2.2
10 supported waveforms
1. VHF/UHF LOS (VULOS) Fixed Frequency FM and AM / UHF Satcom. 2. Single channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) Frequency hopping (FH) and Single Channel (SC). 3. UHF Demand Assignment Multiple Access (DAMA) 4. HaveQuick Frequency Hopping (HQ) 5. High Performance Waveform (HPW) 6. Adaptive Networking Wideband Waveform v C(ANW2C) 7. Special Communications Mode (SCM) (SCM is LOS, ASCM is Sat) 8. Soldier Radio Waveform (SRW) 9. Integrated Waveform (IW) 10. Advanced Networking Wideband Waveform (ANW2)
The Falcon III® AN/PRC-152A (V) 1(C) RT-19166(P) (C) System Software 8.1.4
10 supported waveforms
1. VHF/UHF LOS (VULOS) Fixed Frequency FM and AM and UHF SATCOM 2. Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) Frequency Hopping (FH) and Single Channel (SC) 3. UHF Demand Assignment/Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA) 4. HAVEQUICK Frequency Hopping (HQ) 5. High Performance Waveform (HPW) 6. Adaptive Networking Wideband Waveform v C(ANW2C) 7. Special Communications Mode (SCM) (SCM is LOS / ASCM is SAT) 8. Soldier Radio Waveform (SRW) 9. Integrated Waveform (IW) 10. Project (P)25
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 217
Radio Frequency Range
AN/PRC-117G AN/PRC-152A Frequency range: 30 MHz-2 GHz Frequency range: 30 MHz-870 MHz
VULOS (30-512 MHz) VULOS (30-512 MHz) SINCGARs (30-87.975 MHz) SINCGARs (30-87.975 MHz) HQII (225-400 MHz) HQII (225-400 MHz) HPW (30-512 MHz) HPW (30-512 MHz) ANW2C (225 MHz-2 GHz) ANW2C (225-450 MHz) SCM (LOS 30-512 MHz) SCM (LOS 30-512 MHz) (SAT 225-400 MHz) (SAT 225-400 MHz) SRW (200-400 MHz STD) SRW (200-400 MHz STD) IW (225-400 MHz) IW (225-400 MHz) DAMA (225-400 MHz) DAMA (225-400 MHz) ANW2 (225 MHz-2 GHz) P25 (512-520, 762-870 MHz)
Capabilities both radio
SATCOM / DAMA / IW
25k WB channels 9 – 128, 192, 193, 240-247 5k NB channels 129 – 191, 194 – 239
Channel 999 (Satcom only) is used when you don’t have the channel number or for a Non-Standard (NS) Satellite frequency pair.
POWER
AN/PRC-117G AN/PRC-152A
Battery Types: BA-5590/U Battery Types: 10.8 vdc Li/lon BB-390/U, BB-590/U, BB- Power Output: 250mW to 5W 2590/U 10W Satcom high power mode BA-5390/U, Power Output: Max Power: 20 WATTS Waveform dependent
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 218
FEATURES
AN/PRC-117G AN/PRC-152A 30.0000 MHz to 1999.9950 MHz 30.0000 MHz to 870.0000 MHz (30 MHz to 2 GHz) VHF Low 30.0000- 89.9999MHz VHF High 90.0000-224.999MHz UHF 225.0000-511.9950 MHz UHF Dedicated Satcom & DAMA Satcom 234.0000-270.0000MHz 292.0000-318.0000MHz High Band 225.0000-1999.9950 MHz
Up to 99 programmable system presets (01 - 99) containing user-specified frequencies and operating parameters.
Up to 99 programmable waveform presets (numbered 01 - 99) for each installed waveform.
Planning Time AN/PRC-117G
Typical Battery Life (BA-5590) Radio Conditions Battery Life (Hours) SINCGARS, CT, 10 WATTS, 6:1:1 Standby/RX/TX 14 HAVEQUICK II, 10 WATTS, 6:1:1 Standby/RX/TX 11 SATCOM 181B, 20 WATTS, 6:1:1 Standby/RX/TX 13 ANW2, ANW2C 5 WATTS, 6:1:1 Standby/RX/TX 10
Planning Time AN/PRC-152A
Battery Life (Hours) = 8 Hours
• Built-in-test (BIT) for operational test, battery test, memory tests, and high-bank testing.
• Shuts down at 60 degrees C or 140 degrees F
• Takes approximately 27 seconds to start up
• Takes approximately 2-3 seconds to change nets
• Takes approximately 2-3 seconds to change PT/CT
• Takes approximately 6 seconds to change waveforms
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 219
• Radio warms up 10 degrees in first 2 minutes automatically; normal for software processing
• Menu display of firmware and hardware versions.
• Optional internal Global Positioning System (GPS) unit for use with time tracking and position reporting.
• Internal Ground-Based GPS Receiver Application
• Module Selective Availability Anti-Spoofing Module (GB GRAM SAASM) unit for functions such as time tracking and position reporting for use with VHF/UHF Line- of-Sight (VULOS), SINCGARS, HPW, HAVEQUICK, and ANW2.
• RT requires a JOSEKI key. The short title is not the same as the JEM RT.
• Internal HUB to maintain programmed information when the main battery is removed. (good approx. 1 year…must have power applied while changing HUB)
• VINSON, Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal (ANDVT), Advanced Encryption Standard(AES), FASCINATOR, and KG-84C embedded encryption modes for VHF-low through UHF bands.
• BATON or MEDLEY encryption mode for ANW2/ANW2C.
• Automatic scan operation of both Cipher Text (CT) and Plain Text (PT) channels on Line-of-Sight (LOS) fixed frequency or dedicated UHF SATCOM channels.
• HPW mode for increased data performance over dedicated Narrowband (NB) and Wideband (WB) SATCOM channels.
• Situational Awareness (SA) feature to transmit encrypted location information.
• Exclusion Band feature that prevents operations on specified frequencies in VULOS mode.
• Certain menu choices/options require a “PASSWORD”
• Supports Mixed-Excitation Linear Predictive (MELP) and Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) (LPC-10) digitized voice in ANDVT operations. Radio will auto select between incoming MELP and LPC-10 traffic.
• Operable on all VHF Maritime Channel frequencies.
• CT Override function, which allows the operator to hear CT Voice in a PT mode
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 220
• Operable with Falcon III Man pack Vehicular Amplifier Adapter (VAA)
• Support for optional remote Keypad Display Unit (KDU)
• 1 programmable BEACON frequency (default 90 MHz)
Crypto modulation:
VHF Low: FM (5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 8 kHz), FSK VHF High: FM (5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 8 kHz), AM (90%), FSK, ASK UHF: FM (5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 8 kHz), AM (90%), FSK, ASK UHF SATCOM & DAMA: FSK, SBPSK, CPM High Band: PSK, 16-QAM (future), GMSK
Channel spacing:
VHF Low: 25 kHz VHF-High/UHF: AM 8.33 kHz, 12.5 kHz, and 25 kHz VHF-High/UHF: FM 12.5 kHz, 25 kHz High Band 1.2 MHz or 5 MHz Nominal; 5 kHz
SQUELCH TYPES
1. Disabled: No squelch, receiver remains open. 2. Tone Squelch: un squelches when it receives a 150 Hz tone. 3. Noise Squelch: un squelches when RF noise is greater than set level. 4. Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS): only works in PT (MIL STD is 150 Hz).
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING
1. Radio Programming Application (RPA), to program radio via computer. 2. Harris RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA) Produces Radio Plan Files. 3. Radio stores multiple Plan Files. 4. Software reprogrammable a. Ability to integrate newer software into device without having to open the chassis: 1. COMSEC 2. Platform 3. Waveform 5. Programmable Beacon Preset (1ea.)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 221
OUTPUT POWER
AN/PRC-117G AN/PRC-152A
Max. Power Man pack: 20 W Max. Power Man pack: 5 W 30 – 512 MHZ AM/FM: 10 W 30 – 512 MHz AM/FM: 10 W 225- 400 MHz SAT/DAMA/IW: 20 W 225 - 400 MHz SAT/DAMA/IW: W/Burst Mode on 10 W ANW2/C: 5 W ANW2/C: 5 W
VULOS (LOS): FM only VULOS (LOS): FM only FM (30-89.99999 MHz), FM (30-89.99999 MHz), Max - 10W Low (L) power: 1W Low (L) power: .25W Med (M) power: 4W Med (M) power: 2W High (H) power: 10W High (H) power: 5W User (1, 1.3, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6.3, 8, & 10W)
VULOS (LOS): FM & AM VULOS (LOS): FM & AM FM & AM (90-511.99999 MHz), FM & AM (90-511.99999 MHz), Max - 10W (512-520MHz)(762-870MHz) Low (L) power: 1W Low (L) power: .25W Med (M) power: 4W Med (M) power: 2W High (H) power: 10W High (H) power: 5W User (1, 1.3, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, , 4, 6.3, 8, & 10W)
Dedicated UHF(Satcom, DAMA, IW Dedicated UHF(Satcom, DAMA, IW Downlinks (243-270 MHz) Downlinks (243-270 MHz) Uplinks (292-318 MHz) Uplinks (292-318 MHz) Max - 20W Low (L) power: .25W Low (L) power: 2W Med (M) power: 2W Med (M) power: 8W High (H) power: 5W High (H) power: 20W W/Burst Mode on: 10W User (2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6.3, 8, 10, 13, 16, and 20W)
ANW2/ANW2C: ANW2/ANW2C: 225 MHz to 2000 MHz 225 MHz to 450 MHz Max - 5W Max - 5W Low (L) power: .5 W Low (L) power: .5 W Med (M) power: 2 W Med (M) power: 2 W High (H) power: 5 W High (H) power: 5 W
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 222
WAVEFORM INSTALLATION FILL, & GPS
INTEROPERABILITY
CONTROLS & INDICATORS
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 223
ITEMS INCLUDED
AN/PRC-117G AN/PRC-152A
1. Low-Band/High Band Radio 1. Kit Bag (12041-1595-01) Assembly with Military GPS 2. Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery 2. Modified H-250/U Handset (12041-2200-02) (10075-1399) 3. GPS Antenna (12041-6550-01) 3. USB Programming Cable Assembly 4. VHF/UHF HB Antenna (12043-2750-A006) (12102-2700-01) 4. Falcon III Radio Programming 5. UHF Antenna (12031-2700-01) Application (RF-6550M) or Falcon III 6. SINCGARS Pocket guide Communications Planning (10515-0409-4000) Application (RF-6650M) 7. Pocket Guide (10515-0409-4030) 5. SINCGARS Pocket guide 8. Field Reference Guide (10515-0319-4000) (10515-0409-4100) 6. ANW2 Pocket Guide 9. Operation Manual (10515-0319-4010) (10515-0409-4200) 7. Reference GuideANW2 10. Mission Planning and Program (10515-0319-4100) Guide (10515-0411-4200) 8. Operations Manual 11. Operator Card (10515-0319-4200)
OPTIONAL CABLES
AN/PRC-117G AN/PRC-152A
1. Cable Assembly, Point-To-Point 1. Kit, PRC-152 USB/KDU, Protocol (PPP), Man pack (MP) Bottom Exit (For HPW) (12043-2710-A006) (12041-7227-02) 2. Cable Assembly, Remote/Data, Y 2. Cable Assy. Data/Program (12043-2730-A006) (USB) (12043-2850-A006) 3. Cable Assembly, Digital 3. KDU Cable Kit Retransmission, (12043-2740-AXXX) (10551-0100-02) 4. Cable Assembly, Ethernet 4. KDU (10553-1300-02) (12043-2760-A006) 5. Cable Assembly, Terminal Program, DB9, 6 Pin (12043-0720-A006) 6. Cable Assembly, Programming (USB) (12043-2750-A006) 7. Cable Assembly, RPA Kit (12043-0775-A006)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 224
AN/PRC-117G
1 Black Top Connector Provides interface for BLACK (CT) data devices. (J6) 2 Red Top Connector Provides interface for RED (PT) data devices. (J3) 3 GPS Antenna Connector for Global positioning System (GPS) Antenna. Connector (J2) 4. Universal Serial Bus Connector for RED USB and external keypad display unit (KDU) (USB)(KDU) Connector (J4) 5. Display Displays operational and programming screen. 6. Cipher switch (OFF) Turn radio off (PT) Places the radio in plain text non encrypted mode. (LD) Places radio off-line for security or installation. In security. Radio is ready to load COMSEC and TRANSEC variables from Type-1 fill device in install radio is ready to load software or mission plans. (Z) Zeroizes all programmed variables including encryption (requires pressing [VOL +/-] up). (CT) Places radio in cipher text encryption mode. 7. 6-Pin AUDIO/Fill Connection for H-250 handset or crypto fill device that uses a connector (J1) 6-pin connector 8. SATCOM Antenna 50-ohm BNC SATCOM antenna port Used for SATCOM connector (J7) and DAMA 9. Keypad [Next] Switches the display to alternate screen for additional information. [CALL] SINCGARS – Cue and ERF in FH mode. HAVEQUICK – TOD Sync. VULOS – SATCOM Ping Test [LT] Access to KDU backlight control menu [MODE] Selects OTAR Beacon and Clone features Disabled in HPW mode. [SQL] Enables/Disables squelch [ZERO] Zeroize menus [OPT] Option menus. [PGM] Programming menus.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 225
[CLC] Returns a field to its previous value or activates previous screen. [ENT] Selects scroll field choices or locks-in entry field data. [PRE +/-] Scrolls system presets or in the scan mode scrolls the scan list. [VOL +/-] Increases/Decreases volume Left/Right Arrows Moves cursor left/right through menu fields. Up/Down Arrows Scrolls through selections. 10. Low Band Antenna TNC antenna port for 30 to 1999.9950 MHz Connector 11. High Band Antenna N-connector port for 225 to 1999.9950 MHz This Connector connection is used for the ANW2 waveform.
AN/PRC-152A
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 226
AN/PRC-117G Keypad AN/PRC-152A Keypad
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 227
CONTROLS & INDICATORS
Keypad Lock – AN/PRC-117G/152A keypad can be locked to prevent accidental key presses. – Locking the keypad • Press [OPT]. • Use up/down arrows to select LOCK KEYPAD. • Press [ENT]. – Unlocking the keypad • When Keypad Locked message is displayed, press [1], [3], [7], and [9] in sequence to unlock. • Operation times out if more than a two second delay between key presses occurs.
The keypad may be locked to prevent accidental key presses.
Locking the Keypad Unlocking the keypad Press [OPT] When Keypad Locked message is displayed, press [1], Use up/down arrows [3], [7], and [9] in sequence to unlock. to select LOCK Operation times out if more than a two second delay KEYPAD between key presses Press [ENT] occurs
POWER UP PROCEDURES
1. Insure RT is OFF 2. Install battery 3. Power up to CT 4. Clear error messages by pressing the [CLR / ENT] button a. PW DETECTED b. NO GPS / NO CVs LOADED c. INVALID CRYPTO MODE Returns to the last preset (01-99)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 228
TEN FACTORY DEFAULT PRESETS
AN/PRC-117G AN/PRC-152A
01 - FMVOICE01 01 - FMVOICE01 02 – SRWPRE 02 – SRWPRE 03 - SNGRS01 03 - SNGRS01 04 - SCM01 04 - SCM01 05 - IWPRE01 05 - IWPRE01 06 - HPWPRESET01 06 - HPWPRESET01 07 – HQINIT 07 – HQINIT 08 - DAMA PRE 01 08 - DAMA PRE 01 09 - ANW2CPRE1 09 – ANALOG01 10 - ANW2PRE1 10 - ANW2PRE1
AN/PRC-117G ONLY AN/152A ONLY (SWC SOP)
2. You must set the correct battery 1. You must do this every time the
type in order to insure proper RT has been set to factory
battery status monitoring. defaults (zeroized)
3. PGM (8) ENT 2. OPT (7) ENT
4. RADIO CONFIG 3. RADIO OPTIONS
5. GENERAL CONFIG 4. ENT BUTTON x3
6. BATTERY CONFIG* (select the 5. RADIO SPEAKER
correct battery type) and press 6. DISABLED
ENT
7. *This has to be done every time
you operate from a ‘ZEROIZED
RT”
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 229
UTILITY FUNCTIONS / SELF TEST
1. Operator BIT on all modules 2. Run Time BIT on all modules 3. Bit Error Rate Test (BERT): TX or RX test on the NB portion of RT 4. Optional Tests: GPS & Receiver Exciter Synthesizer (RES) Flash 5. Wideband Test: TX or RX on high-band ANW2 portion of RT 6. SW Validation: tests the entire red & black file systems through the CRYPTO to verify that the files have not changed 7. Keypad Test: tests the keyboard 8. Memory Test: verifies integrity of the RTs volatile memory
Warning Some of the wideband tests can cause the AN/PRC-117G to transmit over the air. RF shock could occur from coming into contact with an antenna while radio is transmitting. Note Ensure that high band connector of the radio (J8) is connected to a test load or necessary equipment prior to using any f the tests in this section.
COMSEC
Warning, Fill Devices, and the AN/PRC-117G Do not connect ANY Fill Device to Audio J1 connector until the radio function switch is placed in the LD position. Attaching the Fill Device prematurely may cause the AN/PRC-117G to key and transmit.
Upon finishing procedures in LD switch position, disconnect the Fill Device from the connector before returning back to PT or CT.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 230
COMSEC Level Classifications
Type 1- Restricted to the US Government, Military, and Intelligence agencies. Suitable for highly (up to Top Secret) classified information; the customer must have a NSA COMSEC Account to obtain.
Type 2- Restricted to the US Government and Military, suitable for unclassified information.
Type 3- Restricted to US and Canadian companies and citizens. Used in some LMRs to protect sensitive but unclassified information in non-tactical operations
Type 4- Generally available to international companies and citizens, subject to export approval. Suitable for Sensitive but Unclassified or “SBU” information. Perfect for government applications where a high level of privacy or security is needed. But actual classified information is not being passed though the unit.
Type 5- Fairly unrestricted public key version of above Type 4 equipment, Very Exportable, and available for private sale.
VINSON (KY-57) Encryption
1. Normal voice encryption mode for all bands and modes except Narrowband (NB) 5 kHz Satcom, Dama and ANW2. 2. Voice and data on Wideband (WB) 25 kHz Dedicated Satcom 3. Converts analog voice to encrypted data at 16 kbps using Continuously Variable Slope Delta (CVSD) 4. Supports data rate of 16kpbs 5. Sincgars Data Rate Adapter for SDM/EDM Data rates when operating below 88 MHz 6. Supports OTAR operations.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 231
ANDVT Encryption (KY-99 and KY-100)
1. Supports voice and data encryption on NB 5 kHz Satcom channels. a. Only selectable when programming a Dedicated Satcom or Dama UHF Satcom Net. b. Selectable data rates of 300, 600, 1200, or 2400 bps. 2. Voice digitalization algorithm is LPC-10 or MELP at 2400 bps. 3. Radio can store 25 ANDVT Traffic Encryption Keys (TEK) s training sequence frames settings to match KY-99/100 users. a. 20 is default setting 4. Does not support OTAR operations.
KG-84 Encryption
1. Data Only encryption. Radio cannot be keyed by handset PTT when this Comsec is selected. 2. 30 MHz to 512 MHz AM or FM 3. Does not support OTAR operations 4. Has 25 KG-84 key storage positions available per supported waveform. 5. Supports data rates up to 56k 6. Four selectable (4) Modes: a. Redundant Mode 1 b. Redundant Mode *2 c. Non-Redundant Mode 3 d. Non-Redundant Mode *4 *Represents the different modes as determined by Legacy encryption device.
Fascinator Encryption
1. Supports voice encryption in FM modulation across bands of 90 to 512 MHz 2. 25 key positions. 3. Encryption data rate is 12 kbps using CVSD 4. Does not support OTAR operations. 5. Provides secure interoperability with (Saber and XTS 5000 Motorola) handheld radios using this encryption type. 6. Supports Both STD and ALT (WHCA) modes.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 232
AES Encryption 1. VULOS Type 1 AES Encryption 2. Supports encrypted synchronous 16kbps data and CVSD voice in AM/FM modulation modes of VULOS waveform. 3. Does not support OTAR operations 4. Does not support SCAN operations 5. Supports CFB (RESYNC), CTR (MINERR) a. AES is the Advanced Encryption Standard created by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). The Type 1 AES crypto mode supports 16k voice and data communications and provides variable key length encryption including support of 128-bit and 256-bit keys. b. Only unclassified AES keys are supported at this. Note that key fill is per Type 1 key fill infrastructure. c. Currently, AES keys can only loaded via DS-101 d. Setting AES encryption is performed via PGM->VULOS CONFIG->PRESET CONFIG->COMSEC or OPTIONS->VULOS CONFIG->COMSEC or select AES key via the Key field on the main operational screen.
*Operational Modes and Associated Comsec type* 1. VULOS: LOS a. Vinson, AES (Voice or Data) (25 keys) b. Fascinator (Voice) (25 keys) c. KG-84 (Data) (25 keys) 2. VULOS: SATCOM a. Vinson, (Voice or Data) WB 25 kHz b. ANDVT (Voice or Data) NB 5 kHz (25 keys) c. KG-84 WB 25 kHz / NB 5 kHz 3. SINCGARS: VINSON (Voice or Data) (25 keys) 4. HAVEQUICK: VINSON Voice (25 keys) 5. DAMA: a. ANDVT, VINSON (Voice or Data) b. KG-84 (Data only) c. Satellite (TSK) 6. HPW: a. KG-84 (Data only) (25 keys) b. Satellite (TSK) (1 keys) 7. ANW2 Pre-Placed key -Medley (voice or data) (25 keys) -Baton (Data) Vector (Unicast Data) (25 keys) Transec (1 keys)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 233
Electronic Fills, COMSEC
Communications Security Keys (128 -bit) Traffic Encryption Keys (TEK) Multiple Key storage capability Key storage for each COMSEC type
COMSEC ***COMSEC is loaded per waveform and encryption type***
If you are using the same key in multiple waveforms and/or encryption types you must load the key for each one.
VULOS HQ VINSON 01-25 VINSON 01-25 ANDVT 01-25 KG-84 01-25
AES 01-25 SCM 01-25
SATELLITE (TSK) 01-25 FASCINATOR 01-25 KEK 01 ANW2/C 01-25
DAMA IW VINSON 01-25 VINSON 01-25 ANDVT 01-25 ANDVT 01-25 KG-84 01-25 KG-84 01-25 SATELLITE (TSK) 01-25 SATELLITE (TSK) 01-25
SINCGARS HPW VINSON 01-25 KG84 01-25 KEK 01 SATELLITE (TSK) 01-25
P25 (152A Only) 01-255 Keysets (AES-256
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 234
You are not allowed to mix SECRET and TOP SECRET keys/fills or *FILL STORE FAILURE* will be displayed.
Example: If you load a TOP SECRET KEY, the radio will not let you load a SECRET KEY.
Example: If you allow a SECRET KEY. The radio WILL let you load an UNCLASS or CONFIDENTIAL KEY.
COMSEC FILL (TEK or KEK for VULOS)
Function switch to Fill Fill: Enter Waveform for key :( VULOS) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL (PYQ-10) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS102) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill Crypto Mode: (Vinson) - Enter Key Type: (TEK or KEK) - Enter Key Number: (01- 25) - Enter Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Load another key: (No, Yes) – Enter
REVIEWING COMSEC KEY Press 7/OPT- ENT View Key Info - ENT Waveform - ENT VULOS - ENT TEK – ENT TEK or KEK or TRKEK – ENT TEK##- ENT
Panic Zeroize AN/PRC-117G Panic Zeroize AN/PRC-152A Function switch to Z position Function switch to Z position
Press the up volume bottom
Press 5/Zero > Zeroize All > Zeroize Radio (NO/YES) – ENT > ** Zeroize ** In Progress …Wait…
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 235
VULOS Line of Site (LOS) Comsec Fill Cheat Sheet
Function switch to Fill Fill: Enter Waveform for key :( VULOS) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL (PYQ-10) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS102) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill Crypto Mode: (Vinson) - Enter Key Type: (TEK or KEK) - Enter Key Number: (01- 25) - Enter Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Load another key: (No, Yes) – Enter
VULOS Line of Site (LOS) Presets Press 8/PGM System Presets: Enter System Presets Config: Enter System Presets Number: (01-99) - Enter Preset Description: (*****) - Enter Preset Waveform: (VULOS) - Enter General Config: Enter Preset Name: (********)- Enter Preset Type: (LOS, Satcom,) - Enter Frequency: Enter RX Frequency: (###. ####) – Enter Receive Only: (No, Yes) - Enter TX Frequency (Use RX Freq) - Enter TX Frequency: (###. ####) - Enter Comsec: Enter Crypto Mode: (Vinson) - Enter Crypto Key: (TEK01 – TEK25) - Enter Traffic: Enter Traffic Mode: (Voice and Data, Voice, Data) - Enter Voice Mode: (CVSD) - Enter Data Mode: (Synchronous, Asynchronous) - Enter Modulation Type (LOS, AM, FM) - Enter FM Deviation: (8.0, 6.5, 5.0 KHz) - Enter TX Power: Enter TX Power Level (High, Medium, Low, User) - Enter Squelch: Enter Squelch Type (Noise, CDCSS, CTCSS, Tone, Disabled, Off) - Enter EXIT:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 236
VULOS Satcom Wide Band (WB) Comsec Fill Cheat Sheet
Function switch to Fill Fill: Enter Waveform for key :( VULOS) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL (PYQ-10) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS102) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill Crypto Mode: (Vinson) - Enter Key Type: (TEK, KEK) - Enter Key Number: (01- 25) - Enter Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Load Another key: (No, Yes) - Enter
VULOS Satcom Wide Band (Presets) Press 8/PGM System Presets: Enter System Presets Config: Enter System Presets Number: (01-99) - Enter Preset Description (*****) - Enter Preset Waveform (VULOS) - Enter General Config: Enter Preset Name: (********) - Enter Preset Type: (Satcom, LOS) - Enter Frequency: Enter Channel Number: (###) - Enter Receive Only: (No, Yes) - Enter Comsec: Enter Crypto Mode: (Vinson) - Enter Crypto Key: (TEK01 – TEK25) - Enter Traffic: Enter Traffic Mode: (Voice (25k), Data (5k & 25k)) - Enter Voice Mode: (CVSD) - Enter Option Code: (132, 010) - Enter Data Mode: (Synchronous, Asynchronous) - Enter Option Code: (132, 010) ENTER FM Deviation: (8.0, 6.5, 5.0, kHz) - Enter TX Power: Enter (High-20W, Medium-8W, Low-2W) - Enter Squelch: Enter Squelch Type: Disabled - Enter FM Transmit Tone Disabled - Enter EXIT:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 237
VULOS Satcom Narrow Band (Comsec Fill) Cheat Sheet
Function switch to Fill Fill: Enter Waveform for key :( VULOS) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL (PYQ-10) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS102) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill Crypto Mode: (ANDVT) - Enter Key Type: (TEK, KEK) - Enter Key Number: (01- 25) - Enter Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Load Another key: (No, Yes) - Enter
VULOS Satcom Narrow Band (Presets) Press 8/PGM System Presets: Enter System Presets Config: Enter System Presets Number: (01-99) - Enter Preset Description (*****)- Enter Preset Waveform (VULOS) - Enter General Config: Enter Preset Name: (********)- Enter Preset Type: (Satcom, LOS) - Enter Frequency: Enter Channel Number: (###) - Enter Receive Only: (No, Yes) - Enter Comsec: Enter Crypto Mode: (ANDVT) - Enter Crypto Key: (TEK01 – TEK25) – Enter Training Frames: (20, 15, 12, 09, 06, 60, 30) - Enter ANDVT RX Fade PRI: (Enable, Disable) - Enter Voice Auto switch: (Enable, Disable) - Enter Traffic: Enter Traffic Mode: (Voice and Data (5k), Data (5k & 25k)) - Enter Data Mode: (Synchronous, Asynchronous) - Enter Voice Mode: (MELP 2400, LPC 2400) - Enter LPC Code book: (English, Arabic, Dutch) - Enter Option Code: (010) - Enter Data Mode: (Synchronous, Asynchronous) - Enter Option Code: (010) ENTER TX Power: Enter (High-20W, Medium-8W, Low-2W, User) - Enter Squelch: Enter Squelch Type Disabled – Enter FM Transmit Tone Disabled – Enter EXIT:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 238
Ping Test for Satcom Press Call Button – Enter Ping – Enter Enter Ping Duration: (Single Test, 15-30-60 Seconds) - Enter
GPS (Config)
Press 8/PGM Radio Config: Enter General Config: Enter GPS Config: Enter GPS Type: Internal, Disabled, Plgr/Dagr - Enter GPS Sleep Cycle: Disabled - Enter Enabled - Enter GPS sleep time: (#### Minutes) - Enter Position Format: (MGRS-New) - Enter Linear Units: (Metric) - Enter Elevation Basis: (Mean Sea Level, Datum Based) - Enter Angular Units: (Degrees Magnetic, Degrees True, Streck Magnetic, Streck True, Mil Magnetic, Mil True) - Enter Grid Digits: (14, 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2) - Enter Group: (Common) – Enter Name: (WGD (WGS 84)) - Enter
GPS OPTION MENU Press 7/OPT GPS Options – ENT GPS Status Tracking - Enter GPS Status Screen - Enter GPS Position Screen - Enter GPS Heading/Velocity Screen - Enter GPS Altitude/EPE Screen - Enter GPS FOM/Key Status Screen - Enter GPS Sat Info Screen - Enter
GPS Status – Enter GPS Key Info – Enter GPS CV Status - Enter Days with keys- Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 239
Beacon Config
Press 8/PGM - Enter VULOS CONFIG - Enter BEACON CONFIG - Enter Beacon Frequency (###. ####) - Enter Beacon Modulation (AM / FM) - Enter Beacon TX Duration (## seconds) - Enter Beacon OFF Duration (## seconds) - Enter Beacon TX power (High / Medium / Low) – Enter
Beacon Mode (Activate)
Press 3/Mode - Enter Beacon - Enter Beacon Mode Off: Press ENT to start’ Press CLR to Exit Press Enter to Activate, Once Activate press CLR to abort Terminate beacon? (Yes / No)
Changing Time in the Radio
Press 7/OPT- Enter SINCGARS Options: - Enter SINCGARS GTOD: - Enter User Entry- Enter GPS Synchronization – Enter Global Time of Day: (##D ## :##:##) - Enter Sincgars GTOD Successful - Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 240
SINCGARS Frequency Hopping Cheat Sheet
Function switch to Fill Fill: Enter Waveform for key: (SINCGARS) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL (PYQ-10) - Enter Fill Port Type: (Mode 2/3 (Loadset) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill Initiate Fill at Fill Device Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Connecting fill device TEKS, TOD, Lockouts, TSKS, Hopset, KEKS – Enter Load Another key: (No, Yes) - Enter
SINCGARS Frequency Hopping Press 8/PGM System Presets: Enter System Presets Config: Enter System Presets Number: (01-99) - Enter Preset Description (*****) - Enter Preset Waveform (SINCGARS) - Enter OPMODE: (Frequency Hopping, Single Channel) - Enter Preset Name; (*******) - Enter Crypto Key (TEK 01-25, None) - Enter TX Power Level: (High, Medium, Low, User) - Enter Traffic Mode: (Data/Voice, Data, Voice) - Enter Baud Rate: (16000,) - Enter DTE Data Mode Synchronous - Enter Hopset Compartment: 01 [F###] - 06 [F###] - Enter SC Frequency: ##. #### MHz ENTER SC Squelch Type: (Tone, Off, Noise) - Enter
Press 8/PGM SINCGARS Config: Enter Master/Member: Enter SINCGARS Radio Type: (Member, Master) - Enter CUE Configuration: Enter CUE Frequency: (##. #### MHz) - Enter CUE Squelch Type: (Tone, Off, Noise) - Enter Enable CUE notify: (Yes, No) - Enter FH Voice Priority: Enter Channel Busy Priority: (Receive, Transmit) - Enter Retransmit Role: - Enter Retransmit Role: (None, Retransmit Station, Same Net ID TX-Only, Same Net ID RX- Only,) - Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 241
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW) HPW CHARACTERISTICS (DATA ONLY)
HPW is a LOS/SATCOM modulation selection that uses KG-84C encryption.
Redundant Mode 1 synchronization for increased data rates over UHF satellite links.
Baud rates for V3 and V4 are variable compatible with Harris AN/PRC-117G.
Channel Type HPW using Satellite HPW using NON-UFO Satellite
25 kHz Wideband 56 kbps 42 kbps 37 kbps 21 kbps 18 kbps
5 kHz narrowband 8.5 kbps 8.5 kbps 4.2 kbps 4.2 kbps
= Access modification of HPW Time of Day settings (+/- 30 seconds). = Allows most configuration changes for the HPW waveform. = Scrolls through the various main status screens for HPW.
Rate Indicator UFO (UHF Follow on satellite) – 25 kHz channel on UFO type satellite WB (Wideband) – 25 kHz channel on FLTSATCOM NB (Narrowband) – 5 kHz channel on either type of satellite (UFO or FLTSATCOM)
Idle – No active message, channel is free. Busy – Channel is being used by another set of radios. Token – Radio is passing a token. Calling – Radio is attempting to gain control of the channel. Sending – Radio is actively transmitting a message. Receiving – Radio is actively receiving a message.
Throughput Indicator Dependent on channel type:
LOW: 4.2 kbps N (NB), 21 kbps (WB), 18 kbps (UFO) MED: 8.5 kbps N (NB), 42 kbps (WB), 37 kbps (UFO) HIGH: NA (NB), NA (WB), 56 kbps (UFO)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 242
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW) Cheat Sheet
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW) COMSEC FILL (TEK or KEK)
Fill - Enter Waveform - Enter Waveform for key: (HPW) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS102) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill - Enter
Crypto Mode: (KG84, Satcom) - Enter Crypto Mode: (KG84, Satcom) - Enter Key Type: TEK (01-25) - Enter Key Type: TSK (01-25) - Enter Key Number: (01- 25) - Enter Key Number: (01- 25) – Enter
Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Load another key: (No, Yes) - Enter
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW) (Radio)
Press 8/PGM Radio Config - Enter General Config – Enter Data Port Config - Enter General HW Config - Enter HW Interface: (USB-152A &117G, RS232-117G) - Enter Polarity: Normal, TX Inverted, RX Inverted Inverted,
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW) (Radio LOS)
Press 8/PGM System Presets: - Enter System Presets Config: - Enter System Presets Number: (01-99) - Enter Preset Description (*****) - Enter Preset Waveform (HPW) - Enter Preset Name: (********) - Enter Network Type: (Satcom, LOS) - Enter TX Frequency: (###. #####) - Enter RX Frequency: (###. #####) - Enter Crypto Mode: (KG84, None) - Enter Crypto Key: (TEK01 – TEK25) - Enter Transec Key: (TSK01=TSK25) - Enter APP: (WTM, IP) - Enter TX Power: (High-20W, Medium-8W, Low-2W) - Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 243
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (Radio SATCOM)
Press 8/PGM System Presets: ENT System Presets Config: ENT System Presets Number: (01-99) ENT Preset Description (*****) ENT Preset Waveform (HPW) ENT Preset Name: (********) ENT
Network Type: (Satcom, LOS) ENT Use Custom Freq (Yes, No) ENT Use Custom Freq (Yes, No) Enter Channel Number: (###) ENT TX Frequency :( ###.#####) ENT RX Frequency: (###.#####) ENT Crypto Mode: (KG84, None) ENT Crypto Mode: (KG84, None) ENT Crypto Key: (TEK01 – TEK25) ENT Crypto Key :( TEK01 – TEK25) ENT Transec Key: (TSK01=TSK25) ENT Transec Key: (TSK01=TSK25) ENT HPW Baud Rate: WB, UFO NB,) ENT HPW Baud Rate: WB, UFO, NB) ENT APP: WTM, IP ENT APP: WTM, IP ENT TX Power: (High, Medium, Low) ENT TX Power: (High, Medium, Low) ENT
Press 7/OPT HPW TOD – Enter Configure HPW TOD – Enter Use System Clock? NO (Yes if using GPS) Current HPW Date: ##-##-## - Enter Current HPW Time: ##:##:## - Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 244
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (Computer/Software (Win 7))
1. Turn on PC Open Device Manager: Control Panel > Device Manager Expand Ports (COM & LPT) > Plug in USB Cable > Identify which Com Port is “Harris PPP Serial Port”
Note: If USB drivers are needed, direct the install from USB Drivers folder on radio drive, IE E: RED1234567) Step 2
2. Open SOMPE Configurator > Additional Software and Resources > Install NRDI Drivers > Pick com port that Harris PPP serial Port Used > Install Driver
3. Open HPW Software
4. File > Import Database: > Find HPW Address books you want (Highlight the on you want – Open > Choose “YES” to overwrite.
5. Highlight your station, right click and select properties. Check Local Station? OK >
6. Highlight your radio, right click and select properties. > Radio Model: Your radio. Select Connection Properties > Ensure Dial-up Networking: Harris Automatic IP Radio Connection (COM#) > Ok > Ok
7. Generate routes for my network > Generate routes for: All stations > Ok Highlight Message Queue.
8. Click “traffic light” Icon Button > Observer software at IDLE and RT show RSS indication
9. Set up MS Outlook Email Options (SOP) File > Open > Mail > Replies and forwards (Do not include original message) > Ok
10. Ready to TX/RX Emails
Shut down
Delete Inbox, sent items, deleted items (Control A – Delete)
Click on traffic light to shut down Outlook
Return HPW software to reginal setting. (Delete address book, Delete HPWNET)
Exit HPW software.
PC shut down
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 245
HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (Creating database) Address Book)
Computer/Software step
1. Open HPW Software
2. Right click domain and select add domain (as per SOI)
a. Right click your domain and add stations to domain (as per SOI)
b. Right click your station(s) and add Radios to stations (as per SOI)
3. Click radio networks, add network
4. Right click your network; properties, net membership, add all
5. From menu select file, export database. Name the file and save it.
6. Transfer the file to HPW net operators.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 246
PDA-184 CHEAT SHEET
Install PDA-184
1. Set up radio in CT/DATA preset (If in DAMA/IW Mode, get to “Connected/Idle”)
2. Install data cable to RT & COMPUTER (Open Device Manager). Insure computer recognizes PDA-184 Cable and the Driver are installed. (Cable is seen as an “Unknown” RS232 Sync Cable). The driver is in the OS. Search automatically for driver.
3. Click on Sompe Configurator > Additional Software & Resources > Install (Client Version)
Open PDA-184 software
4. Setup Address Book: Add Stations: (Minimum of 2) Station settings: Station ID: ###, Station Sign: XXXXXX> ADD Check Selected Destination Address Line Number Click “Apply Changes” if possible
5. From pull down menu: settings > PDA184 Settings (F1) or F1 button. Check & set the following: Mil-Std-184 a. Set your station ID number: ## Ops Mode: IW, CPM, DAMA = PSK, FSK, Manual IW = IW (CPM, Vinson, ANDVT) CPM = KG84 (1-4/A-D) NB = DAMA (ANDVT, KY99, KY99A) PSK WB = FSK (VINSON, BASIC, KY57) Global Settings (default) Radio Settings (pick your radio & encryption type) Email settings Select field station Set IP Gateway (#) number if doing EMAIL (OUTLOOK) Device Settings – RS 232 Synchronous (Typical)
9. Click “OK”
10. Click “Apply Changes Now”
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 247
Delete all traffic files
1. In “MIL184G” folder, then “log” folder, empty the three folders located here (“activity”, “chat”, “and station”). 2. In “MIL184G” folder, then “RXDir”, delete all files. 3. If you saved files anywhere else on the computer, they need to be deleted if no longer needed for transmitting. 4. Empty recycle bin.
FILE MESSAGE FORMAT EXAMPLE ALL ATTACHED FILE MSG’S WILL BE IN .TXT FORMAT (NOTEPAD)
FILE NAMING SCHEME
Student Number, Internal Authenticator, Message Number, Message Proword
Example: 69BEVIS 02BORIS .TXT
69 BEVIS 02 BORIS (This is the Subject line if sending email)
P7X DE R8J RR UNCLAS 011630ZJAN14 02 BORIS AAA 40 TROOPS BBB MOVING SW IN A COLUMN CCC 17SPU123456 DDD 82ND ABN BRIGADE EOM
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 248
DEMAND ASSIGNED/MENT MULTIPLE ACCESS (DAMA)
WHAT IS DAMA? Demand Assignment Multiple Access is a method of gaining efficiency in the use of UHF SATCOM channels through automated channel sharing. Demand based assignment means that unused transponder space can be dynamically reallocated in near real-time on the basis of precedence. This will increase the loading efficiency by providing roughly four to twenty times the information throughput of current systems. A channel is divided by a DAMA CONTROL STATION (PCC) into segments called “time slots”. A user terminal interacts with the control station, which dynamically allocates time slots for that user’s communications. Channel resources are allocated on the basis of current needs and network rankings. Any unused DAMA channel resources are available to be shared by everyone.
ARCHITECTURE – SATELLITES Fleet Satellites (FLTSAT) Air Force Satellite Packages (AFSAT) UHF Follow-on Satellites (UFOs) Locations Capacity DAMA Control
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 249
Primary Channel Controllers (PCC’s) 1. CONUS/LANT - Norfolk, VA 2. PAC/CONUS - Hawaii 3. LANT/IO - Naples, Italy 4. IO/PAC - Guam
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 250
25 KHz FRAME STRUCTURE
1. Channel Control Orderwire (CCOW) 2. User Segments A, B, & C 3. Range 4. Link Test 5. Return Channel Control Orderwire (RCCOW)
DELAYS ON DAMA CHANNELS 1. How long it takes to Get Service Depends on: a. Channel Contention i.Number of Users trying to gain access b. Queuing Delay i.Type of Service ii.Number of Users iii.User Precedence (R, P, I, F, FO, EA) c. Waveform Delay i.Frame Length ii.Specified Response Time
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 251
25-kHz DAMA CAPABILITIES
1. Access to a channel 2. Two-Party Calls 3. Conference Calls 4. Paging 5. Orderwire Responses 6. Place Call / Terminate Call 7. Send Status B 8. Out-of-Service
1. PATIENCE IS KEY TO OPERATING IN THE DAMA MODE! 2. The more practice you have, the easier it is to use! 3. Commo plan is the way to go for assured access! 4. Despite the perceived problems with DAMA, Remember - You could have been denied access if it weren’t for the DAMA CAPABILITY!!!!
USING DAMA
1. Orderwires sent between the terminals and controllers are encrypted via separate keys and COMSEC devices – ensure that you have both! 2. Understand what the requirements are for the specific type channel you are using (25-kHz or 5-kHz) 3. Know which control station is the Primary Channel Controller (PCC)! 4. Utilize the Satellite Access Request (SAR) for all DAMA requests. a. Identify all terminal addresses every time b. Assign Precedence to each terminal address c. Request Network Address d. Submit data rates required – 75 bps to 16 kbps on 25-kHz DAMA and 75 to 2400 bps 5-kHz DAMA e. CALL THE CONTROLLER AND CONFIRM SATELLITE ACCESS AUTHORIZATION (SAA) AND THAT ALL REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED!!
USING DAMA – ACCESSING THE SATELLITES
1. SAA received and confirmed 2. Terminal presets and initial access to the channels (25-kHz and 5-kHz) are similar – terminology major difference. 3. COMSEC and Orderwire keys must be loaded (Orderwire keys in first 4 positions!) 4. Preset the channel information (channel number, mode of operations, COMSEC device, data rate, type of DAMA, Configuration Code, encrypted orderwires, DAMA operations, and ranging). 5. Preset database information (terminal address, guard list with network address, 25- kHz or 5-kHz information as required)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 252
25-KHz DAMA TERMINOLOGY
1. Terminal Address – unique address permanently assigned to a person, which is programmed into the terminals a. Also known as Terminal Node Address, Terminal Base Address or TBA 2. Network Address – provided to the net via the SAA. Changes occur based on satellite access request, satellite footprint, number of networks requested. a. Also known as Guard b. Two types of Guard Address i. Common Guard – unlimited users and preassigned time slot ii. Private Guard – limited to 64 terminals in network, must identify NCS/ANCS of net (only ones able to call the net), and NO preassigned time slot c. MUST be programmed into all terminals via the Guard List d. When using NCS Controller, also known as Subnet Address – same limitations as stated for Guards 3. Guard List – used in the terminal for receiving calls to other than the Terminal Address. a. ALWAYS place guard address in the Guard List b. May place up to 15 addresses in Guard List – any combination of terminal and network addresses 4. SEND STATUS B – used to notify the controller that the terminal is in operation. Also used when any major changes are made to the Current Mode 5. Place Call – used to request access to the channel for communications a. Two Party Call – only one address (terminal or network) is called – may be timed or may select indefinite b. Conference Call – up to six different address may be called (only one may be a network address). Must be timed – 0-60 seconds, minutes, hours, or days. 6. Terminate Call – indicates to the controller that you have completed communications for now. a. Automatic when time expires on conference call b. Can be done prior to completion c. Must be done by all terminals except last – penultimate terminal actually completes the service d. Two party calls are manually torn down i. With one other terminal – one terminal tears down ii. With private network – initiator tears down, communications completed. Otherwise, each terminal tears down except last. 7. Out of Service– used to let the controller know terminal is off the air a. Code – not required b. Time – not required c. Precedence – not required d. Once terminal has received orderwires, it is back in network – highly advised that operator send a Status B message!
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 253
DAMA TERMINOLOGY 1. Silent – 5-kHz DAMA – terminal does not transmit, range nor respond to orderwires unless Operator initiated 2. EMCON – 25-kHz and 5-kHz – terminal does not transmit, range nor respond to orderwires 3. Active Ranging – terminal periodically ranges to the satellite 4. Fixed Ranging – terminal computes range to satellite based on information supplied via the database 5. Paging – 25-kHz DAMA – allows the operator to signal another terminal on the same channel 6. Multi-hop – 5-kHz DAMA – ability to transmit to any terminal address in any footprint while operating in DAMA mode via voice or data communications
5 Things Required for DAMA Communications
1. TEK 2. TSK (OW Key) 3. TBA 4. Guard Address 5. DAMA Preset
AC Mode Report Codes
04-Port disconnect constant key offender. 56-More than on entry in Guard List for a single port. 57-Can't activate a network outside of its authorized access period. 58- Requesting terminal type is listed as NOT SUPPORTED. 59-invalid network address (es) in Guard list. 60-Request corrupted. 61-Requested party is busy. 62-Requested device is out of service. 63-Requested party is logged out or is logged in to a different home channel. 64-Invalid teardown request. 65-No compatible resource available to support this network. 66-Your terminal type cannot be connected to the requested guard number. 67-Your terminal cannot communicate on the assigned channel. 68-Log Out report must be initiated from port 1. 69-Terminal ID duplicates an existing operational address. 70-Requesting party's guard list does not contain guard address or time available is less than minimum required. 71- Service Request Access Restriction Violation. 72-Requesting party already has an outstanding queued request or no time slots available with the required burst rate.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 254
73-Requesting party is not authorized to activate All-Call or required resource is currently assigned to another service and cannot be preempted. 74-Requested terminal is already connected to a DASA service. 75-Request canceled by user. 76-Queued call canceled; service queue time-out timer expired. 77-Your terminal does not exist in the (CC) database. 78-Request queue I currently full. 79-Queued call canceled; connection is no longer possible. 80- Enter a Configuration Code and try again. 81-Required data rate can't be supported. 82-Requested party unknown. Check call directory and try again. 83-Cannot add users to this guard. 84-Cannot add a guard to your existing call. 85-Requesting party is not authorized to activate this guard. 86-Requesting party is not a member of this Private Guard. 87-Requested party's terminal is unauthorized or zeroized. 88-Requesting party’s device is not compatible with this guard. 89-Requested party has no compatible baseband device. 90- None of the users requested is available. 91-Connection could cause contention or connection could cause contention for half- duplex terminals. 92-Not all requested parties could be connected. 93-Other Link Test in progress. 94-Unable to perform frequency switching required for this connection. 95-Demand Assigned activation disabled for this guard. 96-No DASA channel available. 97-Party is already connected to a DAMA time slot. 98-Too many guards specified in this request or more than one network address was specified in the request. 99-Reserved for TD1271 home Channel Change notification or terminal displays this code upon receipt of a command to change its home channel.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 255
DAMA Cheat Sheet
DAMA COMSEC FILL (TEK or KEK for DAMA)
Function switch to Fill
Fill - Enter Waveform - Enter Waveform for key: (DAMA) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS102) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill - Enter Crypto Mode: (ANDVT) - Enter Key Type: TEK Key Number: (01- 25) – Enter Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Load another key: (No, Yes) - Enter
DAMA COMSEC FILL (Order wire for DAMA)
Function switch to Fill
Fill - Enter Waveform - Enter Waveform for key: (DAMA) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS102) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill - Enter Crypto Mode: (Satellite, KG84, Vinson, Fascinator, ANDVT,) - Enter Key Type: TSK Key Number: (01- 25) - Enter Classification: (Unclassified, Secret, Confidential, Top Secret) - Enter Load another key: (No, Yes) - Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 256
DAMA Preset
Press 8/PGM System Presets: Enter System Presets Config: Enter System Presets Number: (01-99) - Enter Preset Description: (*****) - Enter Preset Waveform: (DAMA) - Enter Waveform Mode: (DAMA, Dedicated) - Enter DAMA Mode: (183A (25) 182A (5k)) - Enter Channel: Enter Channel number: (###) - Enter (As Per SOI) Transmit capability: (Full (TX Enabled), EMCON (RX Only) - Enter Constant Key Port: (NO/YES) – Enter Set custom channels: (NO/YES) - Enter Ranging: Enter Ranging method (Active, Fixed) - Enter Platform Config (Slow moving, Fast moving) – Enter Address: Enter Base Address: Enter Base Address: (#####) - Enter (Your TBA as Per SOI) Guard List: Enter Add: Enter Address to Add: (#####) - Enter (As Per SOI) Press Clear, back to Address, Arrow down to Transec Transec: Enter Order wire Encryption (0ff/On) - Enter Key Location TSK; (01-25, None) (Load 0-3 TSK01) (Load 4-7 None) - Enter I/O: Enter Port Config: Enter DAMA config: Code (###) - Enter (As Per SOI) Crypto Mode: (ANDVT STD 2400 BPS) - Enter Crypto TEK: (TEK 01-25) - Enter Training Frames: (20) - Enter ANDVT Fade Priority: (PTT Allowed, PTT Inhibit) - Enter Traffic: Enter Traffic Mode: (Data/Voice, Voice, Data) - Enter Voice Mode: (MELP, LPC, CVSD) - Enter DASA OPT Code: (010, 008, 137-145, 013-021) - Enter (N/A) Power: Enter TX Power: (00-10 DB from full) (0) - Enter Preset Name: Enter Preset Name: (********) - Enter 5 kHz message Mode: Enter (N/A) 5 kHz message mode: (Manual, Automatic) Enter (5K DAMA Only) EXIT: Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 257
DAMA Call
Press DAMA Config: - Enter Geneal Config – Enter Destinations – Enter Define Destination – Enter Select Destination: (01-50) - Enter Destination Name: (*****) - Enter Destination Type: (25k AC, 5k, 25k DC) – Enter Destination Address (#####) – Enter EXIT:
To Acquire channel:
1. Pull up DAMA preset in main operation screen a. Radio will automatically start the login process b. Radio will acquire downlink and range 2. Once at connected idle send status B from button 1/Call
FACTS THAT MUST BE TRUE TO GET PAST ACQUIRING
1. Antenna on correct azimuth and elevation 2. Coax properly connected to antenna and radio 3. DAMA preset must be on an approved channel number in CT 4. OW encryption must be set to ON 5. Correct OW key segment loaded in correct OW position 6. Antenna must be serviceable 7. Coax cable must be serviceable
Send status Report B: ENTER
Place call as per SOI using button 1/Call to pass traffic
Place Call: ENTER Select Destination: ENTER Dest: 01 ADDR: (######) ENTER Duration (00-59 (seconds, minutes, hours, days) ENTER Precedence(Routine, Emergency Action, Flash Override, Flash, Immediate, Priority)
Use button 1/call to terminate call when done passing traffic.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 258
ANW2C (PRC-117G)
ANW2 is a wideband high-bandwidth waveform in the Ultra High Frequency (UHF) band that allows simultaneous voice and high-speed data capabilities.
Frequency ranges:
PRC-117G PRC-152A 225.6000 -1999.3950 MHz 225.6000 -449.4000 MHz (225 MHZ – 2 GHZ) (225 – 450 MHZ).
1. ANW2C is a Mobile Ad-Hoc Networking (MANET) waveform. 2. Can be configured for networks of up to 30 radios and bandwidth of 1.2 or 5 MHz 3. Ad-Hoc Networking a. Network forms automatically. b. Self-Healing c. Automatic data routing & data relay.
ANW2 supports the following operational features:
1. Ad-Hoc Networking a. Network Forms Automatically – No pre assigned net master or infrastructure is needed. b. Self-Healing - Network tolerates loss of any node. c. Relay - Any radio is able to relay data packets (D) or voice (V) between two radios not within range of each other. d. GPS reception is not needed for network formation. e. When operating as a GUEST node, the V Key and 1-Hop fields are replaced with GUEST on the preset status screen.
ADVANTAGES OF ANW2C
ANW2 MANET
1. Many Simultaneous users. ANY SIMULTANEOUS USERS. 2. Simultaneous voice and data. 3. Automatic secure data relay. 4. IP Protocol standard data provides seamless connection into any network. 5. HAIPE standard encryption provides END-TO-END security for up to Top Secret/SCI Data and can manage multiple classification on one network (256 Bit Key) 6. Automatic key management with Firefly Vectors. 7. High speed data networking at on- air rates up to 5 MBPS.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 259
LEGACY WAVEFORM
1. One transmitter at time. 2. Voice and Data, but not both at the same time. 3. Relay requires special repeater systems and requires data to be de-crypted and re- encrypted, leavening a weak security point. 4. Proprietary cumbersome “STOVEPIPE” RS-232, MIL-188 Simple and data messages. Cumbersome and expensive standard internet integration between different vendor systems often requires Non-standard “SIDE APPLIQUE” style converter boxes. 5. Single key security is risky. Key loss of station overrun compromise the entire network. Network security can only operate at one classification level. 6. Manual key management requiring manual re—keying or cumbersome OTAR’s 7. Maximum POINT-TO-POINT Data rates up to 16 KBPS.
ANW2 Voice Operations
ANW2 voice operations will behave similarly to any half-duplex digital voice over VULOS waveform, except data operations can be simultaneously occurring. Voice is MELP 2400 digital voice using MEDLEY encryption and is transmitted simultaneously with IP data.
ANW2 Data Operations
Data operations over ANW2 will occur just like any other Ad-Hoc IP network. The data application will send the data to the destination, and the routing will be taken care of by the ANW2 network. IP data is transmitted in data frames.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 260
Building a Mission Plan in the CPA
1. Before you open the CPA, map your network out on a white board or on paper. 2. Once you are programming in the CPA you don’t want to have to stop and hunt down information. 3. Information you will need includes, number and names of ANW2 nodes, operating frequencies, Bandwidth, SA custom ID numbers, IP networking information, additional channel preset information, etc. 4. This planning sheet will help you set up your plan.
CPA Mission Planning Sheet ANW2 to SIPR
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 261
CPA Mission Planning Sheet Additional Presets
NOTE
For proper HAIPE and TRANSEC operation, system and ANW2 time on all radios must be set within five minutes of each other to be able to form an ANW2 net, and to be able to pass data. HAIPE requires all radios in the network to have accurate System Time. TRANSEC requires all radios in network to have accurate ANW2 Time-of-day configuration.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 262
ANW2C COMSEC FILL
Function switch to Fill
Fill - Enter Waveform - Enter Waveform for key: (ANW2C) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS101) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill - Enter Key Type: TEK Key Number: (01- 25) – Enter Load another key: (No, Yes) – Enter
Fill - Enter Waveform - Enter Waveform for key: (HAIPE) - Enter Fill Device: (SKL) - Enter Fill Port Type: (DS101) - Enter Fill Menu Press ENT to Initiate Fill - Enter Key Type: TEK Key Number: (01- 25) – Enter Load another key: (No, Yes) – Enter
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 263
ANW2C CHEATSHEET
1. Open CPA software 2. Under Tools, select Application Options, Choose radio type to be used in plan 3. Go to Red IP Networking and set default mask and subnet info. Click OK 4. Create a blank Topology 5. In Topology select radio type and add in number of radios as needed 6. Highlight all radios 7. Under General menu set CT Override as desired 8. Enable Data, SA, Beacon, Mission Plan and set as needed if used 9. Under Accessories, set KDU functions as needed 10. Under GPS change settings as needed 11. Under Red IP Networking, Red Network Interface, Enable Red ICMP, Red Ping Processing and DHCP Note: Gateway IP can’t be in the DHCP Pool 12. Under Black IP Networking, Black Network Interface, Enable Black ICMP and Black Ping Processing 13. Under Black IP Networking set Black Ethernet MTU to 1370 14. Individual Radios can be selected and named as needed and adjust DHCP pool 15. Add different type of radio and go to step 6. 16. Add ANW2C Network Cloud 17. Link all radios to cloud 18. Select ANW2C Network Cloud 19. Under General, set Frequency, Bandwidth, and TX Power as needed 20. Set Dynamic Capacity Allocation to Enabled 21. Under Epoch Configuration set Digital Voice Relay hops to # of radios minus 1 22. Set Range to 40Km (Normal Mode) for ground opns. or 85Km (Sky mode) if airborne platforms used 23. In Global tab select Key Chain Configuration and set keys to slots by month. (EX. TEK 01 = Jan, TEK 02 = Feb and so on). 24. Multicast Table – Used to add additional device IPs if needed, i.e. SA (Must have 1) 25. Select TSK Configuration 26. Generate new keys for slots 1 – 11. These keys are unique to this plan 27. Repeat steps 2-21 for additional networks 28. Validate Plan 29. Save the plan as a file 30. Transfer CPA plan file or mission plan file to users 31. Users select and Program Mission Plan File and/or Install/Activate Mission Plan File
TO OPERATE IN ANW2C NETWORK
32. Load current HAIPE key under ANW2 waveform (DS-101, Fill) 33. Load same HAIPE key under HAIPE position by month (DS-101, Fill) 34. Attach ANW2 antenna and bring up ANW2C preset 35. RT will automatically link to network and look for other radios in net
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 264
IW Setup (PRC-117G)
1. Load waveform TEK (voice and data key (VINSON, ANDVT, & KG-84)).
2. Load IW TSK key (satellite)
3. Set up IW information preset as per SOI; 8/PGM key, system presets, systems preset config; If doing PDA-184, set data mode to PDA-184.
4. Program IW information. As per SOI, 8/PGM key. a. IW Config i. Services, assign service numbers. 1. Edit services available ii. Satellite 1. Edit a. Choose Satellite b. Set sat name, c. Sat ID d. Downlinks (as per SOI).
5. Select IW preset in main operation screen.
6. Set IW Config (7/OPT) a. COMSEC b. Data mode – SYNC/PDA-184 c. Services – Select service to auto connect to d. TX options
7. Put antenna on correct AZ & EL and connect coax cable to RT and antenna.
8. Pull up IW preset and acquire channel.
9. Select 1/call button and connect to appropriate service number.
10. You are ready to TX/RX.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 265
CPA 1. Open CPA software
2. Create a bland Topology
3. From menu select File, Save As, Name and save the file. Update periodically as you work.
4. Under Tools, select Application Options
5. Choose radio type to be used in plan
6. Set any starting parameters as needed
7. In topology select radio type and add in number of radios as needed
8. Highlight all radios
9. Under General menu set parameters as desired
10. Under Accessories, set KDU functions as needed
11. Under GPS change settings as needed
12. Individual Radios can be selected and named as needed
13. Add Network Cloud
14. Link all radios to cloud
15. Highlight Network Cloud
16. In Properties pane, set network settings as pers SOI
17. Repeat steps 2 -16 for additional preset networks (Use existing radios)
18. Validate plan
19. Users select their individual radio, right click and select program
20. On RT go to Load and Install the mission plan for user radio
21. Move Function switch to CT
22. Press 7/OPT button and activate mission plan
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 266
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 267
AN/PSC-5C RT-1672C, AN/PSC-5D RT-1672D (MBMMR)
AN/PSC-5C RT-1672C, AN/PSC-5D RT-1672D (MBMMR) (30 – 420 MHz) (30 – 512 MHz)
LOS 30-419.995 MHz LOS 30-511.995 MHz Sincgars 30-87.975 MHz Sincgars 30-87.975 MHz Beacon 30-419.975 MHz Beacon 30-511.975 MHz Maritime 156-162.025 MHz Maritime 156-162.025 MHz Havequick 225-399.975 MHz Havequick 225-399.975 MHz Satcom 225-399.995 MHz Satcom 225-399.995 MHz Dama 251.850-317.325MHz Dama 251.850-317.325MHz IW IW SCM SCM
20 W+ 2dB Satcom (225-400Mhz) 20 W+ 2dB Satcom (225-400Mhz) 20 W+0, -2dB Satcom (290-320Mhz) 20 W+0,-2 dB Satcom (290-320Mhz) 8 W +2 dB LOS FM Sincgars 20 W+0.5,-1.5 Db LOS FM Sincgars 6 W –0, +2dB LOS AM 10 W +1.5dB LOS AM
Operating Modes : Presets Beacon 2 Scan 10 LOS 20 Maritime 20 Have Quick (AM) 20 SINCGARS 20 UHF SATCOM 20 UHF DAMA SATCOM 30 IW (intergraded waveform) 1 SCM (Special Communication Mode) 20 Comsec fill positions (F1) 20 Positions 01-19 TEK’s 19 Position 20 (OTAR) KEK 1 Order wire (OW) (F2) currently we only use positions 1-4 8
Power Requirements: Input Voltage is 21 to 32 Vdc (24 Vdc Batteries) Two BB-390A/U (7 hr.), BB-590/U, BB-2590 (10 hr.), or BA-55590/U (13.5 hr.) 21Vdc minimum to turn on radio.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 268
Channels 9 – 128, 192, 193,240-247 25k Wide Band (WB) Channels 129 – 191, 194-239 5k Narrow Band (NB) Channel 999 is used when you don’t have the channel number or for a Non-Standard (NS) Satellite frequency.
LOS - Selectable from 30-512MHz, Plain text (PT)/Cipher text (CT); 20 LOS presets available.
Beacon - A swept frequency beacon signal is generated on the international distress frequencies of 121.5 MHz or 243.0 MHz; 2 beacon presets are available.
Scan - Channel scanning available in LOS, SATCOM, and Maritime modes; Plain text or Cipher Text voice only; 10 Scan presets are available.
Maritime - Provides ship-to-shore communications on Maritime Channels; 20 Maritime presets are available. Guard scan also available.
Have Quick II - Provides US/NATO standard ECCM frequency hopping capability in UHF band; 20 HQ presets are available. Guard scan also available.
SINCGARS - Provides ECCM frequency hopping capability in Low-VHF band; includes both ICOM and SIP modes/capabilities; 20 SINCGARS presets available.
UHF SATCOM - Dedicated channel SATCOM; 20 presets avail; DATA rates up to 56 kbps on a 25 kHz channel.
UHF DAMA SATCOM - 5kHz or 25kHz; 30 presets avail; Data rates up to 16kbps on 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels; three DAMA sub-modes including 5 kHz DAMA; 25 kHz AC DAMA; 25 kHz DC DAMA; 60 additional sub-mode presets available which automates DAMA login and service activation.
AN/PSC-5D Components
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 269
Power-up, Bit & Menu Options
Set the mode switch to the PT Position. The RT will display the “Initializing Radio” message for about five seconds. When selecting PT, CT, F1, or F2 after turning power on or zeroization, the “Initing Modules” message will appear for about five seconds.
During Power-Up BIT, the display will alternately show a checkerboard test pattern and display the latest software version.
After about 50 seconds, the Power-Up BIT will be completed.
If BIT passes, the display will show the last active mode before power was removed.
If Bit Test fails and have a 5 or 6 run a filter tune.
The AN/PSC-5C/D is ready for operation.
Capabilities and Features
Menu-driven Operation
Internal Diagnosis (Built-In-Test (50 sec): BIT - BIT, at the system level, provides a thorough GO/NO GO checkout of all critical functions for LOS, SATCOM, and DAMA modes of operations. Checks 98% of system. 2% not checked is Red COMSEC functions.
Embedded COMSEC (CCI): - The radio set incorporates embedded COMSEC functions. They provide VINSON (KY-57), ANDVT (KYV-5/KY-99) and SABER/Fascinator compatible voice encryption and VINSON (KY-57), ANDVT (KYV-5/KY-99), KG-84A, and SABER/Fascinator compatible data encryption. The radio set allows encrypted operations with external encryption devices such as the KL-43C/KL-43F.
COMSEC Embedded Key Manager (CEKM)*
Embedded ADM/ADC: - Built in. Provides direct RS-232 interface with supplied computer-based messaging software.
Interoperability Features: The radio set is interoperable with other terminals over LOS, Maritime, HQ, SINCGARS, DAMA, and SATCOM communication links. The radio set needs no special set-ups for normal or COMSEC communications modes. When COMSEC is selected, no external equipment connections are required to communicate with other equipment using KY-57 (VINSON), KY-99 (ANDVT), SABER/Fascinator, and KG-84A.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 270
Operating Modes: The radio set has six basic operating modes for communications: LOS, Maritime, HQ, SINCGARS, SATCOM, and DAMA. Other operating modes include the Beacon mode, Scan Mode; retransmit mode, and a LOS sub-mode, Carrier Tone Controlled Squelch System (CTCSS).
Frequency/Channel Mode Presets: 20 presets for the LOS, Maritime, HQ, SINCGARS, and SATCOM modes and 30 presets for DAMA mode. There are also 2 Beacon presets and 10 Scan each containing 10 mode presets. Can be set/modified by operator locally/remotely.
DAMA Service Presets: 20 ADC, 20 5k DAMA service setup, 20 5k DAMA message queue, and 20 25k DAMA service setup presets. Can be set/modified by the operator locally or via remote control.
Memory: Radio stores in non-volatile memory the last operating mode and all presets. The COMSEC key variables, HQ WOD, SINCGARS variables, and HQ/SINCGARS Time-of-Day (TOD) are retained in memory as long as batteries are connected. To allow for battery replacement, keys are retained for a minimum of 2.5 minutes after battery removal.
Remote Control: The radio can be remotely controlled via the front panel auxiliary connector via the supplied Portable Remote Control Device (PRCD) or Smart Remote Control (via windows-based PC).
Guard Scan Operation: - Operates on LOS, Have Quick and Maritime
Alternately monitors the guard channel and main channel frequencies. Monitors each frequency for a time duration of 0.33 to 0.50 seconds when not in transmit or un squelched receive. Channel scanning resumes within five to eight seconds after the last reception or transmission.
Provides an emergency guard mode that automatically tunes the transmitter and the main receiver to the guard channel and disables the guard scan mode when activated.
Only transmits on the main channel independent of which channel is being scanned if emergency guard operation has not been enabled.
Channel scanning is stopped when a signal is detected on the main channel or guard channel, or when the RT is transmitting.
The main receiver is tuned to 243.000 MHz (UHF AM) for Have Quick or LOS, 225 to 400 MHz operation, 121.500 MHz (VHF AM) for LOS, 108 to 174 MHz operation, or 156.8 MHz (Channel 16) for Maritime operation. The guard scan or emergency guard functions are not selectable for SINCGARS and SATCOM Modes.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 271
Operates in LOS, Have Quick and Maritime modes VHF 108-174 MHz - 121.5 MHz UHF 225-400 MHZ - 243 MHz Maritime (Ch. 16) - 156.8 MHz
Types of Modulation:
Selectable: Amplitude Modulation (AM) Frequency Modulation (FM)
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) - (VINSON) Modulation rates of 12 kilobits per second (kbps) and 16 kbps PT and CT voice and data. Used in LOS and SATCOM modes.
Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - (ANDVT/MELP)
Continuous Phase Modulation (CPM) - (KG-84) - Modulation rates of 4800, 9600, 14.4k, 16k, 19.2k ,24k, 28k, and 38.4k. Used in SATCOM for symbol rates up to 28k. Used in LOS for symbol rates up to 38.4k. Symbol rates correspond to I/O data rates of 9600 bps to 76.8k bps.
Non-selectable: The receiver-transmitter will select the appropriate modulation based on the data rate of the I/O device selected.
Shaped Binary Phase Shift Keying (SBPSK) Shaped Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (SOQPSK) Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) Differentially Encoded Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DEQPSK)
PSC-5C (PR-1672C(C), Shadow fire II)
Power output in SATCOM mode is 20 Watts ± 2dB (Max output) from 225-400 MHz (in the 290 to 320 MHz band, power can be adjusted to 20 Watts +0, -2 dB)
Maximum power in all LOS FM modes including SINCGARS is 8 Watts +2dB
In all AM LOS modes, the maximum power output is 6 Watts –0, +2 dB (38dbm)
The power is adjustable in nominally 1 dB steps from 23 – 43 dB
PSC-5D (RT-1672D(C), Multi-band Multi-Mission Radio (MBMMR)
Power output in SATCOM mode is 20 Watts +2 dB (Max output) from 225-400 MHz (In the 290-320 MHz band, power can be adjusted to 20 Watts +0, -2 dB)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 272
Maximum power in all LOS FM modes including SINCGARS is 20 Watts +0.5, -1.5 dB except above 400 MHz, where the maximum power is 10 watts +1, -2 dB
In all AM LOS modes, the maximum power output is 10 Watts + 1.5 dB The power is adjustable in nominally 1 dB steps from 23 – 43 dB
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Operates at full power output at VSWRs up to 2:1.
Transmitter Squelch Tone 150 Hz (+/-4 Hz) audio signal with a peak deviation of 3000 Hz +/-500 Hz to meet interoperability requirements in the 30-88 MHz band for plain text FM voice operation. The signal is superimposed on the transmit carrier.
Database Cloning - Provides duplication of all operational data (including black encryption keys) from radio-to-radio using the supplied cloning cable, or from a PC using the supplied preset planning/loading software.
External GPS Interface - Accepts GPS timing and position information from an external GPS receiver to support Have Quick II and SINCGARS SIP ECCM operations; Includes provision for optional embedded GPS (transceiver spare slot).
External GPS Interface
Remote Control Operation
PC Remote Control Software - A windows-based software application used to provide a PC-based remote control capability of the radio, via a standard RS-232 interface.
Via Sat email Messaging User Software - A windows based program that provides the capability to send and receive email-like communications over RF channels.
Preset Planning /Loading User Software - Preset parameters selectable from the radio front panel can be programmed by a PC. It enables the downloading of over 142 total presets.
Man pack Antennas VHF/UHF 30 - 512 MHz (100 - 420 MHz on PSC-5C), 50 ohm impedance. Flexible VHF 30 - 88 MHz, 50 ohm impedance. AV-2055 Foldable man pack, 6-11 dB gain, 240 to 400 MHz satellite.
Fixed Mount Antennas Broadband VHF/UHF Antenna AV 452-7, 30 - 512 MHz, 50 ohm impedance. AV-2011 Satellite Antenna, 15 dB gain, 240 - 400 MHz
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 273
Power Amplifier: 50 Watts minimum for constant envelop signals (i.e. FM) and 10 Watts minimum carrier power for AM signals. In SATCOM mode output power is 100 Watts minimum for frequencies in the 290 to 320 MHz band.
External Speaker
PRCD Installation
Before installing the PRCD, load all COMSEC, order wire and TRANSEC keys as required. Also ensure PRCD interface is selected on the TERMINAL DATA menu.
Ensure that the Mode switch on both RT and PRCD is set to OFF.
Connect PRCD cable to R/T AUX connector. If using the remote/data adapter cable, connect PRCD cable to AUX I/O P4 on remote/data adapter cable.
If using mounting bracket, slide bracket on PRCD mount. The bracket allows the PRCD to be placed on a pistol belt or mounted to the vehicle dash with user-supplied hardware. Two mounting holes are provided on the clip.
PRCD Features
Identical Keypad and Menu Layouts as the Radio Front Panel, Eliminating Unique Training
Redundant Control to the Radio Front Panel - If You Break or Lose the PRCD, You Can Still Operate the Radio
Mode Switch for Power On/Off, Plain Text / Cipher Text Selection, and Zeroization (COMSEC and Order wire)
Rotary Controls to Set Volume and Squelch Levels (More User Friendly than Push Button Up/ Dn Keys) NVG Compatible Display and Operable with MOPP IV Gear
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 274
Size: 4.5”L X 3.0”W X 1.0”H, 3 Foot Coiled Cable Extends to 6 Feet
Rear mounting holes and supplied mounting bracket allows usage in Vehicular or Fixed Site Applications.
PC Remote Installation
Connect P1of remote/data user cable (PN 423204-801) to remote/data adapter (PN 423155-1) if in use, or directly to AUX connector on R/T. Next connect P3 of remote/data user cable to serial port on PC.
Power-Up, BIT & Menu Options
Remove antenna and any external devices connected to the radio set during BIT to prevent erroneous BIT errors.
Set the mode switch to the PT Position.
The RT will display the “Initializing Radio” message for about five seconds.
When selecting PT, CT, F1, or F2 after turning power on or zeroization, the “Initing Modules” message will appear for about five seconds.
During Power-Up BIT, the display will alternately show a checkerboard test pattern and display the latest software version.
After about 50 seconds, the Power-Up BIT will be completed.
If BIT passes, the display will show the last active mode before power was removed.
The AN/PSC-5C/D is ready for operation. This message will appear if a fault is detected during power-up BIT
Critical Fault Detected, Run Offline Bit to Isolate
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 275
If this message appears, press ESC and perform Terminal BIT (Hotkeys 5-1)
Menu Structure
MAIN MENU Hot Key 2(Database Options)
DATABASE MENU
0-PRESET OP MODE * 1-STATUS MSG
1-CURRENT MODE 2-GUARD LIST
2-DATABASE OPTIONS 3-SAT EPHEMERIS
3-SET PRESETS 4-INFO CODES
4-CONFIGURATION 5-COMSEC Key States
5-BIT OPTIONS 6-TIME OF DAY
6-MAINTENANCE 7-LOAD HQ FMT NET
7-STANDBY MODE 8-ERASE TRANSEC
9-CLONE MODE
0-Variable Database **
Hot Key 2-1 Status Msg
Line 1 - Shows message number and total messages in memory.
Lines 2-4 - Shows last 10 messages received. A Status Msg 03of 05 check mark is displayed in front of the message to Ranging Successful indicate that it has been read. (Appendix J for description) 01
01 - Shows how many times the present message has been received.
HOTKEY 2-2 Guard List (Only if doing DAMA) GUARD LIST VIEW The guard list is a set of addresses for which 1 ______a terminal receives services. The guard number 4 ______is the address of a subscriber or net that uses a 7 ______terminal. The service destination address must 10 ______match one of the guard addresses to be received 13 ______by the terminal.
HOTKEY 2-3 SAT Ephemeris Satellite Ephemeris SatID: U02 Manual Data entered in the SATELLITE EPHEMERIS Efct Date: ------and TERMINAL DATA menus is used for Mean Anomaly: 000000 making passive ranging calculations when Mean Motion: 000000 PASSIVE ranging is selected from the Eccentricity: 000000 DAMA menu. Argmt Perigee: 000000 longitudeAsn: 000000 Inclination: 000000
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 276
HOTKEY 2-4 Info Codes
Information Codes
DC 01 001
HOTKEY 2-5 Comsec Key States HOTKEY 2-6 Time of Day
Comsec Key Status Time of Day Key Type Update 1 VINSON 01 Set Type: SINC Year: 1980 Day: 000 2 ANDVT 05 3 4KG84 00 Hrs. 00 Min: 00 Sec: 00
4 ANDVT 00 5 NO KEY 6 NO KEY 7 NO KEY 8 NO KEY 19 NO KEY OTAR
HOTKEY 2-7 Load HQ FMT HOTKEY 2-8 Erase Transec (Frequency Management Training) Net
Load HQ FMT net ERASE TRANSEC
20 - 235.050 MWOD, Sincgars FH/LO
19 - 225.150
18 - 252.925 (ERASE)
17 - 239.950
16 - 271.950
15 - 267.850
14 - 262.450
13 - 257.250
5 - 279.750
HOTKEY 2-9 Clone Mode (Clone like radio) PSC-5D PSC-5C
Clone Mode Clone Mode
DAMA Address: ______Type: AN/PSC-5C
AltDAMA Addr: ______DAMA Address: ______
DS-101 Address: ______ALTDAMA Addr: ____
ADC Local Addr: _____ DS-101 Address: ______
IW Port Addr: ______ADC Local Addr: ____
(SEND) IW Port Addr: ______
(SEND)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 277
HOTKEY 2-0 PSC-5D only Variable Database No Keys match Sort
1 - Sort Variables
HOTKEY 4 (4-CONFIGURATION) HOTKEY 4-1 Terminal Data (only if doing Dama) Configuration menu Terminal Data 1- Terminal Data DAMA Adress: ------2- 5K DAMA I/O Rates Combat ID: ------3- I/O Device Setup DS-101 Address: 254 4- I/O ASYNC Mode Backlight Timer: 08 5- 25K DAMA Prgm CH Msg Release:MANUAL 6- Packet CSMA Index LAT: N 00:00 7- Audio Alert Tones LON: E 000:00 8- Satellite Channels Time: 00:00Z Platform: Stationary HOTKEY 4-2 (5K DAMA I/O Rates) Freq Band: Limited Remote OPT: PRCD 5K DAMA I/O Rates ANDVT/MELP: Fixed __75 __300 __600 ANDVT DATA: KYV-5 __1200 __2400 __4800 KG-84 Phasing: Medium __9600 __16K __19K
__36K __38K
HOTKEY 4- 3(I/O Device Setup) HOTKEY 4-4 (I/O Async Mode)
I/0 Device Setup I/O ASYNC Mode
DATA: Positive Data Bits: 8
TX Clock: Positive Parity Bits: N
RX Clock: Positive Stop Bits: 2
TX CLK: Master
TX/RX CLK: Gated
HOTKEY 4-7 (C) Audio Alert Tones Tone 1: 1200 Hz tone on for 100 msec, Enable Tones: off for 100 msec, repeating Paging: None Data Xfer: Tone 1 Tone 2: 1200 Hz tone on for 1250 msec, Srvc Assgn: Tone 2 off for 1250 msec, repeating Srvc Term: Tone 3 TX Reject: None Tone 3: 1200 Hz tone continuous Srvc Prmpt: Tone 1 CTIC Alarm: Tone 2 SCM No-GPS: Tone 3 IW Connected: None
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 278
HOT KEY 5 (5-BIT OPTIONS) HOTKEY 5-1 (Terminal BIT)
Bit Options AN/PRC-5 1- Terminal Bit Ver: 05.6 / 9 2- Satcom Loopback Bit in Progress 3 - Data Loopback Press ENT to Abort 4- Display Test 5- Keypad Test 6- Battery Level
Hot Keys 5-2. (Satellite Loopback) only on NB channel
Note: The test must be performed with Satcom Loop modulation on an approved SATCOM channel. Channel Number: ### (SEND) ESC to the Main Menu.
The display will show the current satellite channel. Satcom Loopback Executing Test Press the ENT key to initiate the test.
The result may be within the range of 000 to 255, or “test failed”. Satcom Loopback Test Successful If results less than 100 (or “Test Failed”), reposition RSS 125 antenna and try again.
The test can be run anytime when operating in the Satcom Loopback SATCOM mode with PSK modulation only Test Failed (switching from VINSON to ANDVT encryption will change modulation to PSK).
If the RSS (Relative Signal Strength) value is less than 100 or the “Test Failed” is displayed, try repositioning the antenna and repeat the test. If problem persists, contact Unit Maintenance.
HOTKEY 5-3 (Data Loopback) HOTKEY 5-4 (Display Test)
DATA LOOPBACK
Enabled
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 279
HOTKEY 5-5 (Keypad Test) HOTKEY 5-6 (Battery Level)
KEYPAD TEST BATTERY LEVEL Press ESC to End Last Key: ONE 25.2V
Battery Status
When using used batteries, the display may show the low battery warnings.
If this does occur on new Lithium batteries, perform the procedure described in the TM SOFIIS-00-G10-00297-00, paragraph 3.15 (BA-5590 Battery Pre-Conditioning). Otherwise, the batteries are discharging normally.
Msg 00:00Z 1 of 10 Msg 00:00Z 2 of 10 Batteries Depleted Batteries Low Batteries Very Low Operation Suspended Less than 22 Volts 01 less than 21 Volts Replace Batteries
When using a new BA-5590/U Lithium battery, the display may show low battery warning or the display may go blank. This will most likely occur during BIT, SATCOM, or DAMA operation at high power. If this does occur, refer to TM SOFIIS- 00-G10-00297-00, paragraph 3.15 (BA-5590 Battery Pre-conditioning).
The RT may turn off without giving a “Battery” message. This will occur when a battery near low status is required to provide high currents (transmit).
Rechargeable batteries will lose their charge faster than lithium batteries. NICAD batteries have the shortest discharge time. The BB390/U is a little better than the BB- 590/U. Lithium Batteries (BA-5590/U) have the longest discharge times.
There are no audible tones to indicate a low battery status. All indications of a low battery are visual only.
HOT KEY 6 (6-MAINTENANCE) * only used to access SCM mode
Maintenance 1- Review Bit Results 2- Erase Bit Results 3- Filter Tuning 4- Erase Parameters Only when you get a 5 or 6 5- Display Versions 6- Reset Timebase 7- Platform Config 8- External Crypto 9- DS-101 Station ID 0- Reserved
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 280
FILL PROCEDURES
ANDVT/MELP VINSON
KY-99, KY99A KY-57 KY-100 KY-58 USC-42 KY-99A Fascinator (12 kbps)
KG-84A KGV-11 (Internal Order wire encrypted)
Modes 1-4
Encryption Positions
F1 Position: DS-101 (all fills) DS-102 (COMSEC)
F2 Position: Order wire keys, HQ WOD/MWOD, and SINCGARS Variables
Update: To roll up key state (99 possible)
Zeroize: Clears all Keys and Variables
NOTES: Do not connect Fill device before Power-Up BIT has completed
TEK/KEK Fill (F1)
COMSEC Randomize Initializing
Proceed to F1 and Terminal For
Press ENT Twice Key Fill
(0)
AUTO102 Option
Displayed when “NONE” is selected from the Platform Configuration menu.
F1: COMSEC F1: COMSEC Connect Device DS-102 1-Transfer Variables ** COMSEC Key: _ _ Sel Device: AUTO102 Key Type: VINSN
With AUTO102 displayed, the radio will automatically sense DS-102 devices when they are turned on (CLR on CYZ-10) and proceed to the DS-102 COMSEC Fill menu. AUTO102 KEY FILL;
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 281
COMSEC Randomize Rotate function switch from PT to CT Proceed to F1 and Press ENT Twice Proceed to F1 press enter x 2 (0)
Connect DS-102 device F1: COMSEC (CYZ-10 in K13 protocol or KYK-13) Connect Device 1-Transfer Variables ** Select fill position (1-20) Sel Device: AUTO102
F1: COMSEC Select fill type (prep device) DS-102 COMSEC Key: 01 Key Type: VINSN
AN/PYQ-10 to AN/PSC-5C/D
1. Select the KEYS tab 2. Highlight the key that you want to load 3. Select the LOAD icon from the tool bar. 4. Set the Protocol and Activate Mode to DS-102 5. Select OK 6. When you get this Press INITIASTE Button prompt, Press the ENT button on the radio Press enter
Hotkeys 2, 5 (Verify Keys)
The TYPE filed show the current key type associated with the indicated Key number. For DS-101 non-Variable Database fill keys, the menu displays the first 14 of 16 characters of the DS-101 Text ID fill tag. For DS-102 filled variables, the menu displays the operator selected fill tag of #KG-84, ANDVT, FASCN, VINSN, and blank (when no fill in key position). UPDATE field shows the number of non-Variable Database updates received for the Key.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 282
The OTAR UPDATE field shows an update count when an OTAR is received. The UPDATE count is reset for each key when a new variable is loaded into that position.
COMSEC KEY STATUS COMSEC KEY STATUS KEY TYPE UPDATE KEY TYPE UPDATE 1 VINSON 00 11 NO KEY 2 ANDVT 00 12 NO KEY 3 VINSON 00 13 NO KEY 4 ANDVT 00 14 NO KEY 5 NO KEY 15 NO KEY 6 NO KEY 16 NO KEY 7 NO KEY 17 NO KEY 8 NO KEY 18 NO KEY 9 NO KEY 19 NO KEY 10 NO KEY OTAR
TRANSEC (F2)
NOTES: Be careful not to rotate past the F2 position.
F2: Transec Connect Device 1-Transfer Variables ** Sel Device: None
*PSC-5D only
Select Hot Key 1 (Fill Order wire) to load DAMA order wire info into the radio. F2: Transec untagged 1-Fill order wire 2-Fill HQ MWOD 3-Fill Sincgars 4-Manual entry WOD 5-Manual entry MWOD
Order wire Fill (F2)
Hot Key 1
Press 1 to select OW fill position, ensure device is on, F2 Fill Order wire press ENTER. Screen will say “Filling”. Then Filling “Key Filled”. Repeat for each OW position. Keys: Load: 1
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 283
Hot key 1 will display the F2 fill order wire F2 Fill Order wire display. Connect the fill device (AN/PYQ-10 Filling , KYK-13, KOI-18, or KYX-15) to the FILL Keys: 1 connector on the radio and follow the directions Load: 1 for the fill device to process the load. Refer to para 3.33.1 through para 3.33.2 for the procedures.
Main Menu Hotkeys 2, 5 (Verify Keys)
Verify Keys
COMSEC KEY STATUS COMSEC KEY STATUS KEY TYPE UPDATE KEY TYPE UPDATE 1 VINSON 00 11 NO KEY 2 ANDVT 00 12 NO KEY 3 VINSON 00 13 NO KEY 4 ANDVT 00 14 NO KEY 5 NO KEY 15 NO KEY 6 NO KEY 16 NO KEY 7 NO KEY 17 NO KEY 8 NO KEY 18 NO KEY 9 NO KEY 19 NO KEY 10 NO KEY OTAR
NOTE: The TYPE filed show the current key type associated with the indicated Key number. For DS-101 non-Variable Database fill keys, the menu displays the first 14 of 16 characters of the DS-101 Text ID fill tag. For DS-102 filled variables, the menu displays the operator selected fill tag of #KG-84, ANDVT, FASCN, VINSN, and blank (when no fill in key position).
UPDATE field shows the number of non-Variable Database updates received for the Key.
The OTAR UPDATE field shows an update count when an OTAR is received. The UPDATE count is reset for each key when a new variable is loaded into that position.
Verify Order wires
Move Function switch to F2 and change F2: Fill ORDERWIRE “none” to “DS-102”. Select Fill Order wire. KEYS: 1234_____ Look for 1234 on the line. LOAD: To verify that the keys are loaded in the Order wire field, move the mode switch to the F2 position and ensure that the numbers are above the line.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 284
COMSEC Key Update COMSEC Key Update TEK: ## Count: 99 Set mode switch to UPD Type: VINSN Working (Update) With cursor on TEK: ##, select COMSEC key (01-19)
Observe “Count” field and note current update count
Observe “Type” field and note encryption type for selected key
Press ENT key
Display shows updated action. Repeat steps for additional key updates
Deselect UPD position with mode switch
To verify updated material, use HOT key 2 (Database Options), then HOT key 5 (COMSEC Key States)
TYPE field selection - ANDVT, VINSN, FASCN, and #KG84.
Erase Keys (ZEROIZE)
If the radio is to be stowed, the TIMEBASE should be reset as well as ZEROIZING.
ZEROIZE COMSEC: Complete TRANSEC: Complete
All COMSEC keys (TEKS and KEKs) are erased.
All Transec keys (OWs, HQ and SINCGARS variables) are erased.
LOS/MARITIME SETUP
With the AN/PSC-5D Radio Set we will also load up to 20 presets. We must then come up in our LOS/Maritime assigned nets and communicate with the distant end.
Given applicable instruction on LOS/Maritime pre-mission setup using all students training and referenced materials, the student will be able to demonstrate, by performance, the skills and knowledge to load LOS/Maritime presets by completing the practical exercise with a GO.
LOS Introduction
Terminal provides for up to 20 Presets
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 285
Frequency range from 30 - 512 MHz on the PSC-5D and 30 - 420 MHz on PSC-5C
Four LOS sub-modes
Normal (Wideband channels) (Voice)
Private [Activates the Carrier Tone Controlled Squelch System (CTCSS)] Carrier Tone Controlled Squelch System (CTCSS) - When in the Private mode, the terminal encodes and decodes sub-audio frequencies used for transmit and receive audio. Selectable only when set for FM ops and in the 130-174MHz and 403-512MHz bands. PT ops only.
Narrow (6.25/8.33 kHz channels) (Para 3.74.2) Advanced Data Mode (ADM) (56 kbps high speed data)
Guard Scan Mode: The On selection activates the scan function between the main receive channel and the guard channel. Emergency selection disable the guard scanning and tunes the terminal to the guard frequency. Guard Scan is 121.500 MHz for VHF and 243.000 MHz for UHF.
NCD Operations: OTAR (embedded and external)
Hot Key 3, 1 (LOS Presets)
Normal (WB Voice) Narrow ADM-P## Set Mode Preset Private LOS -P01 20 Presets
TK01 AM VINSN V16k R 225.000 T 225.000 Normal Tpwr 38 dbm Guard: Off
Select KG-84 Mode 1 or 2 at data rates 38.4 kbps or higher. Provides more redundancy for preamble than Mode 3 or 4.
TK## - Values (1-19) Use Key 20 for NCD Ops only, no PTT. An alarm will sound if you transmit PTT.
COMSEC devices - KG-84 cannot be used in voice mode.
NOTE: For reliable communications, select KG-84 Mode 1 or 2 when using data rates of 38.4 kbps or higher. Modes 1 and 2 provide more redundancy for the KG-84
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 286
preamble thereby providing more reliable synchronization in the LOS modes than KG-84 Modes 3 and 4. NOTE: Refer Students to TM SOFIIS-00-G10-00297-00, para 3.74 tables 3-6 through 3-12. These are the LOS Frequency Operational Modes.
In the variant field, select one of the following: Normal (Normal Operations), Narrow (Narrow Band Operations using 2.5 kHz filters in the radio for 12.5/8.33 splinter channel operation, ADM-P## (using a PC), or Private (Activates the Carrier Tone Controlled Squelch System (CTCSS)).
LOS Presets (Guard)
Set Mode Preset LOS -P## TK## AM VINSN V16k R ###. ### T ###. ### Normal Tpwr 38 dbm Off/On Guard: Off
DETERMINES GUARD FREQUENCY: 30 - 88 MHz = None 108 - 174 MHz = 121.5 MHz (VHF) 225 - 400 MHz = 243.0 MHz (UHF)
Guard: Off - Values are None, Emergency, On, and Off. When ON, the radio will guard frequency band 121.000 MHz for VHF and 243.000 MHz for UHF. Emergency disables the guard scanning and tunes the terminal to the guard frequency. Emergency can only be selected in the Current Mode. None is a display only field and is present if the terminal is not being operated in the 108-174 MHz or 225-400 MHz bands.
Selections are the NORMAL field: Normal, Narrow, ADM-P##, or Private.
Private
Private mode: The private mode activates the Carrier Tone Controlled Squelch System (CTCSS). When in the Private mode, the terminal encodes and decodes sub- audio tone frequencies used for transmit and receive audio.
Private mode is only performed in PT. Set Mode Preset LOS -P## FM V R ###. ### T ###. ### Private Tpwr 38 dbm Guard: Off CTCSS CTCSS Rx ###. # T ###. #
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 287
Requires PT, FM, 130-174 MHz, 403-512 MHz
* CTCSS = Carrier/Continuous Tone Controlled Squelch System
MARITIME Preset VINSN, VOICE AND 16K are display only.
Set Mode Preset MARITM -P## TK## FM VINSN V16k Channel Table: Channel: ## USA Ship SHIP R ###. ### T ###. ### SHORE Display only Normal Tpwr 38 dbm Guard: Off
Frequency Offsets: USA ITNL (International)
Terminal provides for entry up to 20 presets. The parameters required for each preset are the channel number or frequency, ship or shore, guard operation and transmit power level.
Voice is the only operation permitted.
Channel number: numbers are from 01-28 and 60-88. Refer to table 3-14 and 3-15 in para 3.76.2.
Channels 06, 08, 72, and 77 are not defined for shore stations. They are ship-to-ship or ship-to-air simplex channels. See page 3-175 for frequencies.
LOS/MARITIME OPERATION
LOS AM Current Mode * LOS -P05 Sq- -04 TK## AM VINSN V16k R ###. ### T ###. ### Normal Tpwr 38 dbm TEK values: VINSN, FASCN, #KG -84 and BLANK.
DATA Rate:
In CT, only 16k is allowed for VINSN-Voice and VINSN Data, while 12k is allowed for FASCNator-Voice and FASCNator-Data.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 288
For #KG-84, values are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 16k and 19k(abbreviated for 19.2k due to character limitations on display), 28k (28.8)k, 32k, 38k (38.4k), 48k, 56k, 64k, and 76k (76.8k).
Guard Off - Values are None, Emergency, On and Off.
NONE is a display-only field and is present if the terminal is not being operated in the 108-174 MHz or 225-400 MHz frequency bands.
ON selection activates a scan between the main receive channel and the guard channel.
OFF disables guard scanning.
The EMERGENCY selection disables the guard scanning and tunes the terminal to the guard frequency. The emergency selection is only allowed in the Current Mode.
Variant field: Normal, Narrow (Selects the 2.5 kHz IF filters for 12.5/8.33 splinter channel operation), ADM-P## (full ADM control option only), NCD-Opr (only selectable in Cipher Text and in Current Mode), and Private. (Only selectable in the FM mode in the 130-174 MHz and 403-512 MHz bands).
LOS FM Current Mode * LOS Private Mode
LOS -P05 Sq- -04 LOS -P## TK## FSK VINSN V16k FM V R ###. ### T ###. ### R ###. ### T ###. ### Normal Tpwr. 38 dB Private Tpwr 38 dbm Guard: Off Guard: Off CTCSS CTCSS Cannot be used in CT Mode. Rx ###. # T ###. #
Activates Carrier Tone Controlled Squelch System
Selectable when FM Frequency is 130 - 173.995 MHz, or 403 - 511.995 MHz
CTCSS - In the RX or TX, use the arrow keys to select the receive frequency ID number or transmit frequency ID number. Refer to para 3.74.3.
MARITIME Current Mode * MARITM -P## Sq- -000 TK## FSK VINSN V16k Channel: ## USA Ship R ###. ### T ###. ### Normal Tpwr 38 dbm Guard: Off Guard Options: None, Off, On, Emergency
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 289
The “P##” field automatically changes to “EMR” when the guard field is set to Emergency.
The terminal has 20 presets available.
Guard Off - Values are None, Emergency, On and Off.
NONE is a display-only field and is present if the terminal is not being operated in the 108-174 MHz or 225-400 MHz frequency bands.
On selection activates a scan between the main receive channel and the guard channel.
Off disables guard scanning.
The Emergency selection disables the guard scanning and tunes the terminal to the guard frequency. The emergency selection is only allowed in the Current Mode.
HIGH POWER XMIT WARNING
Msg 16:42z 01 of 01 Displayed if power is greater than 40dbm in LOS, Warning High TX Maritime and Beacon. Power Operate 2 ft. Away From RT 01 Press ESC to clear Msg.
ADM/ADC Operation in LOS Mode
LOS -P## Sq- -04 Message configuration settings must be made TK## FSK VINSN V16k on the PC without full ADC control installed R ###. ### T ###. ### on the radio. ADM-P01 Tpwr 38 dbm Guard: Off
SATCOM SETUP
Hot Key 3, 1 (SATCOM PRESETS)
Set Mode Preset SATCOM -P## TK## FSK VINSN V16k Channel: 999 Non-Standard (NS) frequencies shown R266.400 NS T300.000 Normal Tpwr 38 dbm
Variant field: Normal / ADM-P##
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 290
20 SATCOM presets - Each SATCOM preset represents a complete terminal setup in the SATCOM mode. The parameters required for each preset are the modulation type, data rate, encryption type, voice/data selection. Satellite channel number and data encoding method
Although the modulation type is selectable, modulation will be determined by type encryption, V/D, and data rate on the Current Mode menu. If the desired type encryption cannot be selected, the correct channel number may need to be entered. Allowable encryption type selections depend on the channel bandwidth. It may be necessary to perform the setup steps in a different order than given to accomplish the desired setup.
If the desired data rate cannot be selected, the correct channel number may need to be entered before proceeding.
When a Non-Standard (NS) frequency is selected, the operator will manually enter the frequencies in the receive/transmit positions.
At the variant field, Normal is selected for normal operations. ADM-P## will be selected if full ADM control capability is installed. Select ADM preset (01-20) for embedded ADC operations. If using external ADC operations, select ADM EXT.
SATCOM OPERATION
SATCOM Voice Current Mode
WIDEBAND SATCOM NARROWBAND SATCOM
SATCOM -P## Sq- -234 SATCOM -P## Sq- -234 TK## FSK VINSN V16k TK## PSK MELP V2400 Channel: 100 Channel: 129 R262.375 T295.975 R272.365 T325.965 Normal Tpwr 38 dbm DIFF Tpwr 38 dbm
SATCOM Data* Current Mode
WIDEBAND SATCOM NARROWBAND SATCOM
SATCOM -P## Sq- -234 SATCOM -P## Sq- -234 TK## FSK VINSN D16k TK## PSK ANDVT D2400 Channel: 100 Channel: 129 R262.375 T295.975 R272.365 T325.965 ADM-P01 Tpwr 38 dbm ADM-P01 Tpwr 38 dbm DIFF
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 291
WARNING Satellite communication antennas concentrate transmitter signals into beam of high energy electromagnetic radiation. Do not stand in front of the satellite antenna or touch it at any time when transmitting. Since the AN/PSC-5C can transmit in the DAMA mode without the user being aware, a distance of at least 10 inches should be maintained from the front of the satellite antenna at all times to avoid partial body exposure which could exceed the applicable permissible limits. Avoid physical contact with any bare-metal wire or antenna surface because it could result in a RF shock or burn.
Point the antenna in the general direction of the satellite.
WARNING Volume levels at the handset/headset/earphone/loudspeaker must be adjusted to the minimum levels required for operation. The volume control should be adjusted from the minimum position up to a comfortable level. Prolonged excessive volume will lead to hearing loss.
Peaking Satellite Signal
SATCOM -P## Sq- -234 Move the antenna from side to side while TK## FSK VINSN V16k observing the field strength indicator. Adjust Channel: 100 for maximum strength indication. R262.375 T295.975 Normal Tpwr 38 dbm Move the Antenna up and down, peaking the field strength indicator.
The AN/PSC-5D is ready to support communications.
SATCOM Preset Modification SATCOM -M## Sq- -234 The preset number field (“P##”) indicates the TK## FSK ANDVT D2400 parameters displayed are stored as a preset. Channel: 129 The P will change to an M (modified) if R272.365 T325.965 parameters are changed. Manual changes will Normal Tpwr 38 dbm only be valid with the Current Mode in use and DIFF will not change preset parameters.
ADM Operation
SATCOM -P## Sq- -234 Message configuration settings must be TK## FSK VINSN D 16k made on the PC without full ADC control Channel: 999 installed on the radio. R266.400 T300.300 ADMP-P## Tpwr 38 dbm
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 292
MISCELLANEOUS OPERATIONS
Hot Key #3, then #1.
Set Mode Preset Change mode field to BEACON. BEACON -P# T ###. ### The only changeable fields are Frequency & FM Tpwr 38 Modulation (AM/FM); however, modulation db depends on the selected frequency. Note: There are 2 Beacon Presets.
Beacon Operation
LOS -P## Sq- -000
TK## FM VINSN V16k BEACON -P1 Tx-123
R ###. ### T ###. ### T243.000
Guard: Off AM Tpwr 38 dbm
Normal Tpwr 38 dbm
At the Current Mode screen, change mode to Beacon.
WARNING: Keep away from the antenna and do not touch the RT case while in Beacon mode. In Beacon Mode, you are transmitting (near 20 watts) and the RT will get hot. Remove radio from your back before operating in Beacon mode.
When the ENT key is pressed, the RT will go into Beacon Mode and begin to transmit continuously.
While transmitting, the RF is modulated with a tone sweeping from 150 to 3850 Hz.
The Beacon mode provides for an emergency beacon transmission modulated with a swept frequency tone.
Type modulation is selectable only when both AM and FM are valid for the selected frequency.
The transmit power is not selectable. If modulation is FM, TPWR = 43 dbm; if AM, Tpwr = 40 dbm.
TACSAT
TACSAT Radios are also used by LRS for BLOS communications
Can be used for both voice and data
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 293
Advantages over HF: Speed Easy to operate Faster data transfer speeds
…but satellites have become overcrowded
Tacsat radios can also be used for BLOS communications. TACSAT radios can be used for both voice and data traffic. The advantages of using TACSAT over HF are: They are faster to set up, they are relativity easy to operate, and huge amounts of data can be sent faster over TACSAT channels. However, these advantages also make TACSAT attractive to everybody else, and today most satellites are at their full capacity.
DAMA
Demand Assignment Multiple Access is a method of gaining efficiency in the use of UHF SATCOM channels through automated channel sharing. Demand based assignment means that unused transponder space can be dynamically reallocated in near real-time on the basis of precedence. This will increase the loading efficiency by providing roughly four to twenty times the information throughput of current systems. A channel is divided by a DAMA CONTROL STATION (PCC) into segments called “time slots”. A user terminal interacts with the control station, which dynamically allocates time slots for that user’s communications. Channel resources are allocated on the basis of current needs and network rankings. Any unused DAMA channel resources are available to be shared by everyone.
DAMA allows many more users to access a satellite at once.
Also known as “Narrow-band” channel.
Each user must have an address that is in the GCS/PCC database.
No more “bootlegging” of satellites.
GCS/PCC has complete control of resources.
Because more and more users need to access satellite channels, a technology known as DAMA was developed. DAMA is a technique of satellite resource manipulation that allows many users on a satellite to share a limited assignment of channels. As one user connects to the satellite they draw from a common "pool“of channels. When that user disconnects from the satellite the space returns to the pool for other users to access. In order to access a DAMA satellite, uses must be assigned an address that must be recognized by the Ground Control Station. This gives the control station complete control of each satellite.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 294
Two Types of DAMA
ADHOC DAMA - TBA to TBA
TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) DAMA - Net call to Guard Address
DAMA Capable Radio: PSC-5 (All Models), PRC-117F, G, LST-5D
Delays:
Primary Channel Controllers (PCC’s)
1. CONUS/LANT - Norfolk, VA 2. PAC/CONUS - Hawaii 3. IO/LANT - Naples, Italy 4. PAC/IO - Guam
25 kHz FRAME
Channel Control Order Wire (CCOW) User Segments A, B, & C Range: (Timing synchronized) Link Test: (Link quality) Return Channel Control Order Wire (RCCOW)
ORDERWIRE TRANSMISSIONS
1 - Request from operator to communicate sent to controller. (Service Set-Up) 2 - Controller validates request, checks database for stations called, sends order wire(s) Authorizing communications. 3 - In some cases, one or each terminal will be required to respond to the controller with an additional order wire before communications can take place.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 295
1. Communications take place between the operators in much the same manner as current communications. However, delays are always present to allow for the DAMA operation. 2. Controller continues order wires, as necessary to maintain DAMA communications. Each controller provides different amounts and types of order wires.
25-kHz DAMA CAPABILITIES
Accesses to a channel Two-Party Calls Conference Calls (5 additional station plus yours (6 total). Paging (Hot key 9) Order wire Responses Setup and Teardown (Hot key 1 Setup) (Hot key 2 Tear down) Send Status B Out-of-Service (Hotkey 0)
USING DAMA
Order wires sent between the terminals and controllers are encrypted via separate keys and COMSEC devices – ensure that you have both!
Understand what the requirements are for the specific type channel you are using (5-kHz or 25-kHz)
Know which control station is the Primary Channel Controller (PCC)!
Utilize the Satellite Access Request (SAR) for all DAMA requests. (Freq. Manger job) Identify all terminal addresses every time Assign Precedence to each terminal address Request Network Address Submit data rates required – 75 to 2400 bps 5-kHz DAMA and 75 bps to 16 kbps on 25-kHz DAMA
CALL THE CONTROLLER AND CONFIRM SATELLITE ACCESS AUTHORIZATION (SAA) AND THAT ALL REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED!!
USING DAMA – ACCESSING THE SATELLITES
SAA received and confirmed
Terminal presets and initial access to the channels (5-kHz and 25-kHz) are similar – terminology major difference.
COMSEC and Order wire keys must be loaded (Order wire keys in first 4 positions!)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 296
Preset the channel information (channel number, mode of operations, COMSEC device, and data rate, type of DAMA, Configuration Code, encrypted order wires, DAMA operations, and ranging).
Preset database information (terminal address, guard list with network address, 5-kHz or 25-kHz information as required)
25-KHz DAMA TERMINOLOGY
Terminal Base Address (TBA) – unique address permanently assigned to a person, which is programmed into the terminals. Also known as Terminal Node Address, Terminal Base Address or TBA (5 digit #) (Phone # for the Radio)
Network Address – provided to the net via the SAA. Changes occur based on satellite access request, satellite footprint, number of networks requested. Also known as Guard Two types of Guard Address Common Guard – unlimited users and pre assigned time slot Private Guard – limited to 64 terminals in network, must identify NCS/ANCS of net (only ones able to call the net), and NO pre assigned time slot. MUST be programmed into all terminals via the Guard List (Hot Key 2-2) When using NCS Controller, also known as Subnet Address – same limitations as stated for Guards
Guard List (Hot Key 2-2) – used in the terminal for receiving calls to other than the Terminal Address. ALWAYS place guard address in the Guard List May place up to 15 addresses in Guard List – any combination of terminal and network addresses.
SEND STATUS B – used to notify the controller that the terminal is in operation. Also used when any major changes are made to the Current Mode.
SERVICE SETUP – (Hot Key 1) used to request access to the channel for communications. Two Party Call – only one address (terminal or network) is called – may be timed or may select indefinite Conference Call – up to six different addresses may be called (only one may be a network address). Must be timed – 0-60 seconds, minutes, hours, or days.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 297
Teardown – (Hot key 2) indicates to the controller that you have completed communications for now. Automatic when time expires on conference call Can be done prior to completion Must be done by all terminals except last – penultimate terminal actually completes the service Two party calls are manually torn down With one other terminal – one terminal tears down With private network – initiator tears down, communications completed. Otherwise, each terminal tears down except last.
Out of Service – (Hot key 0) used to let the controller know terminal is off the air Code – not required Time – not required Precedence – not required Once terminal has received order wires, it is back in network – highly advised that operator send a Status B message!
DAMA Terminology
Silent – 5-kHz DAMA – terminal does not transmit, range nor respond to order wires unless Operator initiated. (Operator has to initiate)
EMCON – 5-kHz and 25-kHz – terminal does not transmit, range nor respond to order wires.
Active Ranging – terminal periodically ranges to the satellite. (SOF does Active)
Passive Ranging – terminal computes range to satellite based on information supplied via the database.
Data Transfer (Hot Key 6) – 25-kHz DAMA – allows operator to send 3-digit groups (000-255) (four at a time) to another terminal on the same channel from the radio (unit owned) .
Paging (Hot Key 9) – 25-kHz DAMA – allows the operator to signal another terminal on the same channel.
Multi-hop – 5-kHz DAMA – ability to transmit to any terminal address in any footprint while operating in DAMA mode via voice or data communications.
5 Things Required for DAMA Communications.
1. TEK (F1) 1. Acquiring 4. TBA (4-1) 2. Order wire Key (F2) 2. Range 5. DAMA Preset (3-1) 3. Guard Address (2-2) 3. Connected
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 298
LOAD COMSEC COMSEC Randomize Rotate function switch from PT to CT Proceed to F1 and Press ENT Twice Proceed to F1 press enter x 2 (0)
F1: COMSEC Connect DS-102 device Connect Device (CYZ-10 in K13 protocol or KYK-13) 1-Transfer Variables **
Sel Device: AUTO102 Select fill position (1-20)
F1: COMSEC Select fill type (prep device) DS -102 COMSEC Key: 01 Press enter Key Type: VINSN
LOAD ORDERWIRE KEY
Set mode switch to F2. F2 Fill Order wire Prepare CFD. Filling Attach CFD with W4 cable to fill connector. Keys: 1 Press desired fill position on RT (1-8) and Load: 1 press enter on RT. Observe number appear on bottom of display screen. Insure you fill slots 1-4 with the same OW key. F2 Fill Order wire Disconnect CFD. Filling Keys: Turn mode switch to CT. Load: 1
Hot Key # 2
DATABASE MENU 1- STATUS MESSAGE 2- GUARD LIST 3- SAT EPHEMERIS 4- INFO CODES
5- COMSEC KEY STATES 6- TIME OF DAY 7- LOAD HQ FMT NET 8- ERASE TRANSEC 9- CLONE MODE 0- VARIABLE DATABASE *
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 299
Hot Key 2-1 Status Msg
Line 1 - Shows message number and total messages in memory.
Lines 2-4 - Shows last 10 messages received. A Status Msg 03 of 05 check mark is displayed in front of the message to Ranging Successful indicate that it has been read. (Appendix J for description) 01
01 - Shows how many times the present message has been received.
HOTKEY 2-2 Guard List GUARD LIST VIEW The guard list is a set of addresses for which 1 ______a terminal receives services. The guard number 4 ______is the address of a subscriber or net that uses a 7 ______terminal. The service destination address must 10 ______match one of the guard addresses to be received 13 ______by the terminal .
HOTKEY 2-3 SAT Ephemeris Satellite Ephemeris SatID: U02 Manual Data entered in the SATELLITE EPHEMERIS Efct Date: ------and TERMINAL DATA menus is used for Mean Anomaly: 000000 making passive ranging calculations when Mean Motion: 000000 PASSIVE ranging is selected from the Eccentricity: 000000 DAMA menu. Argmt Perigee: 000000 longitudeAsn: 000000 HOTKEY 2-4 Info Codes Inclination: 000000
Information Codes Allows entry of information codes (12345) that will be sent in response to request codes (01) from the controller. DC 01 001
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 300
HOTKEY 4-1 Terminal Data
Terminal Data Location data entered in the TERMINAL DATA DATA menu is used for making ranging calculations when DAMA Adress: ------(TBA) PASSIVE ranging is selected from the DAMA Combat ID: ------
menu
DS-101 Address: 254
Backlight Timer: 08 HOTKEY 4-2 (5K DAMA I/O Rates) Msg Release:MANUAL
LAT: N 00:00 5KHz DAMA I/O Rates LON: E 000:00 __75 __300 __600 Platform: Stationary __1200 __2400 __4800 Freq Band: Limited __9600 __16K __19K Remote OPT: PRCD __36K __38K ANDVT/MELP: Fixed
ANDVT DATA: KYV-5
KG-84 Phasing: Medium
DAMA PRESETS
Turn on RT to PT. ESC to MAIN MENU. Erase parameters (6 & 4). Ensure you are in LOS mode in the CURRENT MODE. Go back to the MAIN MENU.
Hot Key 3, 1 (DAMA PRESETS)
Voice Data
Set Mode Preset Set Mode Preset DAMA -P## DAMA -P## TK## PSK MELP V2400 TK## PSK ANDVT D2400 25 kHz 183 Channel: 041 25 kHz 183 Channel: 041 R269.650 T310.650 R269.650 T310.650 Normal Tpwr 38 dbm ADM-P01 Tpwr 38 dbm Code: 60 OW:CT Code: 60 OW:CT Range: Active Range: Active Satellite ID: U04 Satellite ID: U04 Send Status B: Yes Send Status B: Yes
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 301
DAMA OPERATIONS
From the CURRENT MODE screen change mode to DAMA. Pull up your DAMA preset ## and press enter. Scroll down to where it says start DAMA for ##### (Terminal Base Address). Press the ENT key.
Initial access to 25 KHz DAMA network
25-kHz DAMA
Once the radio has acquired the PCC and ranged to the satellite, the first line states 25k AC CONNECTED N. NOTE – waveform is 1.3866 seconds long.
SEND STATUS B – send when initially contacting the controller or when any major changes have been made to your preset. Once accepted, no changes are noted on DAMA screen.
DAMA Sq- 034 The RT is looking for the Satellite and talking to the 25K AC Acquiring M PCC. SRV – IDLE You may observe an arrow key (right of the “M”) upSend Status B going & down.
DAMA Sq- 041 The “M” indicates missing ORDERWIRE. You can Up 25K 25k AC Acquiring miss to 200 consecutive ORDERWIRE frames and SRV – IDLE still be connected. Send Status B The “N” indicates you have a new status message. DAMA Sq- 034 Read it by using the shortcut key #5. 25K AC Connected N SRV – IDLE Once the “SRV-IDLE changes to SRV-Connected 1-Service setup you are ready to send the Service Setup.
25-kHz DAMA
Set up a service – Two-Party or Conference (two-party – one address called; conference – up to five other addresses called) Remember to time the conference call. Precedence does not have a real effect on request. All calls except common network compete for available time slots that match data rate of request. Ideal method is to set up a two-party service with indefinite time to the common network as there will always be a time slot available!
Pop up message identifies that the service has been assigned – screen changes to reflect SVC-TX/RX and if timed, timer appears
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 302
SERVICE SETUP
DAMA Rx-Ct-234 Enter SERVICE SETUP. 25K AC Connected SRV – IDLE 1-Service setup Service setup P00 Select a preset number or go with 00. Prec: R Select your Precedence (R, P, I, F, FO, EA). #####, #####, ##### Enter GUARD ADDRESS or a terminal #####, #####, ##### ID number(s) for conference call. Prec: R #####, #####, ##### #####, #####, ##### Set your time. 14 MIN (SEND) Send SERVICE SETUP.
DAMA RX / TX
You could receive one of the following: DAMA Rx-Ct-234 SRV-Pend 25K AC Connected N SRV-Disc SRV - Rx / TX SRV-Qued Send Status B SRV-Rx/TX
If your request was approved your screen should change to this. You should have 3 new messages waiting to be read. One message should say “Service Request Transmitted”. One message should say “Service Request Acknowledged”. The other message is “Range Successful”. If your service was approved you are ready to communicate in DAMA.
PSC-5C/D DAMA HOT KEYS
Send Status B 1- Service Setup 2- Teardown 3- Service State 4- Network State 5- Status Message 6- Data Transfer 7- Link Test 8- Information Report 9- Paging 0- Out of Service
25-kHz DAMA
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 303
Teardown – when communications have been completed, all terminals send teardown message (except last). Receive teardown complete order wire and screen reflects idle.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 304
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 305
Vehicle Communication
GMV STD Phase II C4ISR Package
Command Control Communications Computers (C4) Intelligence Surveillance Reconnaissance (ISR)
GUNTRUCK M1165 Up-Armored Four-door High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV) GM turbocharged 400 CID motor Four-speed auto trans Armor cert 7.62mm Armor piercing incendiary round. Wt: 9,870lbs
VEHICLE LOAD PLAN
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS The radio systems SATCOM (PSC-5 / PRC-117) UHF/VHF LOS (2x PRC-148) Vehicle Internal interCom (VIC) system
MA6943 VEHICLE ADAPTER Vehicle Adapter and Amplifier for AN/PRC-148 MBITR Increase to 20 Watt RF Output 12-32 VDC Input Power Range
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 306
ADDITIONAL ELECTRONICS
Defense Advanced Global Positioning System Receiver (DAGR): a military GPS. DAGR (Puck) Antenna L1 Tracking (1575.42 MHz) L2 Tracking (1227.60 MHz)
Electronic Counter Measure System (ECMS): an IED jammer . ROVER system: download videos from UAVs / Predator’s flying overhead. Video feed from UAV’s / Predators directly to the vehicle thru the Remote Operations Video Enhanced Receiver (ROVER) to the C4I JPT.
Joint Platform Tablets (JPT) an “IPad” for your vehicle systems. Two pads control two separate functions. 1. FBCB2 (BFT) mapping system 2. Command & Control over the radios
SUPPORT ELECTRONICS Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Supplies power to the electronics: radios, computers, etc. First device powered up Integrated Doc for FBCB2 JPT (IDOC) allows FBCB2 to rcv data downloads Data Distribution Unit (DDU) Supplies info to the C4I JPT. “Finger buster” last device powered up, (then turn on C4I JPT).
SFB 3512 MULTI-BAND TACTICAL VEHICLE ANTENNA (Whip) 30 – 512 MHz frequency range 75 watts of power capacity Built-in high-voltage power line protection (internally fused) Two per vehicle (A & B)
AV 2091 SATCOM ANTENNA (Eggbeater) Omni-directional Frequency: 243-318 MHz 200 Watts Power Handling Capacity (formerly X-wing)
Force 21 Battle Command Brigade and Below (FBCB2) MT 2011F Transceiver (FBCB2) L Band (950MHz – 1450 MHz)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 307
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 308
AN VIC-3 (Vehicle Intercom System)
Characteristics: Provides internal crew communications thru helmets/headsets and radio voice traffic.
Components: Master Control Station (MCS) Full Function Crew Stations (FFCS) Loudspeaker (LS) Radio Interface Terminal (RIT)
Master Control Station (MCS) Characteristics: Controls and monitors overall operation. Provides the system with regulated power, audio, and control signals. Provides connections for two radio transceivers. Provides connections for vehicle alarms, loudspeaker, and field wires.
Full Function Crew Stations (FFCS) Characteristics: Interface between user and radio systems. Stations: Driver, TC, Passenger #1, Turret-gunner, Passenger #2 & #3, Tail-gunner, Each is set by jeweler’s screw in bottom (1-6)
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 309
POWER UP PROCEDURE
1 Start vehicle motor 2. Turn on PDU (Power Distribution Unit) “Banana switch” to ON. Located under the main gunner’s feet. The PDU provides regulated and filtered DC power to electronic equipment. (All except DDU) Provides individual power switch and circuit breaker for each C4ISR component. 3. Power on the DAGR GPS Receiver 4. Turn on the Windshield antennas (L band) 5. Power on IDOC (toggle switch) 6. FBCB2: The FBCB2 requires several minutes to boot-up so continue to power up other electronics (digital patience): Power ON/OFF (press & hold) LEDs: red to green, amber START/LOGIN “FBCB2” Continue [NO] to virus scan (Engage digital-patience) **Before step 12, must have green gumball in upper left corner of screen. 7. AN/PRC-148 (Radio “B”) 8. VIC 9. Satcom 10. AN/PRC-148 (Radio “A”) 11. Rover Receiver (If equipped) 12. DDU (knuckle-busting’ difficult switch last thing) When the FBCB2 is receiving GPS data (green gumball), turn on DDU. 13. Power on C4I JPT. Windows 7 should show in display monitor. Double click DRS icon to start C4I manager program (DRS is the software company)
POWER DOWN Reverse power up procedures. JPT [Exit] [Start] [Shutdown] DDU finger busting switch: LED (The only equipment that will remain powered up after PDU banana switch) FBCB2 [Shutdown] “System halted” PDU banana switch. (SATCOM, LOS 1& 2, FBCB2, IDOC, ANTs) Shut down engine.
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 310
ROVER IV 4 Remote Operations Video Enhanced Receiver
The ROVER is a light weight portable radio receiver that supports video downlinks from surveillance aircraft using a variety of communications protocols. Operates in Ku, C, L & S frequency bands. (Predator drones operate in C band)
Frequency Bands: S band is analog signal L band is analog signal C band is a digital & analog sig
COMPONENTS: ROVER 4 receiver Laptop PC (or JPT on a vehicle) RF Omni direct ants (C/L/S & Ku Band) Cables
INSTALL: Install RT to AC power (battery box elbow- connector) Install coax from CLS-band ant to RT (ANT) Install laptop to AC power (plug in) “Medusa” data cable P1 Data connector on J2 port RT Ethernet connector to laptop (2 pc) USB to laptop at VIDEO OUT on RT Power on the laptop PC Power on the RT. Front panel display may take up to 45 seconds to illuminate.
ROVER-4 CONFIG PC Double click the ROVER GUI icon. Graphic User Interface program will open. Click on Mode. Select Configure. Choose Standard. May require a restart if prompted. Click-on RECIEVER window (tab) Link mode drop down menu. (S-band) Frequency Data rate (Analog) Antenna / LNA power button Open media player. Double-click icon Frequency search option Components: Link protocol Frequency Framing mode (Packet Mux) Data Rate
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 311
ROVER 4 CONFIG Turn on RT [ESC] left [ENT] right [ESC] x4 until L-3 COMM appears in display window. [ENT] Receiver appears. Press [ENT] Config appears. Press [ENT] Framing appears. Press [ENT]
PC Double click the ROVER GUI icon. Graphic User Interface program will open. Click on Receiver window (tab). Establish data link (LINK list drop down menu). Frequency control Turn ON Low Noise Amp (LNA) Select Player type Select Player type C & L band analog player icon C band Rover icon Ku band may require two vid streams
ROVER 4 Double click the L3 icon Or Start: All Programs: L3: Players: L3 Players Open window, view download
Note: Player: General: check Run channel scan on startup
Hit record (red button)
ROVER 4 CONFIG JPT Components to select: Link protocol Frequency Video Player
POWER DOWN In the GUI under the Receiver tab, click the LNA button to turn off the LNA. Close GUI Turn off RT toggle Shut down PC
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 312
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 313
Frequency Length Chart
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 314
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 315
Frequency Spectrum Chart
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 316
Morse Code Alphabet/Numbers
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 317
MEDEVAC
URGENT: Casualties require immediate life sustaining actions. PRIORITY: Casualties have injuries where treatment can be delayed for a short period. ROUTINE: Casualties have minor injuries or such severe injuries that they are not expected to survive.
Precedence: Priority
1. Precedence: (urgent, priority, routine) 1. 2 priorities 2. Number KIA/WIA: 2. 2 WIA 3. Nature of wounds: 3. 1 gunshot to leg, 1 gunshot to chest. 4. Grid coordinates of EVAC point: 4. PJ 12345678 5. Medical assistance required: 5. None 6. LZ secure/not secure: 6. Secure 7. Marking of LZ: 7. Red smoke 8. Best approach direction: 8. North East at 15 degree 9. Remarks: 9. Need O pos
MEDEVAC Sav Ser Sup 6
MEDAC.
1) Location of pickup site (six digit grid coordinates). 2) Radio frequency and call sign (secure/non secure). 3) Number of patients by precedence (URGENT, PRIORITY or ROUTINE). 4) Special equipment required; e.g. hoist, penetrator, whole blood, etc. 5) Number of patients by type (litter or ambulatory) 6) Number and type of wound, injury, illness, etc. 7) Method of marking pickup site (PZ) 8) Patient nationality and status 9) Terrain description (obstacles, slope, etc.).
Example.-MEDAC
MEDAC (AAA) MN674920 (BBB) 42.35, X7M (CCC) 1 Urgent, 1 priority (DDD) Stokes Litter (EEE) 2 Litter (FFF) Gunshot wound right chest, Gunshot wound left leg. (GGG) Red smoke (HHH) Both USA (III) Open field, Scrub Oak
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 318
Notes:
18E SWC Mr. Sharp Communication Book Page 319